Skip to main content

Full text of "A digest of deductive logic for the use of students"

See other formats


J      ! 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/digestofdeductivOObarkricli 


A  DIGEST  OF  DEDUCTIVE  LOGIC 


A   DIGEST 


OF 


DEDUCTIVE  LOGIC 


FOR  THE    USE    OF    STUDENTS 


JOHNSON   BARKER,  B.A. 


METHUEN  &  CO. 

36,  ESSEX   STREET,  W.C. 

LONDON 

1897 


^3 


PREFACE 

This  book  does  not  pretend  to  be  a  treatise.  It 
is  a  note  book,  intended  to  be  used  side  by  side 
with  the  ordinary  Manual.  My  indebtedness  to 
the  ordinary  Manual,  as  may  be  supposed,  is  con- 
siderable, for  in  large  part  these  notes  are  little 
more  than  a  summary  of  what  any  ordinary 
manual  will  contain  :  to  summarise,  however,  was 
my  main  purpose. 

The  book  is  designed,  as  stated  in  the  title,  for 
students  preparing  for  examination.  It  offers 
them,  firstly,  an  outline  of  that  portion  of  the 
subject  which  the  text  book  treats  in  full ;  and, 
secondly,  it  provides  a  somewhat  fuller  discussion 
of  points  that  are  apt  to  be  overlooked  or  omitted. 
It  has  been  my  aim  throughout  to  bring  into  the 
relief  of  bare  outline  the  essentials  of  deduction, 
and  to  elucidate  obscurities. 

This  book,  then,  differs  from  other  works  in 
being  condensed  where  they  are  full,  and  in  being 
supplementary  where  they  are  condensed,  and  thus 
it  may  claim  a  certain  sort  of  freshness  of  treatment. 

220697 


vi  PREFACE 

These  notes  have  already  been  found  useful  in 
teaching.  It  is  hoped  that  their  usefulness  may 
be  extended  by  publication. 

The  questions  in  Appendix  I.  are  selected 
mainly  from  the  B.A.  examination  papers  set  at 
the  Universities  of  London  and  Durham.  They 
are  arranged,  as  far  as  possible,  in  sets  correspond- 
ing to  the  subject  matter  of  the  chapters  to  which 
the  Roman  numerals  refer.  The  number  of  ques- 
tions might  easily  have  been  multiplied  :  their 
purpose  here,  however,  is  not  so  much  to  supply 
an  exhaustive  praxis,  but  to  indicate,  all  along  the 
line  of  the  study,  the  general  standard  required  of 
those  who  take  up  Logic  for  examination. 

The  Bibliography  in  Appendix  II.  is  not  in  any 
sense  complete.  It  is  a  list  compiled  in  the  course 
of  my  own  reading,  which  for  purposes  of  reference 
from  time  to  time  I  have  found  useful.  It  is  more 
complete  than  any  similar  list  with  which  I  am 
acquainted. 

Johnson  Barker. 


CONTENTS 


CHAP. 

I.  LOGIC,    THOUGHT,    AND    LANGUAGE 

IL  DEFINITION    AND    SCOPE    OF    LOGIC 

III.  THREE    PARTS    OF    LOGICAL    DOCTRINE 

IV.  TERMS 

V.  CONNOTATION    AND    DENOTATION 

VI.  PROPOSITIONS 

VII.  PREDICABLES    AND    PREDICAMENTS 

VIII.  DEFINITION    AND    DIVISION 

IX.  IMPORT     OF     CATEGORICAL     PROPOSITION 
QUANTIFICATION    OF    THE    PREDICATE 

X.  DIAGRAMMATIC    REPRESENTATION 

XI.  IM.MEDIATE    INFERENCES 

XII.  THE    LAWS    OF    THOUGHT 

XIII.  THE    SYLLOGISM 

XIV.  FIGURE    AND    MOOD  :    REDUCTION 


PAGE 
I 

7 
17 
25 
32 

37 
48 

55 

59 
65 
71 
85 
89 
100 


Vlll 


CONTENTS 


CHAP.  I'AGE 

XV.       IRREGULAR     AND      COMPOUND     SYLLOGISMS       112 


XVI.       FALLACIES    ... 

XVII.       THE    VALUE    OF    THE    SYLLOGISM 
XVIII.       SUMMARIES    AND    TABULAR    STATEMENTS 

APPENDIX      I EXAMINATION    PAPERS 

APPENDIX    II BIBLIOGRAPHY      ... 


123 
129 


A  DIGEST  OF  LOGIC 

CHAPTER    I 

LOGIC,   THOUGHT,  AND    LANGUAGE 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  ch.  iv.  and  vi. 
Keynes,  Introduction. 
Welton,  Vol,  i.,  Introd.,  ch.  i. 
Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  i. 


Logic  is  the  science  of  the  laws  of  valid  thought. 

No  such  science  is  possible  without  a  commonly 
received  and  understood  means  of  expressing 
thought.  The  accepted  means  of  expression  is 
language.  At  the  outset  therefore  we  must  take 
into  account  the  nature  and  purpose  of  language 
in  its  connexion  with  thought. 

Matter  of  thought  is  suppHed  b}^  sensory  impres- 
sions, which  act  as  stimuli  to  the  mind  and 
excite  ideas.  This  raw  material  becomes  know- 
ledge only  through  the  activity  of  the  mind  itself. 
Mind  has  a  power  of  synthesis  which  collects  into 


2  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

one  complex  whole  the  various  impressions  received 
through  the  senses,  and  allocates  them  in  one 
external  object,  of  which  we  thus  form  a  mental 
image  or  idea.  This  result  of  mental  activity  is 
perception.  Perception,  then,  may  be  defined  as 
that  state  of  mind  in  which  it  becomes  conscious 
of  an  individual  sensible  object.  But  we  are  capable 
of  more  than  such  simple  acts  of  consciousness, 
and  so  much  more  that  this  is  not  commonly 
regarded  as  being  thought  at  all. 

The  first  stage  of  thought  is  conception.  Con- 
ception is  the  name  for  knowing  generally,  as 
opposed  to  perception  in  which  we  apprehend  only 
the  attributes  of  the  individual  thing  perceived. 
The  concept  is  to  be  regarded  as  an  extract  or 
deposit — either  word  is  better  than  "abstract" — 
from  a  number  of  resembling  percepts  or  images. 
It  is  a  general  notion  formed  by  a  comparison  of 
individuals  and  the  selection  of  attributes  common 
to  them  all :  in  other  words  it  is  the  discovery  of 
likeness. 

Perception  is  apprehension  of  a  thing :  concep- 
tion is  apprehension  of  a  kind  of  thing.  Percept 
is  knowledge  of  a  particular  :  concept  is  knowledge 
of  a  general.  For  perception  naming  is  advan- 
tageous, but  not  essential.  For  conception  language 
is  indispensable.  The  name  combines  and  registers 
in  a  fixed  form  a  group  of  certain  attributes,  which 
otherwise  would  become  disunited  in  thought  when 
not  attended  to.  It  helps  to  recall  that  group  and 
to  keep  it  distinct  from  other  groups. 


LOGIC,  THOUGHT,   AND    LANGUAGE       3 

The  psychological  concept  is  equivalent  to  the 
logical  connotation  or  significance  of  a  class  name 
or  general  term.  The  general  term  thus  formed 
need  not  refer  to  any  actually  existing  class.  It 
is  enough  that  such  a  class  can  be  conceived  in 
thought,  even  though  it  have  only  one  actual 
representative,  or  exist   only  in   imagination. 

Naming,  therefore,  or  some  similar  system  of 
signs,  is  an  essential  factor  in  the  progress  and 
process  of  thought.  The  concept  is  the  unit  of 
thought,  and  without  a  name,  would  rapidly  tend 
to  disintegrate. 

Language  may  be  defined  as  a  system  of  signs 
for  the  purpose  of  facilitating  or  economising  the 
process  of  thought  and  of  recording  and  expressing  its 
product.  This  definition  includes  gesture  or  imitative 
language,  and  conventional  or  verbal  language. 
In  conventional  language  the  connexion  between 
symbols  and  ideas  is  arbitrary  and  artificial. 

Speech  is  the  universal  medium  of  communica- 
tion because  it  is  a  natural  method  of  expression. 
Men  speak,  not  because  they  mean  to  speak,  but 
because  they  are  constituted  as  they  are.  It  is 
also  the  most  easily  employed,  as  well  as  the  most 
effective  system  of  intercommunication. 

The  chief  functions  of  language  may  .  thus  be 
summarised — 

I.  It  is  a  means  of  intercommunication. 

II.  It  is  a  mechanical  aid  to  thought,  enabling 
us  to  form  concepts  and  facilitating  the  process  of 
thinking. 


4  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

III.  It  is  an  instrument  of  record  and  reference, 

demanding  two  main  requirements,  viz. — 

(i)  Precision  or  definiteness  of  meaning,  and 
(2)  Completeness. 
Language  is  modified  by  two  great  and  contrary 
processes,  viz. — 

I.   Generalisation,  and 
II.  Specialisation. 

I.  Generalisation  arises  from  detection  of  like- 
ness between  a  new  object  without  a  name,  and 
some  other  object  well  known ;  the  old  name  is 
applied  to  the  new  object.  This  change  is  usually 
effected  by  a  sort  of  unconscious  instinct  in  a 
number  of  persons  using  the  name.  In  the 
language  of  science  such  changes  are  often  pur- 
posely made.  Proper,  or  singular  names,  are 
constantly  generalised  both  in  popular  and  in 
scientific   language. 

II.  Specialisation  is  a  change  exactly  the  oppo- 
site, and  equally  important.  A  name  originally 
applicable  to  a  multiplicity  of  objects  by  usage 
comes  to  be  applied  only  to  a  few ;  or  to  put 
the  same  fact  in  another  way,  applied  originally 
in  a  general  sense  it  comes  to  have  a  special 
significance  and  application.  One  effect  of  special- 
isation is  what  is  known  as  dcsyiionyiiiisatioii^  or 
the  differentiation  of  synonyms. 

In  addition  to  the  changes  effected  b}^  generalis- 
ation and  specialisation,  vast  enlargement  and 
changes  have  also  been  made  in  language  b}-  the 
process  of  analogous    or  metaphorical   extension  of 


LOGIC,  THOUGHT,    AND    LANGUAGE       5 

the  meaning  of  words.  Practically  this  consists 
in  generalisation,  and  differs  only  in  proceeding 
by  analogy  rather  than  identity,  that  is,  the  ex- 
tension of  meaning  is  based  on  imagined  re- 
semblance rather  than  any  actual  likeness  between 
the  new  object  and  the  old  after  which  it  is  called. 

Ambiguities  of  language  are  of  frequent  occur- 
rence. Very  few  words  indeed  have  one  and  only^ 
one  definite  meaning.  The  exact  meaning  of  a 
word  depends  for  the  most  part  upon  the  context 
in  which  it  is  used.  This  indeterminateness  of 
meaning  gives  rise  to  confusion  of  thought  and 
misunderstanding — technically  called  fallacy.  Bear- 
ing this  in  mind,  words  have  been  classified  as — 

L  Univocal  when  they  suggest  no  more  than 
one  definite  meaning, 

IL  Equivocal^  ambiguous,  or  Jiouionyiiioits  when 
suggestive  of  two  or  more  meanings,  and 

II L  Analogous  when  with  the  same  meaning 
they  have  a  different  application.  E.g.  foot — of  a 
mountain  :  of  an  animal :  of  a  page  :  a  measure  of 
length. 

Equivocal  words  are  further  classified  according 
as  equivocation  arises  from  their  (i)  Sound,  (2) 
Spelling,  or  (3)  both  Sound  and  Spelling.  These 
latter  are  grouped  according  as  equivocation  arises 
from  {a)  accidental  confusion  of  different  words, 
(^)  transfer  of  meaning  by  association  of  ideas,  or 
{c)  logical  transfer  of  meaning  to  analogous  objects. 

An  ambiguous  word  is  in  reality  not  one,  but 
two  or  more  words  confused   together.      Language 


6  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

is  full  of  ambiguities,  and  we  cannot  proceed  far 
in  logic  until  we  have  placed  a  precise  interpret- 
ation upon  certain  forms  of  words  as  representing 
thought.  If  thought,  and  thought  alone,  were  the 
subject  matter  of  logic,  there  would  be  no  such 
necessity.  The  fact  that  such  necessity  exists  shows 
that  to  eliminate  all  considerations  of  language 
from  logic  is  an  impossibility.  In  dealing  with 
such  ambiguous  words  logically,  we  must  first  of  all 
determine  from  the  context  one  clear  and  definite 
meaning.     Then,  and  not  till  then,  can  we  proceed. 


CHAPTER   II 

DEFINITION    AND    SCOPE   OF    LOGIC 


REFERENXES 

Jevons,  Lessons,  ch.  i. 

Keynes,  Introd.,  §§  i  and  2. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Introd.,  ch.  ii.,  pp.  16 — 19. 

Mill,  Logic,  Introd. 

Mill,  Exam,  of  Sir  IVni.  Hamilton,  ch.  xx.,  p.  373. 

Ray,  Introd.  and  Appendix  E,  p.  302. 

Bain,  Ded.  Log.,  pp.  30— 37- 

Read,  Carveth,  Theojy  of  Logic,  Introd. 


Logic  is  the  science  of  the  principles  which  regulate 
valid  thought  and  its  expression  in  language. 

Many  other  definitions  of  logic  have  been  given 
which  have  varied  greatly  according  to  the  view 
taken  of  the  scope  of  the  science.  Of  these  Bain  in 
his  Deduction  quotes  and  discusses  the  following — 

[rt:]  The  Art  of  Reasoning. 

\b'\  The  Science  and  Art  of  Reasoning. 

[^]  The  Science  of  the  Laws  of  Thought. 

\d\  The  Science  of  the  Operations  of  the  Under- 
standing in  the  Pursuit  of  Truth. 


8  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

[c]  The  Science  of  the  Operations  of  the  Under- 
standing which  are  concerned  in,  or  are  subservient 
to,  the  Estimation  of  Evidence. 

Mill  quotes  and  criticises  the  definitions  [a],  [d], 
and  [d],  giving  [e]  as  his  own. 

Reverting  to  the  definition  given  at  the  head  of 
this  chapter,  and  accepting  it  as  tolerably  compre- 
hensive, the  meaning  of  the  words  employed  must 
be  clearly-  understood. 

Science  is  coherent  or  systematised  knowledge. 
Its  office  is  to  detect  and  describe  the  natural  laws 
inflexibly  observed  by  the  objects  treated  in  the 
science.  There  is  a  science  of.human  reason  or 
thought  because  there  are  uniform  modes  in  which 
every  one  thinks  and  reasons,  and  must  think  and 
reason. 

A  law  or  principle  is  uniformity  of  mode  :  also 
the  statement  of  this  uniformity.  In  other  words 
it  is  the  statement  of  a  general  truth.  By  laws  of 
thought  we  mean  "a  certain  uniformity  or  agree- 
ment which  exists  and  must  exist  in  the  modes 
in  which  all  persons  think  and  reason,  so  long  as 
they  do  not  make  what  w^e  call  mistakes,  or  fall 
into  self-contradiction  and  fallacy  "  (/evo/is). 

Psychology  deals  with  these  laws  in  the  sense  of 
uniformities,  that  is,  laws  in  accordance  with  which 
men  are  found  by  experience  normally  to  think 
and  reason.  It  also  investigates  their  genesis  and 
development.  Logic  deals  with  them  purely  as 
statements  which  are  regulative  and  authoritative, 
that   is,  as  affording   criteria    by  the  aid  of  which 


DEFINITION   AND   SCOPE   OF   LOGIC       9 

valid    and    invalid    reasonings   may   be  discrimin- 
ated. 

The   word   thought    is    used    at   least    in    three 
senses,  viz. — 

{a)  Any  mental  state  :  conceiving,  judging,  in- 
ferring. 

{b)  Thought-process:  conception,  judgment,  in- 
ference. 

(c)  Thought-product  :  concepts,  judgments,  in- 
ferences. 

With  regard  to  validity  or  truth,  the  most 
effective  statement  is  that  valid,  true,  or  correct 
thought  or  thinking  is  that  which  is  so  recog- 
nised by  all  minds,  that  is,  a  thought  is  valid 
when  it  holds  not  only  for  the  thinker,  but  for  all 
others  to  whom  he  may  communicate  it.  True 
thought  has  a  general  application  :  it  is  knowledge 
of  a  general  kind  for  all  alike.  Logic  investigates 
and  determines  the  conditions  under  which  the 
thought  of  one  mind  can  stand  for  the  thought  of 
all  minds ;  it  is  concerned  with  the  conditions 
under  which  a  thinker  can  claim  from  all  minds 
assent  to  his  own  thought. 

Validity  is  of  two  kinds :  {a)  formal,  (J?)  real. 

{ii)  Formal  validity  is  self-consistency,  z.  e.  not 
self-contradiction. 

{U)  Real  validity  is  consistency  with  objective 
reality,  i.  e.  with  fact. 

Take,  e.g.  two  propositions — 
(i)  All  men  are  mortal. 
(2)  No  man  is  immortal. 


lo  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

You  cannot  but  think  (i)  when  the  thought  ex- 
pressed is  referred  to  the  real  and  actual  experi- 
ence of  life,  and  it  assures  the  validity  of  (2),  that 
is,  (2)  is  true  in  consistency  with  and  because  of 
(i).  Some  affirm  that  there  is  no  other  logic  than 
that  which  has  to  do  with  making  thought  self- 
consistent.  The  Laws  of  Thought  {q.  v.),  Identity, 
Contradiction,  and  Excluded  Middle,  are  laws  of 
consistency. 

The  wider  view  of  consistency  requires  the 
agreement  of  thought  with  fact.  In  the  example 
above,  (2)  is  consistent  with  (i),  and  is  therefore 
logically  valid.  But  does  it  also  agree  with  fact  ? 
If  not,  it  must  be  rejected  as  invalid.  It  is  to  be 
noted  that  the  conditions  for  determining  the 
truth  of  self-consistency  are  different  from  those 
which  determine  the  consistency  of  thought  with 
fact. 

Since  the  time  of  Kant,  it  has  been  usual  to  call 
that  treatment  of  logic  which  deals  with  the 
internal,  intrinsic  or  self-consistency  of  thought  by 
the  name  of  pure  or  formal  logic  as  opposed  to 
applied  or  material  logic  which  deals  with  the  ex- 
ternal, extrinsic  consistency  of  thought,  /.  f.  of  the 
agreement  of  thought  with  its  object  as  actually 
existing  either  as  something  material  or  mental, 
real  or  imaginary. 

Formal  logic  takes  no  account  whatever  of  the 
subject  matter  of  thought.  It  deals  with  thought 
without  any  extrinsic  reference,  /.  e.  without  refer- 
ence to  fact  or  reality  of  any  kind.     Hence  we  may 


DEFINITION   AND   SCOPE   OF   LOGIC     ii 

represent   thoughts   by  bare   and  empty  symbols. 
Thus  in  the  empty  schema — 

All  M  is  P 
All  5  is  M 


All  6"  is  P 


S,  M,  and  P  may  stand  for  anything.  The 
reasoning  proceeds  and  the  conclusion  follows 
irrespective  of  the  matter  denoted  by  the  terms 
involved  or  our  knowledge  of  their  meaning ;  the 
intrinsic  consistency  of  the  thought  remains  un- 
altered however  we  interpret  the  terms. 

The  distinction  between  formal  and  material  logic 
does  not  correspond  with  the  distinction  between 
Deduction  and  Induction.  Some  writers  wrongly 
make  this  distinction,  e.g.  Bain  and  Fowler.  There 
is  a  Logic  of  Formal  Induction  as  much  as  a  Logic 
of  Formal  Deduction,  just  as  there  is  also  a  Logic 
of  Material  Deduction. 

The  laws  of  thought  have  been  called  necessary. 
Their  "  necessity  "  consists  in  the  impossibility  of 
ev^ading  them  without  inconsistency.  In  the  defin- 
ition of  logic  therefore  as  "the  science  of  the 
necessary  laws  of  thought,"  necessary  means  valid 
in  the  sense  of  being  self- consistent. 

As  with  the  definition  of  logic  the  scope  and 
purpose  of  the  science  is  variously  stated  accord- 
ing to  the  aspect  in  which  it  is  regarded.  If  a 
man  holds  that  general  knowledge  or  thought  pro- 
ceeds only  by  way  of  language,  he  may  treat  of 


12  A    DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 

it  by  its  expression  and  he  is  called  a  nominalist. 
If  he  holds  that  you  may  think  without  language, 
he  may  treat  of  it  by  concepts,  judgments,  infer- 
ences, and  he  is  called  a  conceptualist  But  by 
talking  of  names  and  concepts  indifferently  no 
inconsistency  is  involved,  for  nominalism  need  not 
be  accepted  so  as  to  deny  conceptualism,  nor  need 
conceptualism  be  accepted  so  as  to  affirm  the 
possibility  of  thought  without  language. 

Again,  thought  is  always  of  something,  i.  e.  has 
an  objective  reference,  though  not  necessarily  of 
anything  which  actually  exists.  But  even  when 
thinking  of  something  which '  has  no  objective 
existence  it  is  thought  of  as  an  object,  i.e.  the 
thought  is  objectified.  Thus  we  may  proceed 
further  and  say  that  logic  is  concerned  with  things 
in  so  far  as  they  are  the  objects  of  thought,  and 
with  language  in  so  far  as  it  is  the  embodiment  of 
thought.     This  is  the  view  of  the  Realist. 

Though  as  pure  logicians  we  deal  with  the  form 
or  manner  of  thought  as  opposed  to  its  matter, 
yet  in  a  sense  log^ic  is  an  objective  science :  in  the 
sense,  that  is,  of  dealing  with  a  certain  aspect  of 
things,  viz.  their  thinkableness. 

There  are  then  three  aspects  in  which  logic  may 
be  viewed,  viz. — 

I.   Subjectively, 
II.  Objectively, 

III.  Verbally. 

As  previously  stated  the  definition  of  logic 
adopted    by    any   one    logician    will    be    modified 


DEFINITION    AND   SCOPE    OF   LOGIC 


according  to  the  point  of  view  taken.  The  defini- 
tions following  are  framed  in  accordance  with  one 
or  other  of  these  aspects,  and  exhibit  the  difference 
which  the  point  of  view  adopted  necessitates. 

I.  Subjective  aspect.  Logic  is  the  science  of 
the  regulative  principles  of  thought  ;  or  the  science 
of  the  axioms  and  laws  to  which  thought  must 
conform  in  order  to  be  valid. 

This  definition  may  be  read  as  either  that  of 
formal  or  material  logic  according  to  the  meaning 
of  the  word  valid.  If  valid  be  read  as  self-consistent 
the  definition  is  of  formal  logic.  But  if  as  con- 
sistent with  reality  it  is  the  definition  of  material 
logic. 

II.  Objective  aspect.  Logic  is  the  science  of 
the  most  universal  relations  and  correlations  of 
things  and  attributes,  i.  e.  the  science  of  the  prin- 
ciples and  laws  to  which  we  must  conform  in  order 
that  a  relation  established  by  comparison  of  things 
and  attributes,  or  inferred  from  one  or  more  given 
relations  between  them,  may  be  true.  This  is  a 
definition  of  material  logic. 

III.  Verbal  aspect.  Logic  is  conversant  about 
language,  and  is  the  science  of  the  use  of  names, 
propositions  and  arguments  ;  or,  logic  is  the  science 
of  the  import  and  relations  of  propositions.  As 
already  noted,  this  treatment  of  logic  is  some- 
times called  Nominalism,  as  opposed  to  Concep- 
tualism.  These  names  are  ambiguous,  for  they 
usually  apply  to  certain  doctrines  concerning  the 
true  nature  of  concepts,  or  general  names.     Nom- 


14  A    DIGEST   OF    LOCUC 

inalism  however,  involves  no  more  than  a  clear 
recognition  that,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  all  thought- 
processes  of  any  complexity  are  carried  on  by  the 
aid  of  language.  It  is  here  used  to  denote  that 
view  of  logic  which  seeks  to  remove  from  it  the 
matter  of  thought,  and  also  the  mode  of  thought, 
and  limits  the  science  to  a  consideration  only  of 
the  expression  of  thought.  In  this  sense  logic 
is  also  sometimes  spoken  of  as  symbolic. 

Ill  its  relation  to  other  sciences  logic  has  been 
called  ^^ scientia  scientiannn''  because  in  their 
method  the  sciences  are  based  upon  logical  prin- 
ciples. This  is  its  general  r&lation.  There  are 
other  special  relations  of  logic  to 

(i)  Metaphysics. 

(2)  Psychology. 

(3)  Rhetoric,  and 

(4)  Grammar. 

In  general  the  difference  between  logic  and  the 
other  sciences  may  be  stated  as  follows  :  the  laws 
of  thought  arc  laws  of  things  as  thinkable  and  are 
subjective  in  so  far  as  they  relate  to  thinking  :  but 
objective  in  so  far  as  they  relate  to  the  objects 
thought  about.  In  the  other  sciences  we  never 
get  so  far  away  from  the  objective  basis.  In  logic 
the  subjective  aspect  is  always  prominent  and 
immediate. 

More  particularly  the  relation  of  logic  to  these 
four  sciences  may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows  : 

(i)  Metaphysics  is  the  most  general  and  specu- 
lative of  the  mental  sciences,  and   its  office  is  to 


CHAPTER    III 

THREE   PARTS   OF   LOGICAL   DOCTRINE 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  ii. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Introd.,  ch.  ii.,  pp.  19  seq. 


Logic  is  usually  regarded  as  consisting  of  three 
parts,  which  according  to  the  point  of  view  are  : — 

I.  ia)  Concepts,  {b)  Terms,  or  {c)  Things  or 
attributes.       Y 

II.  {a)  Judgments,  (b)  Propositions,  or  {c)  Rela- 
tion between ,  things  and  attributes,  things  and 
things,  or  attributes  and  attributes. 

III.  {a)  Inference,  {b)  Syllogism,  or  {c)  Inference 
of  relation  between  things  and  attributes,  things 
and  things,  or  attributes  and  attributes  from  one 
or  more  given  relations. 

In  this  partition  {a)  will  be  the  phraseology  of 
formal  logic,  {b)  that  of  symbolic  logic,  and  [c]  that 
of  material  logic. 

Method  is  sometimes  added  as  a  fourth  part  of 
logical  doctrine.     It   refers  to  the   disposition    or 


1 8  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

arranorement  of  a  series  of  reasonincf  in  discourse, 
and  is  therefore  a  part  of  rhetoric  rather  than  of 
logic. 

These  three  parts  of  logical  doctrine  call  for 
further  discussion,  and  though  the  following  analysis 
of  conception  is  strictly  speaking  psychological, 
it  finds  a  place  here  in  deference  to  tradition  which 
includes  in  the  treatment  of  logic  notice  of  the 
dispute  anent  the  nature  of  the  concept.  The 
practical  purpose  served  by  introducing  a  notice 
of  this  dispute  is  that  it  enables  us  to  understand 
more  clearly  than  we  could  do  otherwise  what  is 
the  subject  matter  about  which  logic  is  con- 
versant. 

I.  Three  views  as  to  the  nature  of  the  concept 
have  been  formulated.     They  are  known  as 

(i)  Realism, 

(2)  Conceptualism,  and 

(3)  Nominalism. 

( 1 )  The  Realists  hold  that  for  every  concept  or 
general  name  there  is  somewhere  in  existence  an 
objective,  real  something  to  correspond  with  it. 
They  deny  that  the  concept  is  a  psychical  pro- 
duct which  grows  out  of  a  perception  of  singular 
or  particular  objects.  This  view  is  obsolete  and 
has  now  only  a  historic  interest. 

(2)  The  Conceptualist  asserts  that  the  concept 
is  an  intelligible  synthesis  of  attributes,  without 
any  existing  objective  entity,  and  that  thought 
proceeds  without  the  accompaniment  of  definite 
images  by  means  of  the  concept  alone. 


THREE    PARTS    OF   LOGICAL   DOCTRINE     19 

(3)  According  to  the  Nominalist  view  a  class 
is  constituted  only  by  its  name  :  and  the  general 
name  has  nothing  to  correspond  with  it  either 
objectively  or  subjectively.  It  is  held  that  every 
time  a  general  name  is  used,  an  image,  or  a  rapid 
succession  of  images  of  various  members  of  the 
class,  is  present  to  the  mind,  and  as  these  images 
are  individual  they  cannot  be  concepts,  for  as  we 
have  already  seen  the  concept  is  knowledge  of  a 
general. 

The  Conceptualists  and  Nominalists  (both  are 
sometimes  called  Nominalists)  agree  in  declaring 
that  the  development  of  the  concept  is  by  elabora- 
tion from  perceptions.  The  Conceptualist  declares 
that  in  the  concept  there  is  something  more  or  less 
definitely  represented  by  the  mind,  that  the  concept 
is  not  an  image  of  a  thing,  but  is  some  kind  of 
image.  The  Nominalist  holds  that  the  concept 
is  nothing  before  the  mind  at  all,  but  is  a  symbol, 
generally  vocal,  as  a  word  or  name  :  and  that  any 
image  you  can  have  is  the  image  always  of  one 
thing,  and  as  that  is  not  a  concept  the  name  of 
the  thing  must  be.  Bain  as  a  Nominalist  says 
that  the  true  psychological  aspect  of  the  concept 
is  the  representation  of  a  number  of  individuals 
in  rapid  succession.  If  so  the  concept  would  be 
a  mere  collection.  In  conception  we  have,  as  a 
matter  of  fact,  no  definite  or  distinct  image  before 
the  mind  at  all. 

These  two  positions  are  both  true  in  part.  The 
truth  appears  to  lie  in   a   combination  of  the  two 


20  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

views.  No  general  statement  about  the  concept 
which  shall  be  fully  applicable  to  all  cases  can  be 
made,  for  it  includes  a  great  variety  of  different 
kinds  of  intellectual  product.  This  variety  is 
shown  by  such  a  list  of  words  as  follows : — tiger, 
iron,  man,  fatJier,  symbol,  murder,  nationality, 
substance. 

What  the  concept  is  as  before  the  mind  depends 
greatly  on  the  number  and  kind  of  experiences 
brought  together  under  it.  If  these  experiences 
have  been  limited  in  number,  or  have  been  ex- 
tremely uniform,  departing  little  from  a  certain 
sort  of  medium  character,  then  some  kind  of  repre- 
sentation is  possible :  yet  not  the  representation 
of  any  one  object,  since  then  it  would  not  be  a 
concept,  but  a  representation  having  something 
only  of  the  definiteness  of  an  image. 

If  a  variety  of  perceptions  with  few  resemblances 
and  predominant  differences  are  brought  together, 
it  is  impossible  to  have  any  sort  of  representative 
image,  nevertheless  there  is  the  concept,  for  we 
can  still  conceive.  E.g.  Of  the  concept  tiger  a 
certain  image  comes  before  me  representative  of 
each  tiger  of  the  class  of  animals  so  named  :  it  has 
a  certain  colour,  size,  stripes,  yet  none  of  these 
definitely  represented — at  any  rate  there  is  more 
than  the  mere  name.  No  one  tiger  in  particular 
is  represented,  nevertheless  there  is  an  image,  not 
altogether  indefinite  and  yet  not  definite.  The 
Conceptualist  rightly  holds  in  opposition  to  the 
Nominalist  that  although  vague  there  is  represent- 


THREE   PARTS   OF   LOGICAL   DOCTRINE     21 

ation,  in  other  words  that  to  some  extent  we  do 
visualise. 

Of  concepts  such  as  nvn  the  case  is  different. 
There  is  no  image  as  with  f/^-er,  man,  etc.  It  is 
easy  for  the  ConceptuaHst  to  instance  such  examples 
as  tiger,  etc.,  and  apply  them  universally :  it  is 
also  easy  for  the  Nominalist  to  instance  others  such 
as  iron  and  apply  them  in  like  manner. 

As  a  matter  of  psychical  fact,  the  human  mind, 
impressed  by  a  variety  of  experiences,  simultaneous 
or  successive,  and  trying  to  reduce  them  to  unity, 
almost  inevitably  resorts  to  muscular  expression 
and  notably  to  a  movement  of  the  larynx,  which 
results  in  sound.  Words  are  sounds  available  for 
language,  and  they  start  forth  naturally  from 
human  beings  merely  on  occasion  of  the  reception 
of  a  multitude  of  similar  impressions,  and  so  use- 
ful are  words  found  to  be  that  even  percepts  come 
to  possess  names,  and  in  the  end  we  don't  properly 
perceive  unless  the  percept  is  named.  As  previously 
stated,  for  general  knowledge  naming  is  indis- 
pensable, and  it  is  to  naming  as  a  means  of  know- 
ing generally  that  the  mind  naturally  resorts. 

Now  concepts  or  general  notions  are  of  such 
variety  that  a  statement  equally  applicable  to  all 
is  impossible.  The  statement  of  the  Nominalist 
is  that  all  conceiving  consists  in  naming.  To 
imagine  or  to  perceive  there  is  no  necessity  for 
speech,  but  in  order  to  conceive  there  is  such 
necessity,  and  it  is  with  a  view  to  conceiving  that 
language   arose.     But  it   must    be    also    admitted 


22  A    DIGEST   OF   LOCilC 

that  the  concept  is  a  something  subjective  apart 
from  something  objective,  and  apart  also  from  its 
symbol  as  expressed  in  speech. 

II.  A  judgment  is  the  apprehension  of  relation 
between  two  concepts.  In  judging  or  forming  a 
judgment  two  concepts  are  brought  together  for 
the  purpose  of  comparison.  It  is  thus  the  psychical 
correlative  of  the  logical  proposition.  In  other 
words  a  judgment  is  a  mental  act,  its  expression 
in  language  is  a  proposition. 

As  to  the  nature  of  a  judgment  widely  divergent 
views  are  held.  Our  estimate  of  the  scope  of  logic 
will  determine  the  view  we  adopt.  There  are  two 
main  points  of  dispute,  viz. — 

{a)  Concerning  the  matter  of  the  judgment  the 
question  arises  ;  between  what  is  it  that  a  relation 
is  apprehended  ? 

{b)  Concerning  the  form  of  the  judgment  the 
question  arises;  what  is  the  nature  of  the  relation 
between  the  two  terms  } 

The  second  point  is  discussed  under  the  head  of 
the  Import  of  Propositions  {q,  v.). 

With  regard  to  the  matter  of  the  judgment  there 
are  again  the  three  conflicting  theories,  (i)  Nomin- 
alism, (2)  Conceptualism,  and  (3)  Realism  or  Ma- 
terialism. It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that 
these  names  most  commonly  refer  to  the  doctrine 
of  the  concept  just  discussed. 

(i)  Nominalism  identifies  the  judgment  with  the 
proposition,  and  holds  that  we  deal  with  names  and 
names  alone.     The  judgment  is  only  a  statement 


THREE    PARTS    OF   LOGICAL   DOCTRINE     2 


about  names  affirming  or  denying  one  or  the  other. 
According  to  this  view  the  whole  scope  of  logic  is 
bounded  by  names  and  their  relations. 

(2)  Conceptualism,  as  the  name  implies,  regards 
the  judgment  as  the  comparison  of  concepts  purely 
as  concepts.  From  this  standpoint  logic  has  been 
defined  as  the  science  of  the  pure  (or  formal)  laws 
of  thought,  or  as  the  science  of  thought  as  thought. 
It  is  the  logic  of  consistency  which  takes  no  account 
of  language  as  the  expression  of  thought  and  no 
account  of  matter  as  that  about  which  the  thought 
is  conversant. 

The  extremists  of  this  school,  as  Mansel,  hold 
that  all  a  judgment  can  express  is  that  one  concept 
is  contained  in,  or  forms  part  of  another  concept, 
and  that  the  judgment  cannot  do  more  than  unfold 
and  make  explicit  the  content  of  a  concept. 

(3)  Materialism  explains  judgment  as  a  relation 
between  two  concrete  objects  having  nothing  to 
do  with  the  mental  abstraction  of  their  attributes. 
Propositions  do  not  express  relation  between  con- 
cepts, but  between  the  things  these  concepts  repre- 
sent. When  we  say,  e.g.  grass  is  green  :  this  does 
not  mean  that  our  concept  grass  contains  or  agrees 
with  our  concept  green,  but  that  the  thing  grass 
possesses  the  attribute  greenness.  The  scope  of 
logic  thus  becomes  the  investigation  of  the  condi- 
tions of  real  validity.     Th^'s  is  Mill's  standpoint. 

The  extremists  of  this  school  are  known  as 
Transcendental  Logicians. 

III.  Inference   or   Reasoning   is   a  comparison   of 


24  A    DTGESI'    DI'    \f)(]](' 

judgments  resulting  in  another  judgment  differing 
from  the  first. 

According  to  the  point  of  view  it  has  been 
variously  defined,  and  as  before  there  are  the  three 
doctrines. 

(i)  NominaHsm  regards  inference  as  the  act  of 
thought  by  which  we  proceed  from  one  or  more 
propositions  to  a  third  proposition,  the  truth  of 
which  necessarily  follows  from  those  previously 
given. 

(2)  Concept-ualism  regaids  inference  as  the  pro- 
duct of  comparing  two  of  more  judgments  with  a 
view  to  arriving  at  another  which  is  contained  in, 
or  warranted  by,  the  judgments  already  in  the 
mind. 

(3)  Materialism  regards  inference  as  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  relation  between  two  things  or  two 
attributes  or  between  things  and  attributes  by 
means  of  a  third  thing  or  attribute,  or  the  infer- 
ence of  a  relation  between  things  and  attributes  or 
things  and  things  or  attributes  and  attributes  from 
one  or  more  such  relations  given. 


ciiai^ti^:r  IV 

tp:rms 


RKI'KRKNCKS 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  iii.  and  v. 

Keynes,  Part  i.,  pp.  7—51.     Most  useful. 

Mill  less  useful  here  than  in  the  later  part  of  his  bk. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  15k.  i.,  ch.  i  and  2. 


A  Term  is  one  or  more  words  forming  the  subject 
or  predicate  of  a  proposition:  derived  from  the 
Latin  tenniiins  meaning  a  boundary.  It  is  the 
verbal  equivalent,  in  a  proposition,  of  an  object  or 
f^roup  of  objects  :  or  of  a  concept. 

In  a  wider  sense  it  is  synonymous  with  name. 
It  is  well  to  avoid  thinking  of  names  as  terms,  a 
name  is  only  a  term  when  it  forms  one  element  of 
a  proposition.  There  are  two  terms  in  a  proposition 
between  which  the  proposition  asserts  a  relation  to 
exist. 

Hobbes'  definition  of  a  name  is  usually  quoted 
in  this  connexion  and  runs  as  follows  :  "  A  name 
is  a  word   taken  at  pleasure  to  serve   for  a  mark 


26  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

which  may  raise  in  our  minds  a  thought  Hke  to 
some  thought  we  had  before,  and  which,  being  dis- 
posed in  speech  and  pronounced  to  others,  may  be 
to  them  a  sign  of  what  thought  the  speaker  had  or 
had  not  before  in  his  mind." 

It  is  not  accurate  to  describe  a  term  or  name  as 
a  concept  expressed  in  language,  for  names  are 
primarily  names  of  things,  by  which  is  meant 
objects  of  thought,  and  only  secondarily  names  of 
ideas. 

Words  are  of  two  kinds  : — 

I.  A  categorematic  word  is  a  word  capable  of 
being  used  by  itself  as  a  term  :  tantamount  to 
"  term." 

II.  A  syncategorematic  word  is  not  capable  of 
being  used  by  itself  as  a  term  :  tantamount  to 
"  not-term."  Jevons  speaks  loosely  of  syncategore- 
matic  terms. 

Categorematic  words  are  nouns  or  their  equiva- 
lents. By  a  suppositio  materialis  any  word  may 
be  used  categorematically,  ^.^.  This  "that"  is  a 
demonstrative  pronoun. 

Names  are  common,  applicable  to  more  objects 
than  one,  or  Individual,  applicable  to  one  object 
only. 

Common  navies  are  General  or  Col- 
lective. 

Individual  names  are  Singular  or  Proper. 

A  general  name  is  the  name  of  a  group  of  things 
or  attributes,  whether  real  or  imaginary,  and 
applies  both  severally  and  collectively;  /.r.  to  all 


TERMS  27 

and  each.  It  is  distributive :  oriines  as  opposed  to 
cuncti.  A  general  name  is  applicable  to  a  number 
of  things  in  virtue  of  their  being  similar,  or  having 
something  in  common.  This  means  in  effect  that 
it  is  the  name  of  a  concept  as  well  as  of  individual 
things. 

A  collective  name  is  the  name  of  a  group  taken 
together,  i.  e.  collectively  only.  It  refers  to  all 
{cuncti)  not  each.  A  collective  name  may  be 
singular  or  general.  There  is  no  antithesis  between 
general  and  collective  as  is  sometimes  implied.  The 
classes  overlap.  The  important  logical  antithesis 
is  between  the  collective  and  distributive  use  of 
names.     E.g. — 

Collective:  All  the  angles  of  a  triangle  are  eqjial 
to  tivo  rig] it  angles. 

Distributive:  All  the  angles  of  a  triangle  are  less 
than  tivo  right  angles. 

A  singular  name  is  capable  of  being  applied  only 
to  one  individual  object.  In  dealing  with  singular 
names  we  are  dealing  with  objects  in  the  sense  of 
percepts. 

A  proper  name  is  a  singular  name  given  to  an  indi- 
vidual merely  as  a  mark  to  distinguish  it  from 
others.  It  is  an  arbitrary  and  unmeaning  verbal 
sign,  fohn  is  a  proper  name  which  can  be  correctly 
affirmed  of  more  than  one  individual,  but  this  does 
not  make  it  general.  The  test  of  a  proper  name  is 
insignificance,  lack  of  meaning. 

Are  substantial  names  singular  or  general  ? 
Substantial    is   a    \\-ord    suggested    by    Jevons    to 


28  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

describe  the  names  of  materials,  as  eartJi,  oii,  ivater^ 
flame.  They  are  a  pecuHar  kind  of  collective  name 
with  the  special  characteristic  of  theoretically  in- 
finite divisibility,  and  at  the  same  time  they  possess 
perfect  homogeneity  or  uniformity  of  structure. 
The  test  of  generality  is  the  mark  of  quantity,  some, 
which  can  be  prefixed  in  a  meaning  sense  to  all 
names  that  are  general.  Some  cannot  be  attached 
to  a  really  singular  name.  We  can  say,  e.g.  "  some 
water  is  not  good  to  drink  : "  the  substantial  name 
water  therefore  is  general,  not  singular. 

Names  are  Concrete  or  Abstract. 

A  concrete  name  denotes  ^n  object  in  virtue 
of  special  qualities  which  it  possesses ;  or  a  class  of 
things  in  virtue  of  some  quality,  or  set  of  qualities, 
which  they  have  in  common.  Adjectives  are 
therefore  concrete,  being  epithets,  descriptive  of 
things. 

An  abstract  name  "  is  the  name  of  a  quality, 
attribute,  or  circumstance  of  a  thing."  It  only 
permits  of  one  judgment,  viz.  that  it  is  the  pro- 
perty of  its  corresponding  concrete. 

In  the  case  of  every  concrete  there  is,  or  may  be 
constructed,  a  corresponding  abstract ;  and  also  of 
the  abstract  there  is,  or  may  be  constructed,  a  cor- 
responding concrete.  Many  names  are  abstract 
or  concrete  according  to  the  precise  signification 
attached  to  them. 

A  general  name,  as  such,  is  concrete :  the 
name  of  the  attribute  connoted  by  the  general 
name    is   abstract.      The    general    name    denotes 


TERMS  29 

concrete  things  and  connotes  certain  common 
attributes. 

The  names  concrete  and  abstract  correspond  in 
a  certain  way  to  the  distinction  between  denotation 
and  connotation  {see  next  chapter). 

The  question  has  been  asked  whether  the  dis- 
tinction between  general  and  singular  names  can 
be  applied  to  abstracts.  In  reply  it  must  be  re- 
membered that  an  abstract  name  is  not  merely  the 
name  of  a  quality,  but  of  a  quality  considered 
entirely  apart  from  the  thing  possessing  it.  When 
we  begin  to  distinguish  kinds  and  differences,  and 
hence  to  use  abstract  names  in  the  plural  number, 
we  render  them  practically  concrete,  and  therefore 
so  far  general.  Every  abstract  name  that  is  the 
name  of  a  single  quality  (e.  g.  squareness,  different 
species  oi squareness  being  unimaginable)  is  singular. 

Names  are  Positive,  Negative,  or  Priva- 
tive. 

A  positive  name  implies  the  existence  or  posses- 
sion of  certain  definite  attributes. 

A  negative  name  implies  the  absence  of  one 
or  other  of  certain  definite  attributes.  Theo- 
retically every  positive  name  has  a  corresponding 
negative,  and  between  them  they  exhaust  the 
whole  universe  of  thought.  The  true  logical  op- 
position is  between  affirmative  (not  positive)  and 
negative.  Terms  having  a  thorough-going  negative 
character  are  called  Infinite,  Indefinite,  or  Indeter- 
minate :  e.g.  such  terms  as  not-white,  understood  as 
covering  with  zvhite  the  whole  universe  of  discourse. 


30  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

A  privative  name  implies  the  absence  of  qualities 
usually  possessed.  This  distinction  is  logically 
of  no  importance. 

Names  are  contradictory  or  contrary. 

An  affirmative  and  its  corresponding  negative 
are  called  contradictories.  Terms  thus  related 
exhaust  between  them  the  entire  area  of  thoug^ht : 
there  is  nothing  that  can  be  thought  of  to  which 
one  or  other  of  them  will  not  apply.  Aristotle 
first  thought  clearly  in  this  matter,  and  since  his 
time  dates  this  distinction  of  opposite  notions  and 
names.  In  propositions  this  opposition  is  still 
more  clearly  marked. 

Contraries  are  terms  the  farthest  apart  in  the 
same  area  of  thought :  e.  g.  zvJiite,  black.  They 
admit  of  a  positive  expression.  They  are  terms 
most  opposed   in   the   same  class. 

With  the  contradictory  you  deny :  with  the 
contrary  you  not  only  deny,  but  posit  something 
else.  The  contrary  opposite  is  more  than  a  bare 
negative.  The  contrary  of  any  assertion  is  counter- 
assertion  :  the  contradictory  of  an  assertion  is  its 
negation. 

Names  are  Relative,  Correlative,  oy 
Absolute. 

Relative  names  are  those  which  imply  in  their 
signification  some  object  over  and  above  the  one 
named  :  this  other  object  is  called  its  Correlative. 

Absolute  names  arc  names  not-rclativc. 

Relative  and  Absolute  in  the  Manuals  are  merely 
defined.     Their   opposition  is  not  clearly  brought 


TERMS 


31 


out.  Relatives  are  only  a  class  of  oppositcs,  and 
may  be  identified  as  contrary  opposites  :  e.  g.  child 
is  the  contrary  oi parent. 

Logically  no  name  is  so  absolute  as  not  to  have 
a  correlative,  which,  wanting  any  other,  is  its 
negative.  Any  name  is  relative  in  relation  to  its 
contradictory,  and  the  relation  of  contradiction  is 
the  only  one  we  can  be  sure  about  in  the  form 
of  thought.  The  opposition  of  positive  and  negative 
lies  at  the  very  foundation  of  thought,  and  in  talk- 
ing of  relatives  we  go  beyond  the  sphere  of  pure 
logic  as  such. 

So-called  absolutes  are  names  whose  opposites 
are  indeterminate :  e.  g.  inan^  the  indeterminate 
term   is   not-inan. 


32 


CHAPTER   V 

CONNOTATION   AND   DENOTATION 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons,  ch.  v, 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  i.,  t;h.  ii.,  pp.  62  scq. 

Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  ii. 

Keynes,  Part  i.,  ch.  ii. 

Ray,  Part  i.,  ch.  ii. 


The  meaning  of  a  name  in  reference  to  the 
concrete  is  called  its  denotation  or  application. 

The  meaning  of  a  name  in  reference  to  the 
abstract  is  called  its  connotation  or  implication. 

If  concepts  rather  than  names  be  regarded  as 
the  logical  unit  instead  of  denotation,  the  word 
extension  or  extent  is  used  :  and  instead  of  con- 
notation, the  word  intension,  intent,  content,  or 
comprehension  is  used.  The  mnemonic  Ex.  AND 
De.,  In.  and  Con.  will  help  to  fix  this  in  the 
mind. 

The  connotation  of  a  name  comprises  the  attributes 
on  account  of  which  any  individual  is  placed  in  the 
class  called  by  the  name ;    that  is,  those  attributes 


CONNOTATION    AND    DENOFATION       S3 

which  are  regarded  as  essential  to  the  class,  in 
the  absence  of  any  one  of  which  we  should  refuse 
the  name  to  any  individual :  or,  in  short,  the 
qualities  which  give  meaning  to  a  name.  It  may 
be  called  the  characteristic  of  a  name. 

The  denotation  of  a  name  is  made  up  of  all  the 
individuals  which  the  name  connotes :  that  is,  those 
objects,  real  or  imaginary,  to  which  the  name  is 
given. 

The  denotation  and  connotation  of  a  name  are 
mutually  related,  and  the  general  law  of  their 
relation  is  thus  stated —  C'^   ^-^ 

If  connotation  increases  denotation  decreases :  if 
denotation  increases  connotation  decreases. 

This  variation  is  not  in  mathematical  ratio,  and 
the  law  therefore  is  not  accurately  stated  when 
denotation  and  connotation  are  said  to  "  vary  in- 
versely," for  there  is  no  definite  measure  of  increase 
or  decrease  in  the  variation.  If  a  short  statement 
be  needed,  the  connexion  may  be  described  as  one 
of  opposite  mutation. 

We  must  be  careful  to  notice  how  connotation 
is  assigned '  and  determined.  All  the  attributes 
implied  by  the  name  form  its  connotation.  Con- 
notation consists  in  the  implication :  in  other 
words,  the  connotation  of  a  name  embraces  THOSE 
ATTRIBUTES,  and  those  only,  ON  ACCOUNT  OF 
WHICH  THE  NAME  IS  GIVEN,  and  wanting  any 
of  which  the  name  would  be  denied. 

Other  views  have  been  held.  It  has  been 
maintained  that  connotation  embraces — 


34  A   DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 

(i)  TJic  viaxinimn  of  attributes  common  to 
members  of  a  class  ;  if  so,  no  one  would  know  the 
meaning  of  a  term,  for  no  one  can  know  every 
quality. 

(2)  TJie  ascertained  attributes  which  members  of 
a  class  possess  in  common  ;  if  so,  connotation 
would  depend  upon  each  thinker's  personal  know- 
ledge, and  vary  moreover  as  knowledge  increased. 

(3)  The  miniimnn  of  common  attributes  sufficient 
to  distinguish  the  class  from  other  classes  ;  this  is 
too  narrow,  and  fails  to  give  the  import  of  a  term. 

(4)  The  fundamental  attributes  common  to  a 
class  ;  in  this  case  only  a  speciarlist  could  know  the 
connotation  of  a  term. 

Denotation,  which  is  the  meaning  of  a  term  in 
reference  to  the  concrete,  since  it  includes  all  the 
individuals  to  which  the  name  is  applicable  in  the 
same  sense,  is  possessed  by  all  names,  whether 
they  have  connotation  or  not,  though  in  the  case 
of  proper  names,  and  of  some  abstract  names,  the 
denotation  is  reduced  to  the  least  possible  limit, 
viz.  unity. 

This  twofold  meaning  of  names  is  sometimes 
expressed  somewhat  differently.  Names  are  classed 
as  connotative  and  non-connotative. 

A  connotative  name  is  one  which  denotes  a  subject 
and  implies  an  attribute  or  attributes. 

A  non-connotative  name  is  one  which  merel}^ 
denotes  a  subject  or  an  attribute.  It  is  also  called 
absolute. 

This  is  the  classification  adopted  b}-  Mill,  whose 


CONNOTATION    AND    DENOTATION 


03 


definitions  have  been  given  :  it  will  be  seen  that  a 
connotative  name,  thus  defined,  must  possess  both 
denotation  and  connotation.  By  the  word  subject 
he  means  anything  that  can  possess  an  attribute. 
By  attribute  he  means  not  only  the  outward  marks 
by  which  it  is  known,  but  all  its  properties  and 
relations  whatsoever. 

These  definitions  are  noteworthy  on  account  of 
the  discussion  to  which  they  have  given  rise,  and 
which  is  briefly  indicated  as  follows.  General 
names  are  connotative,  i.  e,  have  meaning ;  and 
they  must  have  meaning,  for  the  name  is  given 
to  each  of  a  multitude  of  particulars  upon  some 
general  ground  of  likeness.  It  is  the  likeness  that 
makes  the  name  expressive. 

The  general  name,  according  to  Mill,  denotes  a 
number  of  particulars,  and  connotes  the  resembling 
attributes  in  each  of  them.  Whately  in  different 
language  brings  out  the  same  point.  He  says, 
''  p-eneral  names  have  an  attributive  character." 

Proper  names,  as  such,  are  meaningless,  and 
therefore  non-connotative,  not  that  they  are  given 
for  nothing,  every  name  is  given  for  discrimination, 
but  this  is  the  only  purpose  of  a  proper  name,  and 
this  purpose  does  not  constitute  meaning.  The 
proper  name  is  a  sign  arbitrarily  put  upon  an 
object  to  mark  it  out  from  others.  A  connotative 
name  is  given  for  a  definite  reason  that  can  be 
assigned,  because  of  certain  attributes  possessed. 
Proper  names  may  suggest  certain  qualities  [e.g. 
Gladstone),   but    the    name    itself   was    not    given 


36  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

because  of  those  qualities,  and  suggestion  is  not 
significance.  Proper  names  are  not  given  because 
attributes  are  possessed  ;  if  that  were  so,  they  would 
become  general. 

A  connotative  name,  by  Mill's  definition,  is  one 
that  denotes  a  subject  and  connotes  an  attribute. 
Every  name  given  to  a  class  of  things  in  virtue  of 
some  quality  or  qualities  possessed  by  them  in 
common  is  concrete,  and  the  name  of  the  quality 
abstract.  Therefore  all  connotative  names  are  con- 
crete. Abstracts  and  concretes  go  in  pairs.  What 
is  connoted  by  the  concrete  is  denoted  by  its  cor- 
responding abstract,  i.e.  there  is  nothing  left  for  the 
abstract  to  connote.  Abstracts  are  therefore  in 
Mill's  phraseology  non-connotative. 


37 


CHAPTER   VI 
PROPOSITIONS 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons,  ch.  viii. 
Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  i. 
Keynes,  Part  i.,  ch.  i. 
Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  iv. 


A  proposition  is  a  combination  of  names.  It  cor- 
responds with  the  judgment  in  the  conceptualist 
view  of  logic,  which  is  a  combination  of  concepts. 
The  proposition  may  be  defined  as — 

A  statement  of  relation  between  objective  facts, 
which  are  apprehended  in  thought  and  expressed 
in  language  ;  or  the  expression  of  an  act  of  judg- 
ment ;  or  the  assertion  or  denial  of  agreement 
between  two  terms. 

It  consists  of  two  terms  connected  by  the  present 
tense  of  the  verb  "  to  be  "  ;  and  takes  the  form  of 
Subject  +  Copula  -}-  Predicate. 

Grammatically  the  proposition  answers  to  a  sen- 
tence indicative.  All  propositions  are  sentences, 
but  not  all  sentences  are  propositions. 


38  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

The  copula — is,  is  not — is  simply  a  lingual  con- 
trivance for  linking  the  terms  of  a  proposition 
together  for  the  purpose  of  comparison,  and  does 
not  necessarily  imply  existence. 

Hamilton  and  Fowler  insist  upon  a  imiform 
copula,  is  or  is  not,  according  as  we  affirm  or 
deny.  In  the  working  of  problems  which  involve 
propositions  it  is  a  great  and  important  safeguard 
against  error  to  re-express,  if  necessary,  the  propo- 
sition so  that  this  uniform  copula  shall  appear,  for 
it  helps  to  ensure  the  correct  interpretation  of  the 
proposition  in  question. 

The  traditional  view  of  the  proposition  has  four 
aspects  known  as  Relation,  Quality,  Quantity 
and  Modality.  The  current  classification  takes 
no  account  of  Modality,  which  is  therefore  lacking 
in  the  scheme  subjoined. 

I.  Relation. 

Categorical. 
Contingent: — 

Conditional.     If  S  is  J/,  t/ie?i  S  is  P. 

Hypothetical,    //"A  is  true,  then  B  is  true. 
Disjunctive.     vS'  is  either  III  or  P. 

II.  Quality. 

Affirmative. 
Negative. 

HI.  Quantity. 

Universal. 

Particular. 
In    this   scheme,   and    wherever  else    they   may 


PROPOSITIONS 


39 


occur,  the  letters  ^\  M,  P^  etc.,  stand  for  terms,  either 
subject  or  object  as  the  case  may  be:  the  letters  in 
faced  type,  A,  B,  etc.,  stand  for  statements,  which 
are  given  either  true  or  not  true. 

The  names  conditional  and  hypothetical  are  used 
by  the  majority  of  writers  on  logic  indifferently  for 
the  class  which  is  above  called  contingent.  Con- 
fusion has  naturally  resulted.  To  avert  confusion 
the  name  contingent  is  suggested  to  include  the  two 
classes  of  conditional  proposition,  and  as  co-ordi- 
nate with  the  class  disjunctive.  Welton  has  sug- 
gested the  name  inferential^  but  on  etymological 
grounds  the  name  contingent  seems  preferable. 

Categorical  propositions  are  those  which  are  not 
conditional.  Their  empty  form  is  exhibited  as 
under.  The  vowels  A  and  I  in  the  word  affinno 
are  used  to  denote  affirmative  propositions,  and 
the  vowels  E  and  O  in  the  word  nego  to  denote 
the  negatives  ;  A  and  E  are  used  for  the  universals, 
and  I  and  O  for  the  particulars. 


AFFIRMATIVE 

NEGATIVE 

Universal 

Particular 

1 

A.  all  S  is  P. 
I.  some  S  is  P. 

E.  no  5  is  P. 

O,  some  S  is  not  P. 

Categorical  propositions  are  either  analytic  or 
synthetic. 

I.  Analytic  or  verbal  propositions  express  only 
the  connotation,  or  part  of  the  connotation  of  a  term. 


40  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

Definitions  are  the  best  examples  that  can  be  given 
of  analytic  propositions. 

II.  Synthetic  or  real  propositions  are  those 
which  express  only,  or  in  addition  to  part  of  the 
connotation,  the  properties  or  accidents  of  a  term. 
E.g.  tJie  power  to  laugh  is  no  part  of  the  definition 
of  man  ;  it  is  a  property.  The  proposition  man  is 
a  rational  animal  is  analytic :  man  is  an  animal 
with  the pozver  to  langh  is  synthetic. 

Analytic  or  verbal  propositions  have  also  been 
called  explicative,  identical  or  essential ;  synthetic 
or  real  propositions  have  also  been  called  ampliative, 
accidental  or  non-essential. 

There  are  otherclasses  of  propositions  as  follows — 

EXPONIBLE,  those  that  are  resolvable  into  more 
propositions  than  one  :  and  these  arc  Copulativ^e, 
Remotive,  or  Exceptive,  viz, — 

Copulative  when  two  affirmative  propositions 
are  directly  combined  :  the  form  is.  All  S  is  both 
M  and  P,  i.  e.  All  S  is  M  and  all  S  is  P. 

Remotive  when  two  negative  propositions  are 
directly  combined  :  the  form  is,  5  is  neither  AT  nor 
P,  i.  e.  vS  is  not  M  and  S  is  not  P. 

Exceptive  when  the  subject  is  limited  by  some 
qualifying  word,  e.  g.  exeept :  the  form  is,  vS'  is  M 
tinless  it  is  P. 

Exclusive  propositions  limit  the  predicate 
to  the  subject  by  some  qualif}'ing  word  such  as 
only  or  alone :  the  form  is,  Only  S  is  P. 

Indefinite  or  Indeterminate  Propositions 
contain    no    explicit   mark  of   quantity ;  the  only 


PROPOSITIONS  41 

safe  interpretation  of  them  is  to  treat  them  as 
particulars. 

Infinite  or  Limitative  propositions  have  a 
predicate  of  a  thorough-going  negative  character  : 
i.  e.  are  of  the  form,  .S"  is  not  P. 

Tautologous  propositions  affirm  the  subject 
of  itself.     vS  is  S. 

Modal  propositions  are  assertions  cuiii  inodo : 
adverbs  confer  modality. 

This  classification  of  the  various  kinds  of  propo- 
sition is  not  very  important,  except  perhaps  as  a 
guide  to  interpretation  in  cases  of  doubt.  Doubt 
as  a  rule  arises  respecting  quantity,  and  in  this 
connexion  it  is  well  to  notice  certain  quantitative 
words  in  current  speech  which  lack  definiteness  of 
meaning.  Before  the  propositions  containing  them 
can  be  accurately  interpreted,  the  meaning  of  these 
words  must  be  clearly  defined.  Such  are  the  words 
following — 

Some  means  logically,  some  at  least :  not  none  : 
one  at  any  rate,  it  may  be  more  than  one,  or  it 
may  be  all.  In  popular  usage  some  means  some 
at  most :  not  all :  more  than  one  but  less  than  all. 

Most  means  in  popular  usage,  at  least  one  more 
than  half  In  logic  it  must  be  regarded  as  the 
equivalent  of  sonic,  for  formal  logic  pays  no  heed 
to  degree  in  quantity. 

Few  means  popularly,  most  are  not,  or  at  any 
rate  less  than  half  are.  In  logic  its  equivalent  is, 
some  are  not. 

All    is  used    in    two  senses — (i)   all    and    each  : 


42  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

every:  onuies :  distributlvely :  and  (2)  all  together, 
not  each  :  cuncti:  collectively. 

Any  is  equivalent  to  all  used  in  the  distributive 
sense  when  it  quantifies  the  subject  of  a  categorical 
proposition.  When  the  proposition  is  not  categori- 
cal it  is  to  be  read  as  some :  e.  g.  if  any  S  is  M,  then 
S  is  P  ;  means,  if  some  S  is  My  etc. 

Contingent  Propositions  are  statements  with  quali- 
fication. The  contingent  proposition  therefore  con- 
sists of  two  parts  which  are  called  respectively 
antecedent  ox  protasis ^  which  is  the  statement  of  the 
condition  or  hypothesis,  corresponding  to  the  subject 
of  the  categorical :  and  consequent  or  apodosis,  which 
is  the  statement  of  the  result,  corresponding  to  the 
predicate  of  the  categorical. 

The  names  conditional  diwd  hypothetical  of  the  two 
classes  of  contingents  are  used  by  various  writers 
indiscriminately  for  the  whole  class.  Care  must  be 
taken  to  keep  the  two  forms  distinct :  the  differ- 
ence between  them  is  well  marked  though  not 
always  recognised. 

The  general  symbolic  form  for  the  contingent  is, 

//  ^"  is  X,  P  is  V. 

This  form  is  better  reserved  for  conditionals  alone. 
In  this  case  the  formula  for  expressing  hypotheticals 
will  be, 

If  A  is  true,  B  is  true. 

Here,  as  previously  pointed  out,  A  and  B  stand  for 
statements,  not  terms. 


PROPOSITIONS  43 

Conditional  Propositions  assert  that  if  an  object  be 
found  to  have  certain  attributes  it  will  also  have,  or 
not  have,  certain  other  attributes.  The  relation  is 
between  two  combhiations  of  properties.  Condition- 
als have  both  quality  and  quantity,  and  the  four 
forms  may  be  symbolically  expressed  thus — 

If  S  is  M^  then  S  is  P.  A. 

Sometimes  if  S  is  J/,  then  S  is  P.  I. 

If  S  is  M,  then  S  is  not  P.  E. 

Sometimes  if  S  is  M,  then  S  is  not  P.  O. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  quality  is  determined  by 
the  consequent.  In  a  conditional  proposition  there 
often  seem  to  be  four  terms  :  they  can  however 
always  be  reduced,  with  more  or  less  ease,  to  three, 
so  as  to  fit  the  general  symbolic  form,  if  S  is  AI, 
then  S  is  P.     Thus — 

If  the  standard  of  an  examination  \  is  \  loiu,  the 
percentage  of  passes  \  is  \  high.  There  are  seem- 
ingly four  terms.  Instead  of  the  word  passes  read 
failures^  and  lozv  instead  of  Jiigh.  We  thereby 
reduce  the  terms  to  three.  Or  we  may  read  not 
low  instead  of  the  word  high^  and,  by  a  single 
alteration  of  phrasing,  obtain  the  same  result. 
The  statement  will  thus  run — If  the  standard  of 
an  examination  \  is  \  loiu,  the  percentage  of  passes  \ 
is  not  I  low.  Another  example — If  the  barometer 
falls,  we  shall  have  rain,  may  be  re-expressed 
thus — If  any  atmospheric  state  causes  a  barometric 
fall,  that  state  will  bring  rain. 

Conditionals   may   be   reduced   to   categoric   form. 


44  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

Some  logicians  assert  that  both  classes  of  con- 
tingents are  in  reality  identical  with  categoricals. 
With  certain  limitations  this  assertion  is  accurate  : 
the  limitations,  as  will  be  seen,  apply  to  hypo- 
theticals.  Taking  the  illustrations  above,  their 
categorical  expression  will  be — Examinations  in 
wJiich  the  standard  is  loiv  \  are  \  those  in  ivJiich  the 
percentage  of  passes  is  high:  Ail  atmospheric  states 
causing  barometric  fall  \  are  \  those  ivhich  bring 
rain. 

Hypothetical  propositions  assert  relationship  be- 
tween two  statements,  so  that  if  one  is  true  the 
truth  of  the  other  is  determined.  Thus,  though 
the  symbolic  form  may  be  the  same  as  for  con- 
ditionals, the  distinction  can  be  better  marked  by 
using  letters  for  the  statements  in  the  antecedent 
and  consequent  respectively  :  hence  the  preferable 
form  is — 

If  A  is  true,  then  B  is  true. 

Hypotheticals  have  quality,  but  not  quantity. 
The  antecedent  is  not  an  event  which  may  occur 
always  or  sometimes,  but  a  proposition  which  is 
simply  true  or  false.  In  the  hypothetical  there  is 
a  relation  of  two  absolute  and  self-contained 
assertions,  each  of  which  can  be  used  alone  without 
change  of  meaning.  It  is  this  self-sufficiency  of 
both  antecedent  and  consequent  that  differentiates 
the  hypothetical  from  the  conditional.  Thus  in 
the  proposition — If  all  candidates  for  examination 
luere  luell  prepared  sojne  zcould  certainly  be  success- 


PROPOSITIONS  45 

fiil^  the  assertion  is  not  about  all  and  some 
candidates,  but  about  their  adequate  preparation 
and  their  success. 

Hypotheticals  can  be  reduced  only  to  A  and  E 
categorical  forms,  for  the  reason  that  they  consist 
only  of  singular  terms  and  do  not  therefore  admit 
of  distinction  in  quantity.  Some  logicians  would 
dispute  the  possibility  of  reducing  the  hypothetical 
to  the  categorical  form  on  the  ground  that  the 
dependence  of  one  proposition  upon  another  is  not 
analogous  to  that  existing  between  5  and  P  of  the 
categorical,  and  also  on  the  ground  that  all  hypo- 
theticals involve  an  element  of  doubt.  This  view 
however  seems  to  be  erroneous.  Taking  the 
illustration  given  above  in  reduced  form  it  will 
stand — all  cases  of  candidates  being  well  prepared  \ 
are  \  cases  in  ivJiich  some  would  certainly  be  snc- 
cessfid. 

Disjunctive  propositions  give  the  subject  no 
definite  predicate,  but  prescribe  for  it  an  alter- 
native between  two  different  predicates,  or  it  may 
be  more  than  two. 

The  general  symbolic  form  is — 

6^  is  either  M  or  P. 

These  predicates  may  always  be  brought  under 
a  wider  predicate,  which  shall  include  all  the 
others  ;  this  however  is  seldom  done  in  practice. 
Thus — He  is  either  a  doctor^  a  lawyer^  a  clergyman^ 
or  a  teacher^  may  be  expressed — He  is  a  member  of 
a  learned  profession. 


46  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

Disjunctives  have  quantity  but  not  quality,  the 
quahty  is  ahvays  affirmative. 

Universal — /;/  all  cases  S  is  P,  or  X  is  Y. 

Particular — In  some  cases  S  is  P,  or  X  is  V. 

There  is  difference  of  opinion  as  to  whether  the 
disjunctive  form  necessitates  the  mutual  exclusion 
of  the  alternative  predicates.  In  many  cases  the 
alternatives  are  as  a  matter  of  fact  exclusive  ; 
exclusion  however  is  not  due  to  the  disjunctive 
form,  and  in  the  logical  treatment  of  these  pro- 
positions it  must  not  be  assumed. 

The  disjunctive  is  in  fact  a  complex  conditional, 
and  the  logical  rule  for  its  treatment  is — Given  a 
disjunctive  with  two  alternatives,  by  taking  away 
either  of  the  alternatives  you  posit  the  other,  but  it 
cannot  be  said  that  by  positing  one  you  sublate 
the  other. 

Disjunctives  are  reducible  to  conditionals  of  the 
form,  if  S  is  not  M,  it  is  P.  They  can  therefore 
be  reduced  also  to  categoricals.  E.  g.  All  artificial 
tront  flies  are  either  zvinged  or  hackled.  This  yields 
in  reduction  the  two  conditionals  as  follows — (i) 
If  any  artiflcial  tront  fly  is  not  zvinged  it  is  hackled  ; 
and  (2)  If  any  artiflcial  tront  fly  is  not  hackled  it  is 
winged.  These  reduced  to  categorical  form  become, 
(i)  All  artiflcial  tront  flies  not  winged  \  are  \ 
hackled ;  and  (2)  All  artiflcial  tront  flies  not  Jiackled 
I  are  \  winged.  According  to  a  previous  definition 
it  is  thus  seen  that  disjunctives  arc  exponibles. 

One  of  the   most    important    points    in  dealing 


PROPOSITIONS  47 

with  propositions  is  to  grasp  clearly  what  is  meant 
by  the  distribution  of  terms.  A  term  is  said  to  be 
distributed  when  reference  is  made  to  each  and  every 
individual  denoted  by  that  term.  Thus  in  the  A 
proposition,  all  men  \  are  \  mortal^  the  subject  all 
men  means  each  and  every  individual  denoted  by 
the  term  men,  and  according  to  the  definition  given 
it  is  distributed.  The  predicate  mortal  does  not 
mean  each  and  every  being  of  which  mortality  can 
be  asserted.  There  may  be  mortal  beings  that  are 
not  men,  as  indeed  from  material  considerations  we 
know  there  are.  The  predicate  therefore  is  not 
distributed,  reference  not  being  made  to  every  part 
of  it.  Similarly  the  distribution  of  the  terms  in 
each  of  the  other  categorical  forms  may  be  worked 
out.  The  distribution  of  the  terms  will  be  found 
to  be  as  follows — 

A  distributes  subject  not  predicate  ; 

E  distributes  both  subject  and  predicate ; 

I  distributes  neither  subject  nor  predicate  ; 

O  distributes  predicate  not  subject. 

This  distribution  of  terms  may  be  fixed  in  the 
mind  by  remembering  the  mnemonic  word 
AsEbInOp,  which  must  be  read  v4,  j-ubject;  E, 
<5oth  ;  /, /neither  ;  6^, /redicate.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  universals  distribute  their  subject,  and  nega- 
tives their  predicate.  The  importance  of  thoroughly 
understanding  the  point  rests  on  the  fact  that  the 
validity  of  every  argument  depends  upon  the 
proper  distribution  of  the  terms  occurring  in  it. 


48 


CHAPTER   VII 

PREDICABLES   AND   PREDICAMENTS 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  xii. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  iii.  and  iv. 

Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  iii.  and  vii. 

Bain,  Dcductio?i,  pp.  73—77  ;  263 — 266. 


A  predicate  is  something  which  is  affirmed  or 
denied  of  a  subject  ;  A  predicable  is  something 
which  CAN  BE  so  affirmed  or  denied.  That  is, 
predicables  are  possible  predicates. 

The  doctrine  of  the  predicables  is  a  consideration 
of  the  number  of  different  kinds  of  statement  which 
can  be  made  about  a  subject. 

The  heads  of  predicables  are  a  classification  of  the 
various  relations  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a 
proposition  may  sustain  one  to  the  other. 

At  root  the  doctrine  of  the  predicables  is  not 
logical,  but  metaphysical.  The  scheme  is  as 
follows  ; — 


Heads  of 
Predicables 


PREDICABLES   AND    PREDICAMENTS     49 

Genus 

Species 

Differentia 

-n        •       fsjeneric 
Proprium<  ^ 

i  specific 

.      .,        (separable 
Accidens-{     ^ 

(niseparable 

Genus  is  a  class  made  up  of  smaller  classes. 

Species,  with  reference  to  genus,  is  the  smaller 
class  included  ;  with  reference  to  an  individual,  it 
is  the  class  including  it. 

Differentia  are  the  attributes,  or  attribute,  by 
which  one  species  is  distinguished  from  all  others 
contained  in  the  same  genus. 

Proprium  is  any  quality  common  to  the  whole 
of  the  class,  but  not  sufficient  to  distinguish  that 
class  from  others.  It  is  called  generic  when  it 
belongs  to  the  whole  of  the  genus,  and  specific 
when  belonging  to  the  whole  of  the  species. 
Jevons'  nomenclature  differs  :  property  belonging 
to  the  whole  species  he  zd^s  peculiar,  and  he  limits 
specific  property  to  the  infima  (or  lowest)  species. 

Accidens  is  a  quality  which  may  or  may  not 
belong  to  an  individual  in  relation  to  a  species  :  or 
to  a  species  in  relation  to  a  genus.  It  is  called 
separable  when  it  can  be  changed  ;  inseparable 
when,  belonging  to  all  the  members  of  a  class,  it 
cannot  be  changed. 

Thus,  e.g.  taking  triangle  as  species:  genus, 
differentia,  property,  and  accident  will  be  respect- 
ively as  follows  : — Plane  figiwe  ;  having  three  sides  ; 

E 


50  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

having  three  internal  angles  equal  to  tzvo  right  angles  ; 
having  sides  tJiree  inches  long. 

Genus  and  species  are  correlative  terms ;  the 
same  term  may  be  both  a  genus  and  a  species, 
genus  with  regard  to  lower  classes  under  it ;  species 
with  regard  to  a  higher  class  above  it. 

Sunimum  genus  is  a  term  so  general  that  it 
cannot  be  a  species.  The  summum  genus  gives 
connotation  at  its  lowest,  denotation  at  its  highest 
point. 

Infima  species  is  a  term  so  narrow  that  it  cannot 
be  a  genus,  and  can  only  be  divided  into  indi- 
viduals. It  gives  connotation. at  its  highest  point, 
denotation  at  its  lowest. 

The  Aristotelian  logicians  held  that  there  were 
ten  summa  genera  which  they  called  predicaments  or 
categories. 

The  connotation  of  a  species  is  greater  than  that 
of  the  genus  under  which  it  is  included.  This 
excess  of  connotation  is  the  difference  of  that 
species.  Thus  in  connotation  species  =  genus  + 
difference. 

A  proprium  is  an  attribute  which  does  not  form 
part  of  the  connotation  of  a  term,  but  which  does 
of  necessity  follow  from  it.  Thus,  whether  an 
attribute  is  a  difference  or  a  proprium,  depends 
upon  the  definition  of  the  term. 

Accidens  can  only  be  determined  by  what  it  is 
not.  It  is  a  quality  that  does  not  of  necessity 
belong  to  any  class ;  if  however  it  docs,  and  if  it 
belongs  to  every  member  of  the  class,  it  is  called 


PREDICABLES   AND   PREDICAMENTS     51 

inseparable  ;  if  not  common  to  every  member  it  is 
known  as  separable. 

In  this  scheme  of  predicables  no  provision  is 
made  for  singular  terms,  which  by  the  older  logicians 
were  looked  upon  as  outside  the  sphere  of  the 
science. 

When  genus  or  difference  is  predicated,  the  pro- 
position is  called  analytic  ;  when  proprium  or 
accidens  is  predicated,  the  proposition  is  called 
synthetic.  Equivalent  names  for  analytic  and 
synthetic  propositions  have  been  given  on  p.  40. 
Species  is  strictly  speaking  only  predicable  of  an 
individual. 

It  is  thus  seen  that  embedded  in  the  doctrine  of 
the  predicables,  we  have  the  difference  between 
formal  and  material  logic.  In  the  categorical 
proposition,  where  5  and  P  are  subject  and  pre- 
dicate respectively,  S  and  P  may  be  taken  to 
represent  distinguishable  terms  which  are  not  how- 
ever necessarily  distinct.  But  when  we  have  terms 
which  are  distinct  as  well  as  distinguishable,  we 
have  to  deal  with  material  considerations,  and 
though  the  proposition  may  still  be  written  in  the 
form  S  is  P,  we  are  no  longer  working  with 
symbols  but  with  the  actual  notions  themselves. 

In  the  proposition  man  is  a  rational  animal,  the 
terms  are  distinguishable  but  not  distinct.  The 
same  notion  is  marked  by  each  of  the  terms. 
Rational  animal  is  a  synonym  for  man.  Under 
the  concept  man  you  think  rational  and  vice  versa. 
In  other  words,  we  have  nothing  more  than  a  concept 


52  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

under  the  guise  of  a  judgment.  But  in  the  pro- 
position man  is  moi'tal^  the  terms  are  distinct  as  well 
as  distinguishable.  Mortal \^  no  part  of  the  meaning 
of  man.  It  is  a  material  consideration,  neverthe- 
less the  conjunction  of  such  terms  may  still  be 
formulated  as  vS  is  P.  This  distinction  is  marked 
in  the  predicables  as  above  ;  it  is  essential  or 
analytic  as  opposed  to  non-essential  or  synthetic 
predication.  Formal  doctrine  takes  no  notice  of 
this  difference,  but  in  material  logic  it  is  taken  into 
account.  We  have  to  consider  our  predicate  as 
sometimes  obtained  by  analysis  of  the  subject,  and 
sometimes  by  synthesis. 

The  analytic  has  a  predicate  obtained  from  the 
subject  merely  under  the  laws  of  thought ;  in  the 
proposition  given  dhowQ,  rational  ajiimalis  logically 
implicated  in  maji.  Hence  these  propositions  are 
also  called  explicativ^e,  the  explication  taking  place 
under  the  laws  of  thought  {q.  v.).  The  predicate 
of  a  synthetic  proposition  can  never  be  obtained 
merely  from  the  laws  of  thought.  Such  pro- 
positions are  therefore  called  ampliative,  the  am- 
plification taking  place  by  reference  to  the  matter 
concerning  which  the  statement  is  made. 

Analytic  propositions  are  also  sometimes  called 
identical,  that  is,  there  is  an  identity  between 
subject  and  predicate.  Identical  propositions 
therefore  may  be  defined  as  those  in  which  the 
predicate  gives  the  subject  over  again,  but  not  as 
a  distinct  and  separate  thought.  Definitions  are 
instances  in  point.     As  a  test   we  may  substitutt.' 


PREDICABLES    AND    PREDICAMENTS     53 

means  for  the  formal  copula  is  whenever  we  have 
an  analytic  proposition.  In  a  synthetic  proposition 
this  substitution  of  means  for  is  cannot  be  made, 
for  is  in  this  case  has  a  totally  different  force. 

Classification  depends  entirely  upon  this  scheme 
of  predicables,  consisting  as  it  does  of  the  formation 
of  genera  and  species. 

The  predicaments  or  categories  of  which  mention 
has  already  been  made,  were  intended  by  Aristotle 
as  a  classification  of  all  possible  predicates  accord- 
ing to  their  own  meaning  and  not  in  relation 
to  the  subject.  These  Aristotelian  predicaments 
are  now  universally  discredited,  being  usually 
regarded  as  a  classification  of  all  possible  things 
with  no  reference  to  their  use  as  predicates  of  a 
proposition.  They  are  therefore  of  metaphysical 
rather  than  logical  import.  It  is  to  be  noted  that 
no  satisfactory  scheme  exists. 

Aristotle's  scheme  is  as  follows — 


ouaia 

substantia 

substance 

TTOcrhv 

TTOIOP 

Trpos  Tl 

quantitas 

qualitas 

relatio 

quantity 

quality 

relation 

Ttoitiv 

actio 

action 

Trdaxitv 

TTOV 

passio 
ubi 

passivity 
where 

TTOTi 

quando 

Avhen 

KtiaOai 
t\nv 

situs 
habitus 

position 
condition 

Sir  Wm.  Hamilton  has  thus  classified  the  above 
scheme — 


54  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

I.  Substance 


(Quantity    f  Situs 


Actio 
I  Passio 


Mill  states  and  criticises  this  Aristotelian  scheme, 
and  gives  the  following  classification  of  all  nameable 
things  as  his  own  : — 

1.  Feelings  or  states  of  consciousness  : 

2.  The  minds  which  experience  those  feelings  : 

3.  The  bodies  or  external  objects  which  excite  certain  of 
these  feelings  together  with  the  po\v«r  or  property  whereby 
they  excite  them  : 

4.  The  successions  and  co-existencies,  the  likenesses  and 
unlikenesses,  between  feehngs  or  states  of  consciousness. 

There  have  been  other  schemes  suggested  by 
others,  but  the  matter  is  not  one  of  great  logical 
importance,  if  indeed  it  has  any  claim  to  a  place  of 
treatment  in  logic  at  all. 


55 


CHAPTER   VIII 

DEFINITION   AND   DIVISION 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  xii. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.  Bk.  i.,  ch.  v  and  vi. 

Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  viii. 

Bain,  Inductioi-i^  pp.  153 — 170  and  195 — 198. 


Definition   and   division   have   to  do   with  names, 

and  though  expressed  in  proposltional  form  they 
are  not  concerned  with  the  proposition  as  such. 
Hence  their  proper  place  of  treatment  is  under  the 
heading  of  terms. 

Definition  is  the  exposition  of  the  connotation  of  a 
term  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  proposition. 

Distinguish  definition,  dcsa^iption,  and  explanation, 

A  name  is  defined  : 
a  tiling  is  described  : 
?i  process  is  explained. 

The  strictly  logical  form  of  definition  is  per  g'enua 
et  differentiam. 

To  define  a   name   does  not  involve  statincr  all 


56  A   DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 

that  is  known  about  the  thing  of  which  it  is  the 
name,  for  that  would  in  most  cases  include  attri- 
butes which  are  purely  accidents. 

A  definition  is  an  analytic  or  verbal  proposition. 

Rules  of  definition  are  not  directions  for  defining, 
but  criteria  for  testing  definitions  when  made. 
Formal  logic  tests  or  proves,  it  does  not  discover 
or  bestow  knowledge.  When  a  man  has  know- 
ledge and  sets  it  out,  logic  tells  him  whether  he 
has  done  so  correctly. 

Formal  definition  is  not  always  applicable,  e.g. 
simple  sensations  cannot  be  defined.  When  we 
cannot  define  we  can  re-expres-s  and  give  examples 
or  fall  back  on  description,  or  give  an  enumeration 
of  constituent  properties.  E.  g.  miiid  is  that  which 
feels,  thinks,  wills,  and  desires.  This  is  definition 
by  complete  enumeration  :  it  sets  out  the  various 
functions  of  mind  and  is  the  only  means  of  defini- 
tion in  this  particular  case  that  we  have.  Definition 
is  impossible  when  nothing  else  of  the  same  class 
can  be  found  :  where  the  thing  whose  name  is  to  be 
defined  cannot  be  discovered  as  an  object  amongst 
similar  objects  or  as  an  attribute  amongst  attributes. 
This  is  the  case  with  the  example  mind. 

The  rules  of  definition  are  usually  thus  stated  : — 

I.  A  definition  should  not  be  redundant,  i.e. 
contain  either  more  or  less  than  the  connotation  of 
the  term  defined. 

II.  A  definition  should  not  be  expressed  in  ob- 
scure, figurative,  or  ambiguous  language. 

III.  A  definition  should  not  be  tautologous,  i.e. 


DEFINITION    AND    DIVISION  57 

should  not  contain  the  term  defined,  nor  a  synonym, 
nor  its  opposite.  Violation  of  this  rule  is  called 
circiilus  in  dejiniendo. 

IV.  A  definition  should  not  be  negative  when  it 
can  be  affirmative. 

Division  is  the  exposition  of  the  denotation  of  a 
term  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  proposition. 

Logical  division  must  be  distinguished  from 
physical partitioft,  and  metaphysical  analysis. 

The  test  of  a  logical  division  is  that  the  term 
divided  and  the  definition  of  the  term  divided  can  be 
predicated  of  each  dividing  member.  This  is  its 
distinction  from  hoih.  paj^iition  and  analysis. 

Every  division  must  be  progressive.  The  old 
rule  is  Divisio  non  facial  saltuni.  This  precaution 
is  against  proceeding  from  high  generalisation  to 
narrow  particulars  at  a  bound,  or  in  logical 
terminology  emuneration  of  species  mnst  be  from 
proximate  genera.  The  constituent  species  must 
together  make  up  the  genus  divided  :  if  any  of 
them  can  be  brought  under  a  genus  itself  subal- 
tern to  that  which  had  to  be  divided,  we  know 
that  a  saltiis  has  been  made  and  our  division  is 
at  fault. 

The  rules  for  division  may  be  stated  thus  : — 

I.  Division  must  be  distinct,  the  constituents 
must  exclude  one  another,  otherwise  the  species 
overlap  and  produce  confusion  called  cross-division. 

II.  Division  must  be  adequate,  the  constituent 
species  must  exhaust  the  genus,  i.  e.  when  added 
together  they  must  make  up  the  genus. 


58  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

III.  Division  must  be  founded  upon  one  principle 
or  basis,  called  \h(^  fundainentiiin  divisionis. 

These  rules  may  be  summarised  in  the  single 
statement  that  division  must  be  exclusive  and 
exhaustive. 

Cross  division  may  be  avoided  by  adopting 
the  method  known  as  dichotomy  or  exhaustive 
division.  This  is  the  only  process  strictly  to  be 
called  logical  division.  Dichotomic  division  is 
division  by  affirmative  and  negative  names  under 
the  laws  of  contradiction  and  excluded  middle. 
E.g.  Take  any  notion  A.  Divide  by  decrease  of 
denotation  and  addition  to  connotation.  \i  B,  C, 
etc.  be  the  added  connotation  and  b,  c,  etc.  their 
contradictories,  the  scheme  stands  thus : — 


AB  Ab 


ABC  ABc  AbC  Abe 


AbCD  AbCd 

This  process  may  be  carried  out  to  any  number 
of  terms,  but  has  the  demerit  of  being  cumbrous, 
and  in  many  cases  there  is  no  need  to  resort  to 
it.  In  branches  of  knowledge  where  our  informa- 
tion is  uncertain,  then  it  becomes  useful  as  a  safe- 
guard against  possible  oversight  in  making  our 
divisions. 


59 


CHAPTER    IX 

IMPORT    OF    CATEGORICAL    PROPOSITIONS 
QUANTIFICATION    OF   THE   PREDICATE 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessofzs,  ch.  xxii. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  ii. 

Mill,  Bk.  i.,  ch.  v.,  and  Exam,  of  Sh'  Wm.  Hainilfo?!^ 

ch.  xviii.  and  xxii. 
Keynes,  Part  ii.,  ch.  viii. 


In  the  discussion  of  the  meaning  involved  in 
predication  answers  to  the  following  questions  are 
considered  :— 

(i)  What  is  related?  or  what  is  the  meaning  of 
5  and  P  ? 

(2)  What  is  the  nature  of  the  relation  ? 

(3)  Is  existence  implied? 

Here  again  in  the  question  of  import  we  are 
on  extra-logical  ground  :  as  this  subject  has  strictly 
speaking  no  place  in  formal  logic.  According  to 
the  traditional  treatment  of  logic  it  is  here  in- 
cluded, but  though  full  of  interest  it  may  be  left 
for  second  reading. 


6o  A    DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 

1 .  What  is  related  ?      Words,  things,  or  ideas  ? 
The    proposition   is   a  statement   and   therefore 

so  far  verbal :  the  statement  is  of  a  relation  existing 
between  objective  facts,  and  therefore  so  far  real : 
the  relation  is  apprehended  in  thought  and  is 
therefore  so  far  conceived.  The  point  has  already 
been  discussed  in  determining  the  definition  and 
scope  of  logic  as  a  science. 

Two  questions  therefore  only  remain  : — 

2.  What  is  the  nature  of  the  relation  expressed  in 
predication?  In  what  aspect  are  the  terms  to  be 
regarded  ?     Various  answers  have  been  given. 

ia)  The  Predicative  Theory.  S  —  P  (which  is 
the  empty  form  for  a  categorical  proposition), 
read  predicatively,  means  that  the  attributes  pos- 
sessed by  P  also  belong  or  do  not  belong  to  the 
object  or  to  the  group  of  objects  denoted  by  .S. 
That  is,  it  reads  6"  in  denotation,  and  P  in  conno- 
tation. It  is  a  relation  equivalent  to  that  which 
exists  between  subject  and  attribute.  This  is  the 
common  and  natural  reading  :  it  is  psychologically 
correct. 

{b)  The  Extensive  Theory  reads  both  terms  in 
denotation,  viz.  that  objects  denoted  by  6"  are 
or  are  not  among  the  objects  denoted  by  P.  It 
regards  5  as  included  in  the  class  P.  As  a  theory 
of  predication  this  is  psychologically' false.  More- 
over on  this  view  it  is  not  P  that  is  predicated, 
but  inclusion  in  P. 

(c)  The  Attributive  Theory  reads  both  terms  in 
connotation.     This  is  Mill's  position.     (Bk.  I.  ch.  v. 


CATEGORICAL   PROPOSITIONS  6i 

§  4.)  E.  g.  7/iau  IS  mortal  means  whatever  has  the 
attributes  of  man  has  the  attribute  of  mortality. 
This  theory  is  psychologically  false,  and  moreover 
on  this  view  particular  jDropositions  are  wanting 
in   interpretation. 

{d)  The  Equational  Theory  regards  5  and  P  in 
a  proposition  as  corresponding  to  the  two  sides 
of  an  equation,  the  copula  being  nothing  more 
than  the  sign  of  equality  between  them.  The 
act  of  judgment  expressed  in  the  proposition 
is  thus  held  to  be  a  mere  assertion  of  identity. 
This  view  is  developed  by  Jevons  in  his  Prin- 
ciples of  Science  (p.  41).  It  was  also  in  his  later 
work  adopted  by  Sir  W.  Hamilton  as  an  outcome 
of  the  doctrine  of  the  Quantification  of  the  Predicate. 

3.  Does  the  categorical  proposition  imply  the 
existence  of  the  objects  denoted  by  the  terms? 
Logical  existence  may  be  in  any  sphere,  fiction, 
mythology,  imagination,  fact.  Logical  terms  re- 
present something  thought  of,  that  is,  they  imply 
the  existence  in  thought  of  that  of  which  they 
are  the  name.  More  than  this  cannot  be  asserted. 
The  implication  of  existence  to  this  extent  also 
follows  from  the  nature  of  the  proposition,  which 
is  a  statement  of  relation  between  concepts  that 
exist  at  any  rate  in  the  mind.  It  is  usually  and 
properly  considered  however  that  if  existence  in  re 
is  intended  it  must  be  specially  predicated.  The 
real  existence  of  the  subject  can  never  be  implied 
in  the  mere  form  of  the  proposition. 

Quantification  of  the  Predicate.     To  quantify  the 


62  A   DIGEST  OF   LOGIC 

predicate  is  to  place  a  sign  of  quantity  before  it 
as  well  as  before  the  subject.  This  doctrine  was 
in  this  century  stated  by  Hamilton  and  George 
Bentham.  There  are  earlier  cases  of  its  notice 
both  by  English  and  continental  writers.  They 
urge  that — 

(i)  There  is  no  thinking  in  the  definite  form  which 
is  necessary  without  having  a  definite  notion  as 
to  the  quantity  of  the  predicate,  i.  e.  they  assert 
that  what  is  implicit  in  thought  must  be  made 
explicit  in  language  ;  and  further  that 

(2)  In  the  process  of  conversion  this  explication 
is  practically  assumed.  With  the  quantified  pre- 
dicate therefore  conversion  as  a  doctrine  falls  away. 
The  proposition  in  effect  becomes  an  equation. 

Hamilton  proposed  four  new  categorical  forms 
in  addition  to  those  in  common  use.  The  symbols 
to  mark  them  usually  given  are  those  suggested 
by  Abp.  Thomson  and  are  shown  on  the  left  hand 
margin.     Hamilton's  notation  is  that  on  the  right. 

U  AH  .S  is  all  P  afa 

A  All  5  is  some  P  afi 

E  No  5  is  any  P  ana 

1]  No  5  is  some  P  ani 

T  Some  5  is  all  P  ifa 

1  Some  S  is  some  /'  ifi 

O  Some  5  is  not  any  P  ina 

o)  Some  vS  is  not  some  P  ini 

The  letters /and  n  in  Hamilton's  notation  indicate 
affirmation  and  denial  respectively. 


QUANTIFICATION    OF   THE   PREDICATE     62, 

The  objections  to  the  doctrine  may  be  summarised 
as  follows : — 

(i)  Getting  rid  of  conversion  really  means  that 
we  have  done  so  by  getting  rid  of  the  proposition. 
The  old  A,  E,  I,  O  no  longer  remain.  The 
quantified  forms  can  each  be  shown  to  be  complex 
not  simple  statements.  All  S  is  all  Pis  exponible 
and  is  equivalent  to  All  S  is  P  -\-  All  P  is  S.  It 
is  a  compendious  statement  of  two  propositions. 
It  is  clear  that  All  S  is  all  P  is  not  so  simple  a 
thought  as  All  S  is  P.  We  think  All  S  is  P  with- 
out reference  to  some  or  all  P,  and  so  we  see  that 
All  S  is  all  P  ceases  to  be  the  expression  of  a 
simple  thought.  To  aver  that  All  S  is  all  P  is  a 
simple  thought  is  to  deny  that  All  S  is  /*  is  a 
thought  at  all.  Hamilton  declares  (as  he  must  do 
to  maintain  his  position)  that  implicitly  we  do 
think  all  or  some  P.  He  calls  U  a  toto-total  pro- 
position, and  A  a  toto-partial  proposition. 

(2)  Another  objection,  advanced  by  De  Morgan, 
is  that  the  doctrine  alters  the  logical  sense  of  sojne, 
or  uses  it  ambiguously.  Some  becomes  some  but 
not  ally  or  sojne  at  most :  at  least  it  becomes  so  in 
the  predicate.  If  the  meaning  be  thus  changed 
we  may  get  rid  of  the  "  disgusting  rules  of  con- 
version," but  we  also  get  rid  of  the  square  of  op- 
position, for  if  some  mean  sojne  at  most^  contrariety 
and  contradiction  are  swept  away. 

(3)  Further  in  All  S  is  all  P  we  get  a  use  of 
all  which  is  not  intelligible  unless  we  take  it 
collectively.     The    doctrine    has    grown    out   of  a 


64  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

misconception  as  to  the  quantity  of  propositions, 
which  has  been  taken  to  be  the  quantity  of  the 
subject,  but  it  is  only  a  matter  of  convenience 
that  the  mark  of  quantity  is  attached  to  the 
subject.  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  univers- 
ally or  particularly  affirmed  or  denied  of  the 
subject. 


65 


CHAPTER   X 

DIAGRAMMATIC   REPRESENTATION 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  ix  and  xxii. 
Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  iii. 
Keynes,  Part  ii.,  ch.  vi. 


The  value  of  any  scheme  for  the  diagrammatic 
representation  of  propositions  depends  upon  the 
following  requirements  : — 

(i)  The  diagrams  must  be  self-explanatory  so 
soon  as  the  principle  on  which  they  are  constructed 
is  understood. 

(2)  Each  diagram  must  be  capable  of  one  and 
only  one  interpretation. 

(3)  Each  proposition  should  be  represented  by 
one  and  only  one  diagram. 

Various  methods  have  been  suggested  by  differ- 
ent writers.  Such  methods  are  Euler's  Circles, 
Lambert's  Lines,  Hamilton's  Wedges,  Venn's 
Diagrams,  and,  the  most  recent,  Welton's  Scheme. 

Euler's  Circles.  This  is  the  method  most  com- 
monly given  in  the    Manuals.     Representing  the 

F 


66 


A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


Individuals  included  in  any  class  by  a  circle,  there 
are  between  two  classes  five  diagrams  to  indicate 
all  the  possible  relations.  These  relations  may  be 
described  as 

I.  Coincidence : 
11.  Inclusion  of  wS  by  P: 

III.  Intersection  : 

IV.  Inclusion  of /^  by  S: 
V.  Exclusion. 

The  circles  then  are  combined  thus  : — 


0 


IV. 


II. 


III. 

(3B 


V. 


The  method  adopted  in  most  text-books  (c.^-, 
Jevons'  Lessons),  of  using  only  a  single  diagram  for 
each  propositional  form,  is  misleading.  The  E  pro- 
position, being  the  figure  of  exclusion,  is  the  only 
form  for  which  one  and  only  one  diagram  will  suf- 
fice. Although  we  have  not  a  single  diagram  for 
each  fundamental  form  of  proposition,  the  circles 


DIAGRAMMATIC    REPRESENTATION      67 

are  useful  as  indicating  the  real  knowledge  given 
by  the  propositions  themselves.  The  circles  treated 
as  below,  by  shading,  show  in  each  of  the  forms  that 
part  of  the  predicate  concerning  which  knowledge 
is  given  us. 


Venn's  Diagrams.  In  this  scheme  the  figure 
given  does  not  represent  a  proposition.  It  is  the 
framework  into  which  the  pro- 
positions are  fitted.  We  are  deal- 
ing with  two  terms,  each  of  which 
has  a  contradictory.  By  combin- 
ing these  terms  and  their  contra- 
dictories we  obtain    four  separate  classes:  viz. 


68  A    DIGEST   OF   LOCUC 

S  that  is  P  : 

5  that  is  not-P: 

not-S  that  is  P  : 

and  not-S  that  is  not-P. 

Shortly  they  may  be  written  S  P,  S  P,  S  Py  S  P. 
The  Hne  over  a  letter  is  a  common  and  convenient 
way  of  marking  its  contradictory.  These  four 
compartments  are  shown  in  the  skeleton  diagram. 
Every  universal  proposition  denies  the  existence 
of  one  or  more  of  these  classes,  and  is  indicated 
by  a  shading  out  of  the  compartment  denied. 
Thus  A  and  E  are  thus  figured  : — 


The  weakness  of  this  scheme  is  that  it  is  not 
adapted  to  particular  propositions.  Dr.  Venn 
proposes  that  a  bar  should  be  drawn  across  the 
compartment  which  the  particular  declares  to  be 
saved.  The  scheme  has  the  advantage,  however, 
of  being  good  for  propositions  involving  more 
terms  than  two,  and  it  can  also  be  used  to  repre- 
sent the  categorical  syllogism. 

Sir  W.  Hamilton  uses  heavy  wedge-shaped  lines 
which  at  best  arc  cumbrous  and  arc  also  somewhat 
confusing. 

Welton  suggests  a  method   which  is  a  combin- 


DIAGRAMMATIC   REPRESENTATION      69 

ation  of  Lambert's  lines  and  Venn's  four  com- 
partments. It  has  an  advantage  over  Venn's 
circles   in  being  applicable   to  particulars. 

Lambert's  Scheme  is  with  lines  to  jnark  the  ex- 
tent of  the  terms,  and  it  represents  the  inclusion 
of  one  term  in  another  by  drawing  the  lines  parallel 
to  one  another.  With  modification  it  can  be  made 
useful  and  graphic.  Thus  draw  three  columns, 
the  first  to  contain  S  P,  the  second  for  5  P,  and 
the  third  for  6'  P.  Use  lines  to  indicate  the  extent 
of  5  and  P :  make  them  unbroken  for  the  amount 
definitely  referred  to,  dotted  for  what  is  left  un- 
certain in  the  statement.  Let  5  be  the  upper 
line,  and  P  the  lower.  Then  we  shall  get  the 
subjoined  diagram  : — 


s 

SP 

p 

It  will  be  noted  that  lines  wholly  unbroken  mark 
terms  which  are  distributed. 

Yet  another  method  may  be  employed,  a  com- 
bination of  circles  and  lines,  the  lines  unbroken 
and  dotted  to  be  interpreted  as  in  the  previous 
diagram.      Here   the  predicate  is  figured    by  the 


70 


A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


circle,  and  the  subject  by  the  line,  thus  indicating 
the  reading  of  them  respectively  in  intension  and 
extension. 


Distribution  of  P  is  marked  by  circles  which  do 
not  contain  an  unbroken  line  :  of  .S  by  lines  wholly 
unbroken.  This  scheme  pictures  one  view  of  the 
import  of  the  proposition. 


71 


CHAPTER   XI 

IMMEDIATE   INFERENCES 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  ix.  and  x. 
Keynes,  Part  ii.,  ch.  ii.,  iii.,  iv.,  v.,  and  vii 
Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  iii. 
Mill,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  i. 


Inference  is  the  derivation  of  one  truth  from 
another,  and  involves  a  mental  process.  Inference 
in  short  is  passage  from  thought  to  thought. 

Inference  is  immediate  when  the  conclusion  is 
derived  from  one  premiss  only :  immediate  infer- 
ences may  be  regarded  as  the  application  of  the 
laws  of  thought  to  two  given  terms.  There  are 
two  main  classes  of  such  inferences,  viz. — 
I.  The  opposition  of  propositions,  and 

II.  Eductions. 
The  reduction   of  contingents  and  disjunctives  to 
categorical  form  might  be  added  as  a  third  class,  for 
this  reduction  is  really  a  form  of  immediate  Inference. 

I.  Opposition.  Two  propositions  are  said  to  be 
in  opposition,  or  to  be  opposed,  when  they  have 
the  same  subject  and  predicate  but  differ  in  quantity 


72 


A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


or  quality  or  both.     They  are  usually  arranged  in 
what  is  called  the  Square  of  Opposition  as  below : — 


Contraries. 


Co. 


sP" 


in 
c 
cr 

ft- 


I        Subcontraries. 


<L> 

-4-J 

CO 


o 


The  inferences  based  on  the  square  of  opposition 
may  be  considered  to  depend  exclusively  on  the 
three  fundamental  laws  of  thought  {(/.v.).  These 
inferences  are  summed  up  as  follows : — 

Of  Contradictories  one  must  be  true,  one  must 
be  false. 

Of  Contraries  both  cannot  be  true,  both  may  be 
false. 

Of  Subcontraries  one  may  be  false,  both  may  be 
true. 

Of  Subalterns  the  particular  is  true  if  the  universal 
is  true  :  the  universal  is  doubtful  when  the  particular 
is  true. 

Aristotle  arranged  the  square  thus — 


IMMEDIATE   INFERENCES  73 

Seeing  that  A  and  E  were  more  opposed  than  A 
and  O,  he  put  them  further  apart  in  the  figure. 
This  square,  however,  broke  down  with  I  and  O. 

Diametric  opposition  is  another  name  for  con- 
tradiction ;  it  means  assertion  and  its  negation, 
counter-assertion,  no  medium  admitted.  It  has 
the  same  meaning  as  when  apphed  to  terms. 

If  we  cannot  go  beyond  the  simple  denial  of  a 
proposition,  then  it  has  no  contrary  distinct  from 
its  contradictory. 

The  opposition  of  singular  propositions  is  called 
by  Mansel  Secondary  contradiction  (Mansel's 
Aldrich,  p.  56).  Singulars  have  no  contraries 
distinct  from  their  contradictories.  E.g.  Socrates 
is  zuise,  has  the  contradictory  Socrates  is  not  wise. 
There  is  no  distinct  contrary.  By  another  method 
of  treatment,  however,  the  proposition  may  be  read 
as  a  general  proposition  in  the  guise  of  a  singular. 
In  this  case  Socrates  will  stand  for  the  acts  or 
judgnients  of  Socrates,  and  this  gives  us  the  contra- 
dictory Some  of  the  acts  of  Socrates  are  not  zvise, 
and  the  contrary  None  of  the  acts  of  Socrates  are 
tvise. 

Conditionals  admit  of  distinction  both  in  quantity 
and  quality,  and  therefore  the  doctrine  of  opposi- 
tion is  entirely  applicable. 

Hypotheticals  admit  only  distinction  of  quality, 
and  therefore  the  only  opposition  is  that  of  con- 
tradiction. 

Disjunctives  do  not  admit  difference  of  quality 
but   only  quantity,  and   moreover  all    disjunctives 


74  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

are  affirmative.  Contradiction,  however,  is  possible 
as  well  as  contrariety,  but  both  contradictory  and 
contrary  are  categorical.  E.  g.  Every  S  is  M  or  P 
gives  the  contradictory  Some  S  is  jieitJier  M  nor  P, 
and  the  contrary  No  S  is  either  M  or  P. 

II.  Eductions.  Immediate  inferences  by  which 
from  a  given  proposition  (posited  true)  we  deduce 
others  that  differ  from  it  in  5  or  P  or  both,  and 
whose  truth  is  assured  by  the  truth  of  the  original, 
are  called  eductions.  They  are  classified  as 
follows  : — 

1.  Conversion.- 

2.  Obversion. 

3.  Contraposition. 

4.  Inversion. 

5.  Added  Determinants. 

6.  Complex  Conception. 

7.  Converse  Relation. 

8.  Reversion. 

It  is  well  to  note  here  that  m  working  out 
exercises  involving  the  statement  of  propositions 
they  should  always  be  brought  first  into  the  strict 
logical  form  with  the  uniform  copula  is  or  is  not. 
It  is  most  convenient  to  symbolise  the  terms  by 
letters  S,  J\  etc.,  the  contradictories  of  which  may 
be  marked  by  a  line  over  them.  Thus  S,  P  will 
stand  for  not-S,  not-P  respectively.  The  symbols 
can  be  re-translated  into  the  original  terms,  if 
desirable,  in  setting  down  the  results.  To  remember 
this  not  only  shortens  the  labour  of  working,  but 


IMMEDIATE   INFERENCES  75 

it  is  also  a  distinct  aid  to  accuracy.  It  is  astonishing 
what  difficulty  students  often  find  in  converting  a 
simple  proposition  like  the  following  P  struck  Q. 
If  the  rule  be  remembered,  the  difficulty  disappears. 
In  strict  logical  form  it  may  be  written  P  \  is  \  a 
person  ivJio  struck  Q.  The  converse  will  therefore 
be  Some  person  zvho  struck  Q  \  is  \  P. 

Conversion  in  a  broad  sense  means  change  in 
the  position  of  the  terms  of  a  proposition.  Logic 
is  concerned  with  conversion  only  as  a  process  of 
inference:  "no  conversion  is  employed  for  any 
logical  purpose  unless  it  be  illative"  (Whately, 
Log.  p.  74).  The  distinct  mental  act  in  conver- 
sion and  other  immediate  inferences  lies  in  the 
different  readings  given  to  6^  and  P.  In  any 
judgment  the  natural  reading  of  the  subject  is 
extensive  and  of  the  predicate  intensive.  In  con- 
verting a  proposition  the  attributive  force  of  the 
predicate  is  dropped,  the  proposition  is  taken  in 
extension.  The  difficulty  sometimes  found  in  con- 
version lies  probably  in  this  passage  from  the 
predicative  to  the  "  class "  reading. 

I.  Ordinary  Conversion  is  transposition  of  5 
and  P. 

Conversion  is  simple  when  converse  and  con- 
vertend  have  the  same  form  as  in  the  case  of  E 
and  I. 

Conversion  is  per  accidens  or  by  limitation  when 
part  of  the  information  given  in  the  convertend 
is  lost,  as  in  the  case  of  A.  O  propositions  do  net 
admit  of  ordinary  conversion. 


76  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

Simple  conversion  and  conversion  per  accidens 
have  also  been  called  conversio  pura  and  conversio 
iinpura  (cf.  Lotze,  Log.^  §  79). 

That  particular  negatives  do  not  admit  of 
ordinary  conversion  follows  from  the  rule  that  no 
term  must  be  distributed  in  the  converse  which 
was  not  distributed  in  the  convertend. 

No  difficulty  can  be  found  in  converting  or  per- 
forming other  immediate  inferences  upon  any 
given  proposition  when  once  brought  into  strict 
logical  form,  and  its  predicate  as  well  as  its  subject 
read  in  extension. 

2.  Obversion  is  change  of  quality.  It  is  a  process 
of  immediate  inference,  in  which  from  one  pro- 
position we  infer  another,  having  for  its  predicate 
the  contradictory  of  the  predicate  of  the  original 
proposition.  The  name  obversion  was  introduced 
by  Bain.     Other  names  for  this  process  are — 

(i)  Permutation,  Foivler. 

(2)  ^quipollence,  Ueberiveg. 

(3)  Infinitation,  Boiuen. 

(4)  Immediate  Inference  by  Private  Conception, 

Jevons. 

(5)  Contra  version,  De  Morgan. 

(6)  Contraposition,  Spalding. 

Bain,  after  dealing  with  formal  obversion,  follows 
with  a  statement  of  material  ob\'crsion.  This  is 
extra-logical.  From  5  a  P,  I  may  by  formal  ob- 
version infer  vS"  e  P,  but  the  material  obverse,  .S"  is 
P,  docs  not  follow,  except  as  the  result  of  actual 


IMMEDIATE    INFERENCES  77 

observation  and  independent  investigation.  The 
only  information  I  can  infer  about  5  from  5  a  P 
is,  S  i  P  or  S  0  P. 

The  meaning  of  obversion  is  explained  by  Bain 
in  his  Deductio7tJ^^.  109,  no).  "  In  affirming  one 
thing  we  must  be  prepared  to  deny  the  opposite." 
Thus,  the  road  is  level,  it  is  not  inclined,  are  not  two 
facts,  but  the  same  fact  viewed  from  opposite  sides  ; 
this  process  is  called  obversion.  All  four  pro- 
positional  forms  admit  of  an  obverse. 

3.  Contraposition  is  obversion  followed  by  con- 
version. It  is  a  process  of  immediate  inference,  in 
which  from  a  given  proposition  we  infer  another 
proposition,  having  the  contradictory  of  the  original 
predicate  for  its  subject,  and  the  original  subject 
for  its  predicate.  Another  name  for  this  process 
is  conversion  by  negation. 

Logicians  differ  as  to  whether  the  contrapositive 
of  All  S  is  P  is  No  not-P  is  S,  or  All  not-P  is 
not-S,  i.  e.  as  to  whether  the  quality  should  be 
preserved.  The  solution  of  the  dispute  is  in  the 
definition  above,  which  rules  that  the  original 
subject  is  to  stand  as  the  new  predicate.  Hence 
the  contrapositive  is  No  P  is  S. 

4.  Inversion  yields  the  original  subject  nega- 
tived. It  is  inference  of  a  proposition  having  the 
contradictory  of  the  original  subject  for  its  subject, 
and  the  original  predicate  for  its  predicate.  This 
is  the  meaning  given  by  Keynes,  and  it  fits  in  best 
with  the  general  scheme  of  eductions.  Jevons  uses 
the  word  in  a  different  sense. 


78  A   DIGEST    OF    LOCxIC 

Taking  as  the  original  proposition  All  S  is  P, 
Jevons  classifies  the  related  propositions  thus — 

INFERABLE 

Converse  Some  5  is  P. 

Obverse  No  5  is  P.  - 


Contrapositive 


No  P_  is  S,  or 
All  P  is  5^. 


NON-INFERABLE 

Inverse  All  P  is  5. 

Reciprocal  All  5  is  P. 

In  this  scheme  the  inverse  as  defined  above  finds 
no  place,  and  indeed  it  is  not  recognised  by  Jevons 
at  all. 

The  inverse  may  be  obtained  from  the  original 
by  converting  and  obverting,  or  by  obverting  and 
converting  alternately. 

Each  of  the  inferences  above  named  takes  two 
forms,  one  with  a  positive  predicate,  and  the  other 
with  a  negative  predicate.  The  simplest  forms  are 
those  with  the  positive  predicate,  and  to  these 
have  been  given  the  simple  names  converse,  contra- 
positive,  and  inverse.  The  corresponding  negative 
forms  are  called  the  obvcrted  converse,  obvcrted  con- 
trapositive, and  obvcrted  inverse  of  the  original 
proposition. 

The  rule  in  all  conversion  is  that  no  term  shall 
be  distributed  in  the  converse  that  was  not  distributed 
in  the  convertend. 


IMMEDIATE    INFERENCES 


79 


Given  two  terms   and   admitting   their   contra- 
dictories, the  possible  combinations  are  as  follows — 


SP 


SP 
S  P 


PS 
PS 


PS 
PS 


In  the  universals  all  these  forms  are  obtainable. 
The  table  below  shows  the  immediate  inferences 
from  each  of  the  propositions  A,  E,  I,  O. 


A 

E 

I 

o 

'     Original  Proposition    

SaP 

SeP 

SiP 

SoP 

%     Obverse      

Sep 

SaP 

SoP 

SiP 

^     Converse     ...       

^     Obverted  Converge'     

Pis 
PoS 

Pes 
PaS 

PiS 
PoS 

— 

J^'    Contrapositive     

Pes 

PiS 

— 

Pi  s. 

^7    Obverted  Contrapositive 

PaS 

PoS 

— 

PoS 

^     Inverse        

SoP 

SiP 

— 

Obverted  Inverse          

SiP 

SoP 

— 

The  treatment  of  contingents  and  disjunctives 
remains  to  be  noticed.  In  a  conditional  pro- 
position the  antecedent  and  consequent  correspond 
respectively  to  the  subject  and  predicate  of  the 
categorical.     They  may  be  written — 

A.  If  any  5  is  Af  then  always  that  5  is  P. 

E.  If  any  S  is  M  then  never  that  5  is  F. 

I.  If  any  5  is  M  then  sometimes  that  5  is  P. 

O.  If  any  5  is  Jll  then  sometimes  not  that  .S  is  P. 

Or  more  briefly — 


8o  A    DIGEST    OF    LOGIC 

A.  All  5  M  is  5  P, 

E.  No  i)^  M  is  5  P. 

I.  Some  5  M  is  5  P. 

O.  Some  5  M  is  not  5  P, 

Hypotheticals  are  to  be  treated  similarly,  except 
that  here  we  have  no  distinction  of  quantity.  The 
propositions  are  either  A  or  E,  viz.  All  cases  A 
are^  or  are  not^  cases  B. 

Disjunctives  admit  quantity  and  bar  quality : 
they  are  always  affirmative.  Obversion  and  con- 
traposition are  possible,  but  the  disjunctive  form 
disappears  and  becomes  contingent.  E.  g.  5  is 
either  M  or  P,  this  is  equivalent  'lo  If  S  is  not  M 
it  is  P.     We  have  then  as — 

Contrapositive     If  vS  is  not  P  it  is  not  J/. 

Obverted  contrapositive     If  5  is  not  P  it  is  M. 
Obverse        If  5  is  J/ it  is  not  P. 

5.  By  added  determinants  is  meant  addition  of 
qualification  to  both  5  and  P,  in  order  that  the 
meaning  of  the  term  may  be  more  exactly  de- 
termined. In  making  this  inference  both  5  and  P 
must  be  limited  in  the  same  way.  The  limitation 
is  called  determination,  and  the  limiting  word  the 
deternii)iant. 

Inference  by  added  determinants  is  not  a  typical 
case  of  immediate  inference.  The  process  is  valid 
enough  if  both  5  and  P  are  determined  alike ;  thus 
although  from  A  cottage  is  a  building  we  cannot 
infer  that  A  huge  cottage  is  a  huge  building,  yoX  it 


IMMEDIATE   INFERENCES  8i 

is  true  that  A  cottage,  Jmge  as  it  is  as  a  cottage  is  a 
building  huge  as  it  is  as  a  cottage.  A  similar  re- 
mark applies  to  complex  conception,  the  process 
is  valid  if  5  and  P  are  alike  implicated.  The 
reason  for  care  in  adding  determinants  is  that 
meaning  is  apt  to  vary  with  context,  and  therefore 
render  this  sort  of  inference  liable  to  fallacy.  E.  g. 
All  negroes  are  ineriy  therefore  An  honest  negro  is 
an  honest  man.  This  is  true,  for  in  each  case  the 
determinant  agrees.  It  is,  however,  not  true  that 
because  A  bass  singer  is  a  man,  that  therefore  A 
bad  bass  singer  is  a  bad  tnan. 

6.  Complex  Conception  consists  in  the  addition 
of  a  name  to  both  5  and  P.  The  difference 
in  this  eduction  and  added  determinants  is  that  in 
this  case  6^  and  P  become  the  determinants  of  a 
new  name  added.  6*  and  P  qualify  instead  of 
being  qualified.  E.  g.  Honesty  is  the  best  policy, 
therefore  Acts  of  honesty  are  acts  of  the  best  policy. 
There  is  the  same  liability  to  fallacy  as  before.  It 
does  not  follow,  e.g.,  that  because  All  horses  are 
animals,  therefore  A  majority  of  horses  is  a  majority 
of  animals. 

y.  Converse  Relation  is  an  inference  made  when 
in  a  proposition  stating  a  relation  of  two  things, 
the  relation  being  expressed  by  a  relative  word, 
the  same  relation  is  expressed  by  transferring 
the  names  of  the  related  objects  and  replacing  the 
relative  word  by  its  correlative.  Using  symbols 
this  eduction  may  be  written  (Q  and  Q}-  being  a  pair 
of  correlatives)  5  is  Q  of  P,  therefore  P  is  0}  of  S. 


82  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

E.g.  The  Prince  of  Wales  is  tJie  son  of  Queen 
Victoria,  therefore  Queen  Victoria  is  the  mother  of  the 
Prince  of  Wales.  Or  DnrJiani  is  north  of  London, 
therefore  London  is  sotttJi  of  DurJiani.  This  educ- 
tion is  based  on  purely  material  considerations. 

8.  Reversion  consists  in  passage  from  the  ex- 
tensive to  the  intensive  reading  of  a  proposition,  in 
other  words  both  the  terms  being  read  in  denotation 
the  inference  lies  in  changing  the  proposition  so  as 
to  exhibit  the  mutual  relation  of  the  terms  in  con- 
notation. Reversion  is  most  readily  performed 
upon  the  universal  affirmative,  for  in  this  form  of 
proposition  subject  and  predicate  most  clearly  stand 
to  one  another  in  the  relation  of  species  and  genus. 
For  this  reason  the  other  three  forms  have  scarcely 
received  due  consideration.  The  inference  can  best 
be  illustrated  and  explained  by  examples. 

Thus  All  metals  \  ai^e  \  elements  when  read  in  ex- 
tension means  TJie  species  metal  is  included  in  the 
genus  element.  The  problem  is  to  frame  a  proposi- 
tion which  shall  express  the  relation  of  the  terms 
in  respect  of  their  connotation. 

Now  the  law  of  connexion  between  denotation 
and  connotation  is  one  of  opposite  mutation,  hence 
it  follows  that  the  species  having  the  smaller  deno- 
tation possesses  the  larger  connotation,  or  in  other 
words  the  connotation  of  the  species  includes  that 
of  the  genus.  The  required  proposition  therefore  is, 
All  tJie  attributes  wJiicJi  are  characteristic  of  elevient 
I  are  \  attributes  which  give  meaning  to  the  name 
metal:  or  all  qualities  of  genus  clement  \  are  \  quali- 


IMMEDIATE   INFERENCES  83 

ties  of  species  metal.  To  express  this  eduction 
symbolically  it  will  be  convenient  to  use  a  new 
sign.  The  mathematical  sign  for  the  root  of  a 
quantity  seems  to  be  suitable :  it  denotes  that  the 
term  to  which  it  is  attached  is  to  be  read  inten- 
sively. Thus  if  the  term  A  mean  objects,  real  or 
imaginary,  called  A,  J  A  will  mean  attributes 
giving  meaning  to  the  name  A,  and  the  reverse  of 
S  a  P  will  appear  as  sj P  ct  sjS. 

The  universal  negative  and  the  particular  pro- 
positions are  less  readily  dealt  with.  It  must  be 
remembered  that  in  naming  a  class,  whilst  it  is 
possible  to  refer  to  all  or  only  some  of  the  things 
included,  the  connotation  of  the  class  name  is  a 
fixed  quantity,  and  the  whole  of  it  is  always  in- 
volved, that  is,  the  connotation  of  a  name  is  the 
same  whether  all  of  the  objects  denoted  by  it  are 
referred  to  or  only  some  of  them.  Put  shortly  we 
may  say  that  reference  in  denotation  may  be  either 
entire  or  partial,  in  connotation  it  is  always  entire. 
Hence  it  seems  that  there  can  be  no  particular 
reversions. 

This  is  not  the  view  taken  by  Jevons  (^Studies,  p. 
128),  who  regards  the  connotation  as  including  all 
the  qualities  belonging  to  the  individuals  of  a  class, 
and  seeing  that  all  the  qualities  are  not  always 
involved  in  predication  a  particular  of  the  regular 
form  may  be  obtained.  Setting  aside  this  view  and 
reading  connotation  in  the  way  previously  defined 
(p.  32)  the  reversions  for  E,  I,  and  O  will  be  as 
follows : — 


84  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

E.  No  metals  are  compounds^  therefore  The  char- 
acteristic of  compomids  is  not  a  quality  of  metals. 
Symbolically  sjPe  JS. 

I.  Some  elements  are  metals,  therefore  Sometimes 
the  characteristic  of  metals  is  a  quality  of  elements. 
Symbolically  sjP  i  \fS. 

O.  Some  elements  are  not  metals,  therefore  Some- 
times the  characteristic  of  metals  is  not  a  quality  of 
elements.     Symbolically  JP  o  JS. 

The  matter  of  predication  being  concomitance  of 
quality  with  quality  the  sign  of  quantity  in  the 
particulars  will  be  sometimes.  It  may  be  urged  that 
in  reversion  we  drift  away  from  the  sphere  of  formal 
logic,  nevertheless  it  is  in  ordinary  speech  a  very 
common  form  of  inference  and  deserves  fuller 
attention  than  it  has  yet  received  in  the  Manuals, 
where  usually  it  escapes  attention  altogether. 


B5 


CHAPTER   XII 

THE   LAWS   OF   THOUGHT 


REFERENCES 

Jevons,  Lesso7is^  ch.  xii. 
Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Introd.,  ch.  iv. 
Bain,  Deduction^  pp.  14 — 21. 
Ray,  Introd.,  ch.  ii. 


About  these  laws  there  has  been  endless  discus- 
sion and  the  various  points  that  have  been  raised 
are  difficult  to  summarise.  Full  treatment  is  outside 
the  plan  of  these  notes,  reference  therefore  must  be 
made  to  the  Manuals  in  which  they  are  adequately- 
stated  and  expounded. 

The  laws  of  thought  are  usually  given  as  three, 
viz.  The  law  of 

I.  Identity  all  A  is  A  : 

II.  Contradiction  no  A  is  not-^  : 

III.  Excluded  middle     all  A  is  either  A  or  not-^. 

Leibnitz  supplemented  these  three  with  a  fourth 
which  he  called  the  Law  of  Sufficient  Reason. 

The  laws  of  thought  have  also  been  called  Regu- 


86  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

lative  Principles  of  Thought :  Axioms  of  Consist- 
ency :  and  Criteria  of  Truth  or  Validity. 

They  are  a  priori  mental  laws  in  agreement  with 
which  all  valid  thought  must  be  conducted,  hence 
they  are  laws  in  the  scientific  sense  of  being  uni- 
formities ;  they  are  also  laws  in  the  secondary  sense 
of  being  regulative  when  applied  to  govern  and 
test  arguments. 

I.  The  principle  of  identity  is  most  simply  stated 
as  A  is  A.  Other  statements  are,  Whatever  is,  is : 
or  Everything  is  what  it  is.  It  demands  during 
any  argument  that  each  term  shall  be  used  in 
one  unvarying  sense,  that  what  is  posited  true  in 
one  context  shall  be  held  true  in  another.  Such 
propositions  as  A  is  A  command  instant  assent,  but 
convey  no  information  :  the  law  must  therefore  be 
interpreted  to  cover  such  propositions  as  A  is  B. 
Such  forms  are  statements,  not  of  the  same  fact  in 
the  same  language  as  A  is  A  is,  but  of  the  same  fact 
in  different  language,  and  it  is  in  this  that  the  iden- 
tity consists.  The  two  names,  though  both  appli- 
cable to  the  same  thing  or  fact,  differ  in  signification, 
and  we  have  therefore  an  identity  amid  diversity  of 
meaning,  and  the  proposition  in  which  they  are 
conjoined  is  capable  of  giving  information. 

II.  The  principle  of  contradiction  states  that 
tJie  same  thing  cannot  be  both  A  and  not- A  :  other- 
wise expressed,  A  is  fiot  not- A  :  or  Nothing  can 
both  be  and  not  be.  By  this  law  it  is  laid  down  that 
the  same  attribute  cannot  be  affirmed  and  denied 
of  the  same  subject  at  the  same  time.     This,  and  the 


THE   LAWS   OF   THOUGHT  87 

preceding  principle,  are  the  basis  of  all  immediate 
inference:  e.g.  in  opposition,  for  judgments  to  be 
contradictory  they  must  refer  to  the  same  subject 
at  the  same  time,  and,  if  they  do,  they  cannot  by 
this  law  both  be  true. 

Thought  in  the  last  resort  must  agree  with  reality, 
and  put  to  the  test  of  material  consideration  we 
cannot  conceive  a  thing  as  at  once  possessing  an 
attribute  and  not  possessing  it.  In  argument  this 
principle  demands  that  having  made  a  statement 
we  must  abide  by  it,  for  our  consistency  will  be  at 
fault  unless  we  are  prepared  to  deny  the  contra- 
dictory of  the  statement  originally  made. 

III.  The  principle  of  excluded  middle  is  enunci- 
ated A  is  either  B  or  not-B.  Otherwise  stated,  Either 
a  given  judgment  must  be  true  or  its  co7itradictory ^ 
there  is  no  middle  course.  Bain  calls  this  law  "  an 
incident  of  partial  or  incomplete  contrariety  .  .  . 
too  much  honoured  by  the  dignity  of  a  primary  law 
of  thought."  The  principle  has  been  questioned 
by  other  writers  who  have  confused  contradiction 
and  contrariety.  Contraries  mark  the  utmost 
possible  divergence.  Contradictories  are  simple 
negations,  they  admit  no  intermediate  course,  they 
exclude  all  questions  of  degree.  Care  is  necessary 
to  avoid  this  confusion.  Lotze  objects  to  the  for- 
mula A  is  either  B  or  not-B  on  the  ground  that  not- 
B  embraces  everything  in  the  universe  except  B  and 
is  therefore  meaningless  :  he  would  say  Every  A 
either  is  or  is  not  B.  Practically  however  negative 
terms  are  usually  limited  in  application, 


SS  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

The  axiom  of  excluded  middle  does  not  decide 
which  of  the  two  contradictory  terms  is  true,  but 
declares  only  the  necessity  of  affirming  one  or  other 
of  them.  By  the  principle  of  contradiction  we  are 
prohibited  from  thinking  that  two  contradictory 
attributes  can  both  be  simultaneously  present :  by 
the  principle  of  excluded  middle  we  are  prohibited 
from  thinking  that  they  can  both  be  simultaneously 
absent. 

IV.  The  principle  of  sufficient  reason,  first  distinctly 
formulated  by  Leibnitz,  means  that  no  fact  is  real, 
no  proposition  true,  without  a  sufficient  reason  why 
it  is  so  and  not  otherwise.  The  principle  is  not  a 
fundamental  law  of  thought. 

Valid  arguments  need  not  be  based  on  the  prin- 
ciples of  identity,  contradiction,  and  excluded  middle 
entirely  although  they  must  be  in  conformity  with 
them.  Those  that  are  founded  on  mathematical 
axioms  are  equally  cogent,  such  as  the  argument 
a  fortiori,  If  A  is  greater  than  B,  and  ^  is  greater 
than  6",  therefore  A  is  greater  than  C:  or  If  A  is 
equal  to  B,  and  B  is  equal  to  C,  therefore  A  is  equal 
to  C.  Arguments  however  of  this  character  are 
not  in  the  form  of  reasoning  recognised  in  formal 
logic. 


89 


CHAPTER   XIII 

THE   SYLLOGISM 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  xv. 

Keynes,  Part  iii.,  ch.  i.  and  ii.     Most  useful. 

Mill,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  iv. 

Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  iv.,  ch.  i.  and  ii. 

Bain,  Dediictioji^  pp.  133,  seq. 


Mediate  inference  is  of  two  kinds,  viz. — 

I.  Deduction,  or  method  of  argument  from  general 
to  particular,  and 

II.  Induction,  or  method  of  argument  from 
particular  to  general. 

Syllogism  is  a  common  name  for  mediate  infer- 
ence, in  Latin  called  coinpiitatio,  which  means  a 
reckoning  or  summing  up.  It  is  the  summing  up 
of  two  terms  in  a  conclusion  through  the  medium  of 
a  third  term.  It  is  an  act  of  thought  by  which  we 
proceed  from  two  judgments  to  a  third,  the  truth 
of  which  follows  from  those  already  given.  It  is  an 
inference  in  which  one  proposition  is  derived  from 
two  others  conjointly.  These  various  definitions 
fairly  describe  the  nature  of  the  syllogism. 


90  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

In  form  the  syllogism  consists  of  three  pro- 
positions, of  which  the  first  two  are  called  pre- 
misses, and  the  last  the  conclusion. 

Syllogism  is  of  two  kinds — 

(i)  Deductive  and 

(2)  Inductive. 

The  deductive  s3^11ogism  has  received  the  fuller 
treatment.  Aristotle  spent  most  of  his  labour  upon 
it.  The  genus  syllogism  has  indeed  been  taken  for 
the  species  deductive  syllogism. 

Dealing  now  with  the  deductive  syllogism,  S,  M, 
P  are  the  usual  symbols  for  minor,  middle,  and 
major  terms  respectively. 

The  Major  Term  is  the  predicate  of  the  con- 
clusion : 

The  Minor  Term  is  the  subject  of  the  con- 
clusion :  and 

The  Middle  Term  is  the  medium  of  comparison 
of  two  propositions. 

The  Major  Premiss  is  the  proposition  containing 
the  major  term  : 

The  Minor  Premiss  is  the  proposition  containing 
the  minor  term. 

We  are  concerned  in  syllogism  not  with  the  truth 
or  falsity  of  any  one  of  the  individual  propositions 
which  compose  it,  but  simply  with  the  dependence 
of  one  of  them  upon  the  other  two,  so  that  if  we 
grant  the  latter  we  necessarily  accept  the  former. 
The  derived  proposition  called  the  conclusion,  there- 
fore propounds  no  truth  which  was  not  contained 
in  the  data,  and  the  propositions  must  contain  a 


THE    SYLLOGISM  91 

common    element   as   the    ground    of  comparison 
from  which  the  conclusion  is  derived. 

The  three  propositions  which  compose  a  syllogism 
are  called  its  proximate  matter,  and  the  terms  united 
its  remote  matter.  The  conclusion  put  first  as  a 
thesis  was  called  by  the  old  logicians  the  question^ 
and  the  propositions  establishing  it,  the  reason.  The 
common  element  is  the  middle  term,  the  other  two 
terms  are  called  the  extremes. 

We  have  already  seen  that  the  terms  of  a  pro- 
position may  be  viewed  in  respect  of  quality, 
quantity,  relation,  and  modality,  giving  rise  to  the 
classification  set  out  on  p.  38.  The  two  premisses 
of  a  syllogism  may  be  viewed  In  a  similar  way, 
giving  rise  to  a  corresponding  classification  of  the 
syllogism.  The  moods  of  a  syllogism  spring  from 
difference  in  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  two 
premisses.  In  view  of  relation  when  the  premisses 
are  both  of  the  same  kind,  both  categoricals  or  both 
contingent,  syllogism  is  said  to  be  pure.  If  the 
premisses  are  of  different  relations  the  syllogism  is 
said  to  be  mixed.    The  following  Is  a  tabular  view — 

{a)  Categorical. 


Syllogism 


(i)  Pure      -    iU)  Conditional. 
I  {c)    Hypothetical. 


(2)  Mixed 


(  {a)  Hypothetico  -  catc- 
}  gorlcal. 

1   {]?)  Disjunctive. 

\  {c)  Dilemma. 

Syllogistic   reasoning   rests  upon    the    laws   of 


92  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

thought :  identity  is  at  the  root  of  every  affirm- 
ative, contradiction  is  at  the  root  of  every  negative 
categorical.  Pure  contingent  syllogisms  rest  on  these 
principles  together  with  that  of  sufficient  reason. 

Logicians  have  usually  developed  the  laws  of 
thought  into  Axioms  of  Syllogism.  These  axioms 
are  therefore  not  ultimate,  but  secondary  or 
derived:  and  so  called  axiomata  media  or  middle 
axioms. 

Aristotelian  logicians  regarded  the  first  figure  as 
the  type  of  categorical  syllogism.  The  empty  ^r/?^;//^? 
of  this  is — 

M    P 

S      M 


therefore    5 


Other  forms  of  syllogism  were  tested  by  reduction 
to  this  form.  These  logicians  therefore  gave  one 
axiom,  viz.  the  Dictum  de  omni  et  nidlo,  as  they 
called  it,  which  applied  to  this  one  form,  and  was 
stated  as  their  fundamental  principle  of  syllogistic 
reasoning. 

The  Dictum  may  be  thus  stated — "  Whatever 
may  be  said  affirmatively  or  negatively  of  a  class 
may  also  be  said  affirmatively  or  negatively  of  any- 
thing within  that  class."  Or  more  shortly  the  state- 
ment may  stand,  "  Whatever  may  be  distributively 
predicated  of  a  whole  may  in  like  manner  be  pre- 
dicated of  each  of  a  whole."  The  Latin  form 
usually  given  by  the  older  logicians  is — "  Quicquid 


THE   SYLLOGISM  93 

de  omni  valet,  valet  enhn  de  quibiisdam  et  de  singulis. 
Qiiicquid  de  nulla  valet,  nee  de  quibusdani  valet,  nee 
de  singulis''  It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  word  class 
in  the  statement  first  given  means  the  class  name 
read  distributively,  the  dictum  is  de  omni,  not  DE 
CUNCTO. 

The  dictum  presupposes  the  class  or  extensive 
theory  of  judgments  or  propositions  which  is  ap- 
plicable to  all  propositions  having  general  terms, 
but  those  who  regard  the  connotation  of  each  term 
as  being  the  important  element  formed  an  axiom 
corresponding  to  the  dictum  to  express  this  conno- 
tative  view,  viz.  ^^  Nota  notae  est  not  a  rei  ipsius.  Re- 
pugnans  notae,  rep2ignat  rei  ipsi!'  Mill  adopts  this 
statement  in  his  Logic.  It  means  wS  Jias  the  mark 
M  which  is  tJie  mark  of  P,  therefore  5  Jias  P :  ox  S 
is  ^a  mark  of  M  zvhich  is  a  mark  of  P,  therefore  6^ 
is  a  mark  of  P.  Mill  renders,  "  Whatever  Jias  any 
mark,  has  that  zvhich  it  is  the  mark  of.  Or  when 
the  minor  premiss  as  well  as  the  major  is  universal 
we  may  state  it  thus :  Whatever  is  a  mark  of 
any  mark,  is  a  mark  of  that  which  this  last  is  a 
mark  of." 

There  are  certain  rules  of  mediate  inference  known 
as  Canons  of  Syllogism,  and  according  to  tradition 
they  are  Six  in  number,  as  follows  : — 

Relating  to  the  nature  of  the  syllogism. 

I.  There  must  be  three  and  only  three  terms. 

II.  There  must  be  three  and  only  three  pro- 
positions. 

Relating  to  quantity. 


94  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

III.vThe  middle  term  must  be  distributed  once 
at  least. 

IV.  No  term  not  distributed  in  a  premiss  must 
be  distributed  in  the  conclusion. 

Relating  to  quality. 

V.  One  premiss  must  be  affirmative,  for  from 
two  negatives  nothing  can  be  inferred. 

VI.  If  one  premiss  be  negative  the  conclusion 
must  be  negative,  and  vice  versa,  to  prove  a  negative 
conclusion  one  premiss  must  be  negative. 

It  is  usual  to  give  in  addition  to  the  canons  the 
fpllowing  corollaries  derived  from  them. 
/   I.  From  two  particulars  nothing  can  be  inferred. 
./  2,  If  one  premiss  be  particular  the  conclusion 
must  be  particular. 

3.  From  a  particular  major  and  a  negative  minor 
nothing  can  be  inferred. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  Canons  I.  and  II.  are  not 
rules  of  inference  but  rules  for  deciding  whether  or 
not  we  have  a  syllogism.  I.  forbids  ambiguity,  for 
if  any  term  is  used  ambiguously  it  becomes  in  effect 
two  terms,  and  so  there  are  four  terms  instead  of 
three  present.  Hence  there  is  no  need  to  add,  as 
is  sometimes  done  in  Rule  III.,  "  the  middle  term 
must  not  be  used  ambiguously." 

The  fallacy  arising  from  ambiguity  of  one  of  the 
terms  is  called  quateniio  tcniiinoniin  or  fallacy  of 
four  terms.  There  must  be  a  common  element  as 
a  connecting  link  between  major  and  minor  terms, 
and  this  must  be  identical  in  the  two  premisses. 

Breach  of  Rule  III.  is  called  fallacy  of  the  un- 


THE   SYLLOGISM  95 

distributed  middle.  It  is  absolutely  necessary  for 
the  middle  term  to  be  once  distributed,  for  other- 
wise there  is  no  bond  of  connexion  between  major 
and  minor  terms.  The  real  mediation  lies  in  that 
part  of  M  which  is  common,  and  there  can  be  no 
assurance  that  any  part  of  M  is  common  unless 
once  at  least  the  whole  of  J/ is  referred  to,  and  this 
is  what  distribution  means. 

Breach  of  Rule  IV.  is  called  fallacy  of  illicit 
process,  of  the  major  or  minor  as  the  case  may  be  : 
more  shortly  it  is  called  illicit  major  or  illicit 
minor  according  to  the  case   in   question. 

The  Rule  V.  that  two  negatives  yield  no  conclu- 
sion follows  from  the  fact  that  in  neither  premiss 
is  M  in  connexion  with  5  and  P.  The  accuracy 
of  the  rule  has  been  questioned  by  Jevons  {Princi- 
ples of  Science,  ch.  iv.,  §  lo),  and  on  the  same  grounds 
by  Bradley  {Principles  of  Logic,  p.  254).  It  is 
also  noticed  in  the  Port  Royal  Logic  (p.  211). 
Jevons  answers  his  own   objection  in  his  Lessons 

(P-  134). 

As  a  matter  of  fact  the  rule  only  applies  so  long 
as  we  keep  strictly  to  syllogistic  reasoning.  Using 
the  methods  of  immediate  inference  two  negatives 
may  yield  a  valid  conclusion.  By  means  of  obver- 
sion  and  conversion  the  conclusion  may  be  drawn. 
Keynes  instances  a  syllogism  in  Barbara  which  may 
be  written  in  the  negative  form.  The  following  case 
seems  more  convincing.  Given  the  premisses  Mo  P, 
SeM ;  a  conclusion  is  possible,  viz.  Si  P.  It  is 
obtained  thus — 


96  A   DIGEST   OF   LOCxIC 

Some  M  is  not  P  yields  obverse     Some  ]\I  is  not-/*. 

No       5     is      J/ yields  the    ob-)  .  .,    __.        ^   „ 
^    ,  ^All  M  IS  not-5. 

verted  conversej 

therefore     Some  not-5  is  not-/*. 

As  a  concrete  example  take  the  following — 
(i)  Some  insects  \  are  not  \  ivinged. 
(2)  No  vertebrates  \  are  \  insects. 

These  premisses  (i)  obverted  and  (2)  converted 
and  then  obverted,  become 

(i)  Some  insects  \  are  \  wingless, 
(2)  All  insects  \  are  \  invertebrate. 

Some  invei'teb rates  \  are  \  wingless. 

By  a  process  similar  to  the  above  E  E  as  well  as 
O  E  can  be  shown  to  yield  a  valid  syllogism  :  E  O 
is  intractable. 

E  E  is  worked  thus — 

Given  two  premisses,  (i)  M e  P  and  (2)  5  e  M. 
Take  (2)  and  by  inversion  it  becomes  5  i  M.  With 
this  new  minor  construct  the  syllogism,  and  we  have 

M_  e  P 
S  i  M 


S  0  P 


As  a  concrete  example  take  the  premisses,  (i) 
No  criminals  are  deserving  of  pity,  and  (2)  No 
innoccjit  persons  are  criminals.  When  wc  have 
inverted  the  premiss  (2)  our  syllogism  will  stand 
thus — 


THE    SYLLOGISM  97 

(i)  No  criminals  are  deserving  of  pity. 
(2)  Some  guilty  persons  are  criminals. 

. ' .     Some  guilty  persons  are  not  deserving  of  pity. 

Using  the  methods  of  immediate  inference  upon 
the  premisses  of  the  invalid  syllogistic  moods  there  is 
no  reason  why  the  majority  of  them  cannot  be  made 
to  conform  with  moods  that  are  valid.  This,  as 
shown  above,  can  certainly  be  done  with  E  E  and  OE. 
The  rule  that  two  negatives  yield  no  conclusion  holds 
good  only  so  long  as  we  deal  with  the  premisses  as 
negative  in  the  syllogism,  i.  e.  do  not  go  outside  the 
syllogism  to  alter  the  form  of  the  premisses.  The 
premisses  treated  as  here  suggested  cease  to  be 
negative,  but  if  indirect  reduction  is  allowable  in 
any  case,  as  it  is,  it  is  certainly  allowable  here  also. 

The  canons  of  the  syllogism  may  be  compressed 
' — "simplified"  according  to  the  Manuals — but  it 
can  hardly  be  called  simplification,  since  they  cease 
to  be  simple  in  the  sense  of  being  easily  understood. 
The  simplification  is  as  follows — Canons  L  and  IL 
are  omitted  as  being  not  rules  but  description  of 
syllogism,  and  thus  we  are  left  with  four.  These 
four  are  not  independent,  for  breach  of  IV.,  V.,  or 
the  first  part  of  VI.  involves  indirectly  a  breach  of 
III.  The  independent  rules  of  the  syllogism  are 
thus  reduced  to  two — 

1.  The  middle  term  must  be  distributed  once  at 
least  in  the  premisses. 

2.  To  prove  a  negative  conclusion  one  of  the 
premisses  must  be  negative. 


98  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

It  may  be  noted  that  the  only  syllogism  rejected 
by  (2)  and  not  also  rejected  directly  or  indirectly 
by  (i)  is  A  A  O  in  Figure  IV.  So  far  as  the  first 
three  figures  are  concerned,  therefore,  we  are  left 
with  the  single  rule  of  the  undistributed  middle. 
This  compression  is  not  of  any  practical  im- 
portance. 

The  Connexion  between  the  Dictum  and  the  Syllo- 
gistic Canons  is  to  be  carefully  noticed.  The  dictum 
applies  to  syllogisms  in  the  first  figure  and  was 
not  intended  to  apply  beyond  that  figure,  but  as 
all  syllogisms  may  be  reduced  to  the  first  figure 
the  dictum  applies  indirectly  to  those  also  in 
Figures  II.,  III.,  and  IV. 

(i)  The  dictum  provides  for  three  and  only  three 
terms — 

I.  Whatever  is  predicated    =     major  term, 
II.  of  a  whole  =      middle  term, 

III.  of  each  of  a  whole  =      minor  term. 

(2)  The  dictum  provides  for  only  three  pro- 
positions— 

I.  Predication  of  something  of  a  whole, 
II.  statement  that  each  is  contained   in  the 

whole, 
III.  making  the  original  statement  of  the  con- 
tained each. 

(3)  The  dictum  provides  not  only  that  the  middle 
term  shall  be  distributed,  but  more  definitely  that 
it  shall  be  distributed  in  the  major  premiss. 
Whatever  is  predicated  of  a  whole  means  a  distri- 


THE    SYLLOGISM  99 

buted  whole.  The  middle  term  in  Figure  L  is  the 
subject  of  the  major  premiss,  and  as  this  is  A  or  E 
it  is  as  a  matter  of  fact  always  distributed. 

(4)  The  dictum  provides  for  one  affirmative  pre- 
miss, since  the  declaration  that  the  each  is  contained 
in  the  whole  can  only  be  affirmation,  not  denial, 
i.  e.  the  minor  premiss  must  be  affirmative. 

(5)  The  dictum  provides  for  a  negative  conclusion 
from  a  negative  premiss,  and  vice  versa  by  the  words 
"  in  like  manner." 

(6)  Illicit  process  is  provided  against  indirectly. 
We  are  limited  by  what  has  preceded  to  the  follow- 
ing cases,  A  A,  A  I,  E  A,  E  I,  and  these  separately 
examined  are  seen  to  fall  under  the  rule. 


[OO 


CHAPTER   XIV 

FIGURE   AND   MOOD.      REDUCTION   ' 


REFERENCES 

Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  xvi.,  xvii. 
Keynes,  Part,  iii.,  ch.  iii.,  iv. 
Mill,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  ii. 
Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  iv.,  ch.  iii.,  iv. 


Figure  of  syllogism  is  syllogism  with  a  definite 
position  of  M.  Moods  of  figure  of  syllogism  are 
the  possible  combinations  of  the  premisses  in  that 
position  oi  M. 

There  are  four  figures  corresponding  to  the 
different  ways  in  which  S,  M,  and  P  may  be 
arranged.  These  letters  as  before  are  used  to 
denote  the  minor,  middle,  and  major  terms  respect- 
ively. The  point  of  note  in  the  subjoined  table  is 
the  position  of  M. 


FI  GU  R  E. 

r. 

II 

ni 

rv. 

MAJOR   PREM155. 
jniNOR    PREM15S. 

^ 

p 

5 

P 

s 

^ 

C  ONCLUSION. 

S        P 

S       P 

S      P 

S       P 

FIGURE   AND    MOOD:    REDUCTION     loi 

Account  may  be  taken  of  the  premisses  without 
regard  to  the  position  of  M,  and  this  is  called 
unfigured  syllogism. 

Aristotle  took  account  only  of  Figures  I.,  II.,  and 
III.  He  regarded  the  first  figure  as  the  normal  form 
and  called  it  in  consequence  the  perfect  figure.  The 
fourth  figure  was  first  explicitly  recognised  by  Galen, 
and  hence  it  has  been  called  the  Galenian  figure. 
By  some  logicians  the  fourth  figure  is  rejected. 

The  first  figure  gives  conclusions  in  all  four  pro- 
positional  forms  A,  E,  I,  and  0.  The  second  figure 
only  proves  negatives  :  the  third  only  particulars. 
Hence  the  first  figure  is  fairly  called  perfect.  It 
proves  moreover  in  the  most  clear  and  transparent 
manner. 

Special  rules  have  been  formulated  for  the  figures 
as  follows — 

I.  (i)  The  minor  premiss  must  be  affirmative. 
(2)  The  major  premiss  must  be  universal. 
II.  (i)  One  premiss  must  be  negative. 

(2)  The  major  premiss  must  be  universal. 

III.  (i)  The  minor  premiss  must  be  affirmative. 
(2)  The  conclusion  must  be  particular. 

IV.  (i)  If  the  major  is  affirmative  the  minor  is 

universal. 

(2)  If  either  premiss  is  negative  the  major  is 

universal. 

(3)  If  the  minor  is  affirmative  the  conclusion 

is  particular. 
There  are  certain  characteristics  peculiar  to  each 
figure  that  may  be  noted,  viz. — 


1 


I02  A   DIGEST   OF  LOGIC 

Fig.  I.  proves  A,  E,  I,  and  O  :  it  is  the  perfect 
figure.  It  is  the  only  figure  proving  A.  This  alone 
makes  it  the  most  useful  and  important  of  all  the 
syllogistic  figures.  All  deductive  science  tends  to 
work  in  A  A  A  of  this  figure. 

Only  in  this  figure  have  we  the  subject  and  pre- 
dicate of  the  conclusion  occupying  the  same  position 
as  ^  and  P  in  the  premisses.  This  accounts  in  part 
for  argument  in  Figure  I.  seeming  more  natural 
than  in  other  figures. 

The  dictum  de  oinni  et  iudlo  as  already  pointed 
out  applies  directly  to  this  figure  only. 

Fig.  II.  proves  E,  O, — negatives  only. 

As  the  middle  term  is  predicate  in  both  the  pre- 
misses, unless  one  premiss  were  negative  the  middle 
term  would  be  undistributed. 

This  figure  is  chiefly  used  for  purposes  of  dis- 
proof. It  has  also  been  called  the  exclusive  figure 
because  by  means  of  it  we  may  go  on  excluding 
various  suppositions  as  to  the  nature  of  something 
under  investigation  whose  real  character  we  wish 
to  ascertain.  This  process  is  called  absciss io  infiniti. 
(See  Whately,  Log.,  p.  60.) 

Fig.  III.  proves  I,  O — particulars  only.  If  the  con- 
clusion were  universal  it  would  involve  illicit  minor. 

This  is  the  most  natural  figure  when  the  pre- 
misses are  singular  propositions.  It  is  also  useful 
in  taking  exception  to  a  universal  proposition  laid 
down  by  an  opponent  as  establishing  an  instance 
in  which  such  universal  does  not  hold  good. 

Fig.  IV.  proves  only  E,  I,  0.     It  is  seldom  used 


FIGURE   AND    MOOD:    REDUCTION     103 

and  by  some  rejected.  It  is  not  recognised  by 
Aristotle.  De  Morgan  calls  it  nothing  but  "  the 
first  with  a  converted  conclusion."  The  natural 
order  of  thought  in  it  is  completely  reversed. 

When  a  conclusion  is  weaker  than  the  premisses 
warrant,  i.  e.  when  I  or  O  is  inferred  where  A  or  E 
are  possible,  the  syllogism  is  said  to  be  weakened 
and  the  mood  is  called  subaltern. 

If  a  conclusion  remains  unaltered  although  we 
substitute  for  one  of  the  premisses  the  subaltern 
of  that  premiss,  the  syllogism  is  said  to  be 
strengthened. 

Mood  is  the  form  of  a  syllogism  as  determined 
by  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  premisses,  i.  e. 
the  arrangements  of  A,  E,  I,  0  in  sets  of  three, 
each  triplet  of  propositions  is  called  a  mood,  or 
form  of  the  syllogism.  The  combinations  of  3  out 
of  4  things  are  as  follows  : — 

(i)  All  three  alike  =    4 

(2)  Two  alike,  one  different  =  4x3x3    =36 

(3)  All  three  different  =  4x3x2x1       =24 

Total  64 

Of  these  sixty-four  possible  arrangements  only 
nineteen  are  valid. 

In  Figure     I.  there  are  4 


II. 

>; 

4 

[II. 

» 

6 

IV. 

,, 

5 

Total  19 


104 


A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


TABLE    OF    FIGURES   AND    VALID    MOODS. 


B 

D 

c 

F 

L 

AAA     V 

All 

EA£ 

EIO 

II. 

AOO 

EAE  AEE 

EIO 

III. 

OAO 

All  AAI  lAI 

EIO  EAO 

IV. 

AAI 

lAI 

AEE 

EIO  EAO 

The  valid  syllogistic  forms  may  be  determined  either 
directly  or  indirectly;  directly  by  appeal  to  the 
fundamental  laws  of  thought,  indirectly  by  examina- 
tion of  all  possible  combinations  and  the  exclusion 
of  those  which  break  any  of  the  canons  of  syllogism. 
The  indirect  method  is  the  one  usually  resorted  to. 

Reduction  is  the  name  given  to  the  process  of 
expressing  in  Fig.  I.  the  syllogisms  which  appear 
in  other  figures,  or,  more  generally  stated,  it  is 
change  of  mood  or  figure. 

Unless  specified,  reduction  is  always  taken  to  mean 
change  of  imperfect  figure  to  the  perfect.  Questions 
on  reduction  depend  upon  immediate  inference  and 
the  transposition  or  metathesis  of  the  premisses. 

Reduction  is  of  two  kinds. 

I.  Direct  or  Ostensive,  which  means  proof  of  the 
same  conclusion  by  an  argument  in  Fig.  I. 

II.  Indirect  or  Reductio  ad  absurdum  (also  called 
Reductio  ad  or  per  vnpossibile,  or  Deductio  ad  iin- 
possibile  or  ad  absurduni)  consists  in  proof  of  the 
contradictory  of  the  original  conclusion  to  be  false 
by  syllogism  in  Fig.  I.     Unless  specially  asked  for, 


FIGURE    AND    JSIOOD:    REDUCTION     105 

it  is  always  understood   that   reduction   is    to   be 
made  ostensively. 

Note,  eduction  applies  to  propositions  ;  reduction 
to  syllogism. 

The  doctrine  of  reduction  is  only  intelligible  on 
the  ground  that  figures  differ  in  cogency  and 
efficiency  in  a  marked  way.  It  is  conceivable  that 
a  man  may  grant  a  conclusion  in  the  first  figure 
and  not  in  the  second  or  third.  Reduction  is 
proving  in  the  first  figure,  which  is  unexceptionable, 
that  which  may  be  excepted  against  in  the  other 
figures.  Both  kinds  of  reduction  apply  equally  to 
every  mood,  but  it  was  formerly  usual  to  limit 
reductio  per  impossibile  to  the  cases  of  Baroco  and 
Bocardo.  These  moods  the  older  logicians  failed 
to  reduce  ostensively  because  O  is  not  amenable  to 
conversion.  We  now  treat  O  by  obversion,  and  by 
this  means  both  these  moods  can  be  ostensively  dealt 
with.     The  value  of  reduction  has  been  disputed. 

The  moods  are  usually  designated  by  the  names 
which  occur  in  the  following  hexameters.  It  is 
most  important  to  know  these  mnemonic  lines 
thoroughly  for  the  accurate  working  of  problems  in 
reduction.  Note  that  the  names  Baroco  and 
Bocardo  are  sometimes  spelt  with  a  "  k."  This  is 
a  mistake  :  "  c  "  is  the  original  form. 

Barbara,  Celarent,  Darii,  Ferioque  prioris  : 
Cesare,  Camestres,  Festino,  Baroco,  secundae  : 
tertia,  Darapti,  Disamis,  Datisi,  Felapton, 
Bocardo,  Ferison,  habet :  quarta  insuper  addit 
Bramantip,  Camenes,  Dimaris,  Fesapo,  Fresison. 


io6  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

Each  valid  mood  in  every  figure — except  sub- 
altern moods — is  here  represented  by  a  separate 
word,  which  in  the  imperfect  moods  contains 
directions  for  reduction. 

Vowels  give  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the 
propositions  : 

Initials  connect  the  moods  of  each  figure. 

The  consonants  are  thus  to  be  interpreted — 
V     s,  the  proposition  denoted  by  the  preceding  vowel 
is  to  be  converted  simply  : 

.  /,  the  proposition  denoted  by  the  preceding  vowel 
is  to  be  converted  per  accidens  : 

7;/,  muta,  i.e.  metathesis  or  tTansposition  of  the 
premisses : 

c,  indirect  reduction,  /.  e.  substitute  for  the  pro- 
position whose  vowel  precedes  its  contradictory. 

The  meaningless  letters  are  /;  (not  initial),  d  (not 
initial),  /,  71,  r,  and  t.  Note  that  s  and  /  at  the 
end  of  a  word  show  that  the  conclusion  of  the  new 
syllogism  must  be  treated  as  the  letters  indicate. 

The  syllogistic  mnemonic  appears  in  various 
forms.  The  lines  given  are  from  Aldrich  and  are 
those  in  general  use. 

Modifications  have  been  suggested  in  order  to 
make  all  the  letters  significant.  C.  Read  in  Mind, 
No.  xxvii.,  p.  440,  seeks  to  obviate  the  disadvan- 
tages of — 

(i)  The  mood  not  being  indicated  by  a  letter  : 

(2)  meaningless  letters  :  and 

(3)  no  indication  of  ostensive  reduction  of  Baroco 
and  Bocardo  by  obversion  and  contraposition. 


FIGURE   AND    MOOD:    REDUCTION     107 

He  takes  /,  n,  r,  and  t  as  signs  of  I.,  II.,  Ill  ,  and 
IV.  figures  respectively,  and  makes  the  lines  run 
thus : — 

Ballala,  Cellalel,  Dalii,  Felioque  prioris  : 
Cesane,  Camesnes,  Fesinon,  Banoco  secundae  : 

Tertia  Darapri,  Drisamis,  Darisi,  Ferapro 
Bocaro,  Ferisor  habet  :  quarta  insuper  addit 

Bamatip,  Gametes,  Dimatis,  Fesapto,  Fesistot. 

On  the  same  principle  Miss  Christine  Ladd  in 
her  Studies  in  Log.,  p.  40,  suggests  that  difference 
of  figure  might  be  marked  by  r,  /,  /,  and  ;/  re- 
spectively. 

Dealing  now  with  Baroco  and  Bocardo  we  note 
that— 

c  indicates  reductio  per  inipossibile.  The  position 
of  the  letter  shows  that  the  first  step  is  the 
omission  of  the  premiss  preceding  it,  i.  e.  the  other 
premiss  and  the  contradictory  of  the  conclusion  are 
to  be  combined  in  a  new  syllogism,  which  gives  a 
false  conclusion  and  therefore  indirectly  establishes 
the  truth  of  the  original. 

The  indirect  reduction  of  Baroco  is  effected 
thus — 

Baroco 


P  a  M 

= 

All      P  1 

is 

\M 

S  0  ni 

= 

Some  5  1 

is  not 

\M 

.' .  S  0  P  =  Some  5  |   is  not    |  P 

If  S  0  P  \s  false,  its  contradictory  S  a  P  is  true. 
Substitute  S  a  P  for  the  minor  premiss  and  we 
have  the  syllogism  in  Barbara  thus — ■ 


io8  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


p 

a 

M 

s 

a 

P 

.  5 

a 

M 

but  in  the  minor  of  the  original  syllogism  5  o  M 
is  posited  as  true,  therefore  our  new  conclusion 
S  a  M  \?>  false  ;  but  being  the  conclusion  from  two 
premisses,  one  of  which,  viz.  P  a  M,  is  posited  true, 
the  other  premiss,  viz.  S  a  P,  must  be  false,  that  is, 
its  contradictory,  viz.  S  o  P/\s  true,  and  this  is  the 
conclusion  of  the  original  syllogism  which  was  to 
be  proven. 

The   indirect   reduction    of    Bocardo   is   effected 
similarly — 

Bocardo  M  o  P 

M  a  S 


S  0  P 


If  this  conclusion  be  false,  then  its  contradictory, 
viz.  S  a  P,  must  be  true.  Substitute  S  a  P  for 
the  major  premiss  M  o  P  and  we  have  a  syllogism 
in  Barbara  thus — 


5  a 
Ma 

P 
S 

M  a 

P 

But  this  conclusion  must  be  false  since  it  con- 
tradicts the  original  major,  M  o  P,  which  is 
admittedly  true.  But  in  the  second  syllogism, 
M  a  P  \<,  a  conclusion  drawn  from  two  premisses, 


FIGURE   AND    MOOD:    REDUCTION     109 

of  which  the  minor  is  posited  true,  therefore  if  our 
new  conclusion,  viz.  M  a  P,  is  false,  the  major  pre- 
miss of  the  second  syllogism  must  also  be  false,  that 
is,  its  contradictory,  viz.  S  0  P,  must  be  true,  and  this 
is  the  original  conclusion  which  was  to  be  proven. 

Both  Baroco  and  Bocardo  may  be  reduced  osten- 
sively,  and  the  following  names  have  been  suggested 
as  substitutes  to  indicate  the  method — 

Baroco       Facovo,  Faksoko,  Faksnoko,  Facoco^  or 

Fakoro. 
Bocardo    Docamovs,   Doksamosk,    Doksauirosk, 

Docajiioc,  or  Doksamo. 

Of  these  Faksoko  and  Doksamosk  are  the  best. 
In  the  other  substitutes  the  letters  are  open  to 
misconstruction. 

k  indicates  obversion  ; 

ks  indicates  obversion  and  then  conversion,  i.  e. 
contraposition. 

In  Facovoand  Docamovs,  <:  means  contraposition 
and  V  obversion. 

Baroco  or  Faksoko         P  a  M 
S  0  M 


.',  S  0  P 


Contraposition  of  the  major  and  obversion  of  the 
minor  premiss  yield  the  syllogism — 

Ferio  M  e  P 

S  i  M 

.'.  S  0  P 


no  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

Bocardo  or  Doksamosk  M  o  P 

J/  a  S 


.'.  S  0  P 


Contraposition  of  the  major  and    metathesis  of 
the  premisses  yield — 

Darii  M  a  S 

P  i  M 


.-  ,  P  i  S 

This  conchision  by  conversion  and  obversion 
becomes  J^^  o  P  or  the  conclusion  of  the  original 
syllogism,  which  was  to  be  proven. 

Indirect  reduction  is  applied  usually  only  to 
Baroco  and  Bocardo,  but  it  is  equally  applicable  to 
the  moods  which  are  dealt  with  as  a  rule  ostensively. 

Indirect  reduction  is  a  way  of  proving  in  the  first 
figure  that  a  conclusion  is  true  because  its  contra- 
dictory is  false.  The  assumption  upon  which  the 
process  is  based,  is  that  if  a  premiss  leads  to  a  false 
conclusion  it  must  itself  be  false.  There  is  nothing 
special  to  Baroco  and  Bocardo  in  this,  for  the 
process  will  apply  to  all  the  moods. 

Euclid  uses  reductio  ad  absurduni  on  the  same 
fundamental  principle  that  aiiytJiing,  being  used  cor- 
rectly, which  leads  to  fallacy  must  itself  be  fallacious. 

Aristotle  was  the  first  to  see  that  a  false  con- 
clusion could  never  be  got  correctly  from  true 
premisses,  and  also  that  a  materially  true  conclu- 
sion can  be  obtained  from  premisses  one  or  both  of 


FIGURE   AND    MOOD:  REDUCTION      iii 

which  may  be  false,  i.  e.  from  true  we  can  only  get 
true,  but  from  false  we  may  get  true.     E.g. — 

All  stones  are  animals 
All  cozvs  are  stones 


All  cows  are  animals. 


A  conclusion  never  proves  its  premisses,  but  the 
falsity  of  a  conclusion  overturns  the  premisses. 

There  is  an  aspect  of  material  investigation  called 
plurality  of  causes ;  this  and  the  validity  of  scientific 
hypothesis  repose  on  the  principle  that  a  materially 
true  conclusion  may  be  drawn  from  false  premisses. 


112 


CHAPTER   XV 

IRREGULAR   AND   COMPOUND   SYLLOGISMS 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lessons^  ch.  xviii.,  xix. 
Keynes,  Part  iii.,  ch.  vi. 
Welton,  Vol.  I.,  Bk.  iv.,  ch.  v.^ 


The   table   subjoined    gives    at    a    glance    the 
irregular  syllogisms. 

i  First  Order    —  omission  of  major  premiss. 
ENTHYMEME        x  Second  Order — omission  of  minorpremiss. 
(  Third  Order  —  omission  of  conclusion. 


T-  11      i.  i.  J     ( Prosyllogism 
Fully  stated    |  Episyllo|ism 

(  Curtailed         \  f£f '"^^''^  S  Aristoteli 
\  Sorites  I  Goclenia, 


The  word  enthymeme  is  derived  from  the  Greek 
ivOviJLijiJLa,  which  means  a  suggestion  or  argument. 
It  is  defined  by  Aristotle  as  {n;A.A.oyto-juos  e^  dKorcov 
?y  (njixeicov.  The  €Ik6s  and  o-T^/xeior  themselves  are 
propositions  :  qlkos  states  a  general  probability,  and 
(Tiiixdov  a  fact  which  is  known  to  be  an  indication 
more  or  less  certain  of  some    further   statement, 


SYLLOGISMS— IRREGULAR,  COMPOUND     113 

whether  of  a  single  fact  or  a  general  belief  In 
short,  an  enthymeme  meant  originally  a  syllogism 
with  probable  premisses.  Aristotle's  use  of  the 
word  is  entirely  different  to  present  usage,  and  has 
now  only  historical  interest. 

The  enthymeme  is  now  usually  defined  as  an 
abridged  syllogism.  The  syllogism  instead  of  being 
stated  in  full  is  truncated  by  the  omission  of  one 
or  other  of  the  constituent  propositions.  Ac- 
cording to  the  proposition  omitted,  enthymemes 
are  ranked  in  three  orders,  viz. — 

first  order,  major  premiss  omitted  : 
second  order,  minor  premiss  omitted  : 
third  order,  conclusion  omitted. 

The  following  are  examples — 

1st.    We  are  mortals^  and  tJierefore  liable  to  ei'ror. 

2nd.  Mortals  are  liable  to  error,  and  therefore  zve 
are  liable  to  error. 

3rd.  Mortals  are  liable  to  error,  and  we  are 
mortals. 

In  dealing  with  an  enthymeme,  care  should  be 
taken  to  express  the  omitted  proposition.  It  is  to 
be  noted  that  according  to  the  definition  now 
current,  the  enthymeme  differs  in  no  way  at  all 
from  the  ordinary  syllogism  except  in  its  expression. 

By  a  polysyllogism  is  meant  a  conjunction  of 
syllogisms  so  stated  that  the  conclusion  of  one 
becomes  a  premiss  of  another.  The  syllogism 
whose  conclusion  becomes  the  premiss  of  the 
syllogism  that  follows  it   is  cdXXoidi^A  prosyllogisni. 


114  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

The  syllogism  whose  premiss  is  the  conclusion  of 
the  syllogism   preceding  is  called   an  episyllogism . 

When  in  these  conjoined  syllogisms  the  full 
statement  is  abridged  by  omission  of  any  of  the 
constituent  propositions,  it  is  called^an  epicheirenia. 
In  other  words,  the  epicheirema  is  a  polysyllogism 
in  which  the  prosyllogisms  are  enthymemes. 

The  following  are  examples. 

Polysyllogism  fully  stated. 

(i)  All  voyages  of  discovery  have  a  scientific  value. 

(2)  All  arctic  expeditions  are  voyages  of  discovery. 

(3)  .'.  All  arctic  expeditions  have  a  scientific  value. 

(4)  But  Nansen's  search  for  the  North  Pole  zuas 
an  arctic  expedition. 

(5)  .*.  Nans  ens  search  for  the  North  Pole  has  a 
scientific  value. 

In  symbol  the  above  argument  may  be  written — 


Q 

a 

P 

R 

a 

Q 

R 

a 

P 

but 

S 

a 

R 

.'  .  S  a  P 

Note  propositions  (i),  (2),  and  (3J  form  the 
prosyllogism  :  propositions  (3),  (4),  and  (5)  form 
the  episyllogism. 

Epicheirema  or  Polysyllogism  curtailed. 

All  arctic  expeditions  have  a  scientific  value  because 
they  are  voyages  of  discovery.  Nansen's  search  for 
the  North  Pole  therefore  has  a  scientific  value. 


SYLLOGISMS— IRREGULAR,  COMPOUND     115 

Sorites  (from  o-Mpos  a  heap)  is  a  chain  of 
syllogisms  curtailed  in  statement  and  differing  from 
the  epicheirema  in  being  curtailed  in  a  definite  and 
uniform  manner.  Or  more  shortly  put,  the  defini- 
tion may  be  given  as  follows — A  sorites  is  a  chain 
of  enthymemes  all  of  the  third  order  terminating 
in   a   fully  expressed  syllogism. 

There  are  tzvo  kinds  of  Sorites — 

(i)  In  the  ordinary  or  so-called  Aristotelian 
Sorites  the  suppressed  conclusion  of  each  syllogism 
becomes  the  minor  premiss  of  the  next.  It  is  more 
easily  remembered  by  noting  that  the  subject  of 
the  conclusion  is  the  subject  of  the  first  proposition. 

Thus — 

6"  is  R 
R  \s  Q 
Q  is  P 


.-.  S  \s  P 


(2)  In  the  Goclenian  Sorites  the  suppressed  con- 
clusion of  each  syllogism  becomes  the  major 
premiss  of  the  next.  It  may  be  remembered  by 
noting  that  the  predicate  of  the  conclusion  is  the 
predicate  of  the  first  proposition. 
Thus — 

g  is  P 
R  IS  Q 
S  is  R 


.  S  Is  P 


In   the    ordinary  sorites   there   are  two    special 
rules,  viz. — 


ii6  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

(i)  The  last  and  only  the  last  premiss  can  be 
negative. 

(2)  The  first  and  only  the  first  premiss  can  be 
particular. 

In  the  Goclcnian  sorites  these  rules  must  be 
reserved  in  statement. 

(i)  The  first  and  only  the  first  premiss  can  be 
negative. 

(2)  The  last  and  only  the  last  premiss  can  be 
particular. 

An  O  proposition  is  therefore  by  these  rules  ex- 
cluded as  a  premiss,  although  an  O  conclusion  can 
be  drawn  if  the  final  syllogism  is  in  Ferio. 

There  is  no  difficulty  in  deducing  these  special 
rules  from  the  general  canons  of  syllogism :  (i)  one 
negative  premiss  only,  or  else  with  a  second  we 
shall  have  a  syllogism  wdth  two,  and  so  the  chain 
will  be  broken  :  (2)  one  particular  premiss  only,  or 
else  with  a  second  w^e  shall  have  a  syllogism  with 
two,  w^iich  will  break  the  chain.  The  position  of 
these  premisses  is  determined  by  the  rule  relating 
to  distribution. 

Pure  contmgent  syllogisms  do  not  call  for  special 
treatment,  for  in  every  case  the  premisses  can 
be  expressed  in  categorical  form  and  dealt  with 
as  regards  mood,  figure,  and  reduction  in  the 
usual  way.  They  are  syllogisms  in  which  both  the 
premisses  are  conditional  or  both  hypothetical, 
giving  respectively  a  conditional  or  hypothetical 
conclusion,  and  called  respectively  conditional  or 
hypothetical  syllogisms. 


SYLLOGISMS— IRREGULAR,  COMPOUND     117 

Thus  the  following  argument  is  a  hypothetical 
syllogism  in  Barbara — 

If  M  is  P  is 
If  S  is  M  is 


.  • .  If  S  is  P  is. 

No  difficulty  is  experienced  in  transforming  the 
premisses  into  categoricals  and  obtaining  a  cate- 
gorical conclusion.     Treated  thus  it  becomes — 

Every  coincidence  of  M  is  a  coincidence  of  P 
Every  coincidence  of  S  is  a  coincidence  of  M 

.  • .  Every  coincidence  of  S  is  a  coincidence  of  P. 

The  name  hypothetical  syllogism,  however,  is 
commonly  restricted,  as  by  Jevons,  to  a  mixed 
syllogism  in  which  one  of  the  premisses  only  is 
hypothetical,  the  other  being  categorical.  A  more 
accurate  nomenclature  would  be  to  call  these 
syllogisms   Jiypothetico-categoricaL- 

In  these  syllogisms — 

the  major  premiss  is  hypothetical : 
the  minor  premiss  is  categorical :  and 
the  conclusion  is  categorical. 

The   hypothetico- categorical    syllogism   has   two 
moods — 
(I.)  Modus ponens,  and  (II.)  Modus  tollens. 

I.  The  modus  ponens  or  Constructive  hypothetical 
syllogism  is  the  mood  of  affirmation.  If  S  is  P 
is,  but  vS  is,  .  • .  P  is. 

The  antecedent  of  the  hypothetical  is  affirmed, 
and  thereby  the  consequent  is  established. 


ii8  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

II.  The  modus  tollens,  or  Destructive  hypo- 
thetical syllogism  is  the  mood  of  negation.  If  S 
is  P  7Sy  but  P  is  not,  .' .  S  is  not. 

The  consequent  of  the  hypothetical  is  denied, 
and  thereby  the  antecedent  is  found  wanting. 

The  rule  for  deahng  with  these  syllogisms  is 
commonly  stated  thus  :  "  The  antecedent  must  be 
affirmed,  or  the  consequent  denied."  More  shortly 
it  may  be  put,  posit  antecedent,  or  snblate 
consequent. 

It  has  been  urged  by  Bain,  Mansel,  and  others 
that  this  form  of  syllogism  is  not  mediate,  but 
immediate  reasoning,  i.  e.  it  is  not  syllogism  at  all. 
Immediate  reasoning,  however,  always  leaves  off 
with  a  conclusion  resembling  in  form  the  original 
proposition.  Thus  starting  with  the  hypothetical, 
if  the  reasoning  were  immediate,  the  conclusion 
would  be  hypothetical :  it  is  on  the  contrary,  how- 
ever, categorical.  We  cannot  from  our  hypothetical 
get  any  conclusion  without  either  positing  the  ante- 
cedent or  sublating  the  consequent,  that  is,  given 
one  proposition  (viz.  the  hypothetical  major),  we 
pass  from  it  throuc^h  another  (viz.  the  categorical 
minor)  to  a  third  (viz.  the  categorical  conclusion), 
and  this  is  as  clearly  mediate  reasoning  as  in 
categorical   syllogism. 

It  is  urged  by  Mansel  that  there  is  no  middle 
term.  In  answer  it  may  be  said  that  the  categori- 
cal minor  is  a  proposition  such  as  includes  a  middle 
term.  Thus  transform  the  categorical  to  the  h)'po- 
thetic  form  as  follows — 


SYLLOGISMS— IRREGULAR,  COMPOUND     119 

M  is  P 
S  is  M 


.  • .  ^  is  /^ 
If  M  is  P  is 
but  M  is  (in  the  form  of  S) 

.-.  P  is. 

It  appears  then  that  it  is  not  the  middle  term  that 
is  wanting,  but  the  minor  term  in  not  being 
separately  expressed. 

Bain's  objection  is  different  and  is  based  on  the 
ambiguity  of  the  word  if  (see  Mind,  Logic  of  If 
1877,  p.  264,  and  Bain,  Ded.,  p.  116).  He  argues 
that  the  hypothetical,  e.  g.  "  If  it  is  fine  ivc  ivi/l 
go  azuay  to-vwrrowl'  is  nothing  more  than  a  con- 
junction of  two  statements  into  one,  viz.,  that  zve 
will  go  away  to-morrow  and  it  is  fine.  He  is  read- 
ing into  the  word  if  the  meaning  since  or  because^ 
whereas  it  properly  denotes  bare  hypothesis  with 
the  meaning  suppose  or  granted  that.  In  symbol 
Bain's  hypothetical  must  be  written.  If  S  is  {and 
it  is)  P  is.  In  this  case  the  conclusion  is  certainly 
deduced  immediately.  In  answer  it  may  be  said 
that  the  same  is  true  in  the  case  of  the  categorical 
syllogism.  If  both  the  premisses  are  conjoined 
and  read  together  the  conclusion  follows  immedi- 
ately. They  are  however  read  separately  and  so 
from  either  of  the  premisses  taken  separately  the 
conclusion  is  mediately  drawn.  In  short  whatever 
argument  can  be  brought  against  the  mediacy  of 


I20  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

the  hypothetical  syllogism  can  also  be  brought 
against  the  mediacy  of  the  categorical. 

A  disjunctive  syllogism  is  one  in  which  the  major 
premiss  is  a  disjunctive  proposition.  The  minor 
premiss  and  the  conclusion  are  categorical.  Many 
logicians  recognise  two  moods :  I.  Modus  tollendo 
ponens^  II.  Modus  ponendo  tollens. 

I.  The  Modus  Tollendo  Ponens  is  equivalent  to 
the  constructive  JiypotJietical  into  which  it  may  be 
resolved.  One  of  the  alternatives  is  denied  and 
thereby  the  other  is  established  as — 

5  is  either  Q  or  P 
but  S  is  not  Q 
.  • .   5  is  P. 

Stated  in  hypothetical  form  the  syllogism  stands — 

If      5  is  not  0,  5  is  P 
but  5  is  not   Q 
.'.  S  is  P. 

II.  The  Modus  Ponendo  Tollens  is  regarded  by 
many  logicians  as  a  valid  mood  and  equivalent 
to  the  destructive  JLypotJietical.  It  consists  in 
affirmation  of  one  of  the  alternatives  whereby  the 
other  is  negatived  and  forms  the  conclusion.     Thus 

^'  is  cither  Q  or  P 
but  5  is  Q 
.-.  S  is  not  /'. 

The  validity  of  this  mood  depends  entirely  upon 
the  interpretation  of  the  disjunctive  that  in  it  the 
alternatives    are  mutuall)'   exclusive.      If  however 


SYLLOGISMS— IRREGULAR,  COMPOUND     121 

we  take  the  opposite  view,  held  by  many,  that  the 
alternatives  are  not  of  necessity  mutually  exclusive, 
then  the  validity  of  this  mood  is  vitiated.  As  will 
be  seen  it  depends  in  any  case  upon  how  the  dis- 
junctive premiss  is  read.  The  only  case  therefore 
in  which  we  can  be  sure  of  the  validity  of  this  mood 
is  that  in  which  the  terms  of  the  alternatives  are 
contradictories  :  6"  is  either  P  or  P. 

With  regard  to  the  dilemma  logicians  are  not 
agreed  either  as  to  its  form  or  nature  :  hence  defi- 
nitions have  varied  considerably.  It  may  perhaps 
be  fairly  called  a  contingent- disjunctive  syllogism 
in  which  the  major  premiss  is  a  contingent  contain- 
ing a  plurality,  either  of  antecedents  or  con- 
sequents, and  the  minor  premiss  is  a  disjunctive. 
These  premisses  will  yield  either  a  categorical  or 
disjunctive  conclusion. 

As  in  the  previous  classes  of  mixed  syllogism 
there  are  two  moods,  (I.)  Modus  Ponens,  or  Con- 
structive  in  which  the  conclusion  is  affirmative : 
called  simple  when  categorical :  complex  when 
disjunctive.  And  (TI.)  Modus  tollens^  or  Destructive 
in  which  the  conclusion  is  negative,  and  (according 
to  the  view  of  the  majority)  always  disjunctive  : 
called  therefore  complex. 

The  schema  for  the  three  forms  may  be  written 
as  follows  : — 

I.  Modus  ponens. 

(i)  Simple  Constructive. 

If  A  then  X,  and  if  B  then  X: 
But  either  A  or  B :         .  • .  X 


122  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

(2)  Complex  Constructive. 
If  A  then  X,  and  if  B  then  Y : 

But  either  A  or  B :         .' .  X  or  Y. 
II.  Modus  toUens. 

Complex  Destructive. 

If  A  then  X,  and  if  B  then  Y: 

But  neither  X  nor  Y :    .' .  Neither  A  nor  B. 

The  dilemma  is  rather  a  device  of  rhetoric  than  a 
sound  logical  method.  Its  purpose  is  to  force  an 
opponent  to  a  choice  of  alternatives  both  of  which 
are  damaging  to  his  argument,  hence  the  proverb, 
"  to  be  on  the  horns  of  a  dilemma." 

The  rule  for  rebutting  a  dilemma  is  to  change  the 
position  of  the  consequents  and  make  them  nega- 
tive. Thus  e.g.  against  the  complex  constructive 
it  may  be  retorted — 

If  A  tJien  710 t-Y,  and  if  B  then  not-X  : 

But  either  A  or  B :         .  '  .  not-  Y  or  not-X. 

The  weakness  of  dilemmatic  argument  lies  in 
the  fact  already  noticed,  that  in  a  disjunctive  pro- 
position the  alternatives  are  not  of  necessity 
mutually  exclusive. 


123 


CHAPTER   XVI 

FALLACIES 


REFERENCES 


Jevons,  Lesso7ts^  ch.  xx.,  xxi. 

Mill,  Bk.  V.  (all). 

Whately,  Elejiients  of  Logic,  9th  ed.,  Bk.  iii.,  pp.  loi  seq. 

Welton,  Vol.  ii.,  Bk.  viii.  (all). 

De  Morgan,  Fo?inal  Logic,  ch.  xiii. 


The  word  fallacy  is  used  in  three  distinct  senses, 
meaning — 

(i)  error  in  an  argument, 

(2)  violation  of  any  logical  principle,  and 

(3)  any  kind  of  mental  confusion  whatever. 
The  meaning   should    be  restricted  to  violation 

of  any  logical  principle,  and  this  will  include  the 
breach  of  the  rules  of  inference. 

By  Aristotle  fallacies  were  classed  according 
as  the  error  lay — 

I.  in  the  form  —  in  dictione  —  or 
IL  in  the  matter  —  extra  dictione. 


124  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

Subsequent  logicians  have  rejected  or  modified 
this  classification. 

Whately  divides  fallacies  into — 

I.  Logical  which  are  (a)  purely  logical  and  {d) 
semi-logical. 

II.  Non-logical  or  material — corresponding  with 
Aristotle's  exlra  dictione. 

I.  {a)  The  purely  logical  fallacies  relate  to  the 
syllogism  and  are  the  fallacies  of  undistributed 
middle  and  illicit  process  whether  of  major  or 
minor. 

ih)  The  semi-logical  correspond  with  Aristotle's 
in  dictione. 

Mill  greatly  enlarged  and  modified  the  scheme 
to  include  all  possible  errors  liable  to  invalidate 
inference.  The  whole  question  is  discussed  at 
great  length  in  Book  V.  of  his  Logic,  and  to  this 
reference  must  be  made  for  full  treatment  of  the 
subject. 

No  thoroughly  satisfactory  classification  of  fallacies 
has  yet  been  made,  although  frequently  attempted, 
and  De  Morgan  doubts  whether  such  a  classification 
is  possible. 

The  fallacies  of  deduction  have  already  been 
noticed  and  described.  Those  of  induction  are 
beyond  our  present  scope.  Material  fallacies  are 
strictly  speaking  outside  the  sphere  of  logic  alto- 
gether. The  following  summary  of  the  more  im- 
portant fallacies  is  given  in  accordance  with  the 
traditional  treatment  of  the  subject. 


FALLACIES  125 

Semi-Log^ical  Fallacies. 

I.  Equivocation  or  Ambiguous  Middle  is  use  of 
the  same  word  in  a  varying  sense. 

E.  g.  The  dog  is  an  animal.  Sir  ins  is  the  dog.. 
. ' .  Sirius  is  an  animal. 

A  man  zvho  is  deaf  in  one  ear  zvas  rejected  from 
a  jury  the  other  day  because  it  was  argned  he 
couldn't  Jiear  both  sides. 

2.  Amphibology  is  doubtful  grammatical  structure 
of  a  sentence. 

E.  g.  /  Jiave  come  from  a  country  where  mosquitoes 
abound.  Majiy  of  them  lueigh  a  pound,  and  they 
settle  on  the  trees  and  bark. 

The  stock  illustration  is:  Aio  te,  Aeacida, 
Romanos  vincere  posse. 

3.  Composition  is  the  fallacy  of  using  a  middle 
term  distributively  in  a  major  premiss  and  collec- 
tively in  the  minor. 

E.  g.  3  and  2  are  odd  and  even,  5  is  3  and  2, 
.  • .   5   is  odd  and  .even. 

4.  Division  is  the  fallacy  of  using  a  middle  term 
collectively  in  the  major  and  distributively  in  the 
minor. 

E.  g.  The  planets  are  seven,  Venus  and  Mars  arc 
planets^  . ' .   Venus  and  Mars  are  seven. 

5.  Accent  is  a  fallacy  arising  from  false  emphasis 
in  speaking. 

E.  g.  {She.)  "  Do  you  think  that  I  could  get  a 
donkey  to  take  me  up  the  mountain  ?  "  (He^  *'  Lean 
on  ME." 

6.  Figure  of  speech  is  the  assumption  that  words 


126  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

similar  in  form  are  similar  in  meaning.  Essentially 
this  fallacy  is  one  of  equivocation. 

The  traditional  example  is :  IV/iat  a  man  walks 
on  he  tramples  on.  He  zvalks  on  the  zvhole  day, 
.',  He  tramples  on  the  zvhole  day. 

The  material  fallacies. 

These,  also  called  non-logical,  arise  from  the 
subject  matter  not  the  form  of  the  argument,  and 
of  these  the  following  are  usually  enumerated. 

1.  A  dicto  simpliciter  ad  dictum  secundum  quid,  or 
Fallacy  of  Accident.  It  is  a  false  argument  from 
general  to  particular. 

E.  g.  To  inflict  pain  purposely  is  the  mark  of  a 
brutal  nature.  The  surgeon  inflicts  pain  purposely. 
. ' .   The  surgeon  is  a  man  of  brutal  nature. 

2.  A  dicto  secundum  quid  ad  dictum  simpliciter  or 
Converse  Fallacy  of  Accident  is  a  false  argument 
from  particular  to  general. 

E.  g.  Miracles  ivere  not  stibjected  to  a  thorougJi 
scientific  examination  at  the  time  they  ivere  wrought, 
and.  miracles  have  never  been  known  to  occur 
within  modern  times.  .  * .  Miracles  are  altogetJier 
impossible. 

.  3.  Ignoratio  Elenchi  or  Fallacy  of  Irrelevant  Con- 
clusion, literally  ignorance  of  the  refutation,  the 
elencJius  being  the  contradictory  of  the  assertion 
of  a  supposed  opponent.  It  is  refutation  of  the 
wrong  point.  It  includes  all  kinds  of  irrelevancy 
and  assumes  three  main  forms,  viz. — 

{a)  Mistake  in  the  point  at  issue.  E.g.  ''Here, 
zuaitery   take   away   these  oysters.     They  arc  badT 


FALLACIES  i^l 

"  Vesszr,  but  we've  given  you  tzvo  more  than  you 
asked  for  to  make  upT 

(b)  The  imputation  of  consequence  or  motive. 
E.  g.  The  doctrine  of  the  High  Church  party  in  the 
Church  of  England  leads  to  Romanism  .' .  it  must 
be  false. 

{c)  Introduction  of  rhetorical  expedients  such 
as  the  argumenta  ad   hominem,  ad  populum,  etc. 

E,  g.  TJiis  proposal  is  tJiorougJdy  bad,  as  may 
readily  be  supposed  from  the  cJiai'acter  of  the  man 
zvho  makes  it. 

4.  Petitio  Principii  or  Begging  the  Question  or 
Circulus  in  Probando.  A  form  of  fallacy  in  which 
the  conclusion  is  either  itself  one  of  the  premisses 
or  is  required  to  establish  one  of  the  premisses. 
The  fallacy  occurs  generally  in  protracted  argu- 
ments. It  is  analogous  to  t\\Q  circulus  in  definiendoy 
viz.  that  fault  in  definition  which  seeks  to  define 
a  word  by  itself  or  its  synonym. 

E.  g.  Consumption  is  tuberculosis :  we  are  able  to 
diagnose  consumption  in  a  patient  luhenever  lue 
observe  the  symptoms  of  tubercular  disease. 

5.  Non  sequitur  or  a  conclusion  not  adequately 
supported  by  the  premisses  and  which  therefore 
"  does  not  follow."  This  fallacy  can  always  be 
reduced   to  some  other  form. 

E.  g.  {Professor  of  Chemistry.)  "  The  substance 
you  see  in  this  vial  is  the  most  deadly  of  all  poisons. 
A  single  drop  placed  on  the  tongue  of  a  cat  is  enough 
to  kill  tJie  strongest  man!'  This  for  instance  might 
be  classed  as  Ignoratio  Elenchi. 


128  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

6.  Noil  causa  pro  causa  or  Post  hoc  ergo  propter 
hoc  or  False  Cause.  The  attribution  of  any  event 
to  some  antecedent  with  which  it  has  no  sort  of 
connexion. 

E.  g.  The  Norivegians  once  at tr United  a  disap- 
pearance of  fish  from  their  shores  to  the  introduction 
into  Norzvaj/  of  vaccination. 

7.  Fallacia  plurium  interrogationum  or  Fallacy 
of  Many  Questions,  i.e.  a  combination  of  two  or 
more  questions,  each  requiring  a  separate  answer, 
into  one,  the  single  question  asked  not  admitting 
of  only  one  answer.  The  fallacy  is  refuted  by 
answering  separately  each   particular. 

P>.  g.  {Editor,  to  aspiring  writer)  "  You  shoidd 
write  so  that  the  most  ignorant  can  understand 
zuhat you  mean!'  (^Aspirant.)  "  Well,  wJiat  part  of 
my  paragraph  don't  you  understand  ?  " 


129 


CHAPTER  XVII 

THE  VALUE   OF   THE   SYLLOGISM 


REFERENCES 


Welton,  Vol.  i.,  Bk.  iv.,  cli.  iii.,  p.  37: 

Ray,  p.  250. 

Mill,  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  iii. 

Bain,  Deduction^  Bk.  ii.,  ch.  iii. 


The  value  of  the  syllogism  as  a  method  of  infer- 
ence has  been  disputed,  in  the  seventeenth  century 
by  Locke,  Descartes  and  others,  in  more  recent 
times  notably  by  Mill  followed  by  Bain  and  others. 

Mill's  objection  is  twofold.  He  urges  that  (i)  syl- 
logistic reasoning  is  not  a  process  of  inference,  and 
(2)  it  involves  the  fallacy  oi petitio  principii. 

The  objection  may  be  met  if  we  are  careful  to 
bear  in  mind  that  syllogistic  reasoning  does  not 
pretend  to  be  more  than  a  process  of  formal  logic. 
Now  formal  logic  does  not  provide  us  with  the  mat- 
ter of  argument ;  this  is  otherwise  gained,  but  being 
gained  the  office  of  formal  logic  is  to  ensure  its 
being  used  with  self-consistency.  Propositions  are 
dealt  with  simply  as  relations  between  terms.     The 


I30  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

question  of  their  material  truth  lies  outside  the  limit 
of  formality. 

Syllogism  deals  with  the  application  of  two  pro- 
positions that  have  a  common  or  middle  term,  com- 
bining them  under  the  laws  of  thought  in  a  third 
proposition  called  the  conclusion  ;  and  once  more, 
it  is  not  the  province  of  the  syllogism  to  test  this 
conclusion  by  reference  to  the  matter  about  which 
it  is  concerned  so  long  as  the  self-consistency  of  the 
syllogism  itself  is  assured. 

If  it  is  useful  and  important  to  combine  our 
judgments  so  as  to  avoid  fallacy,  then  in  so  doing 
syllogism  has  a  very  distinct  value.  Most  of  what 
we  call  knowledge  is  communicated  by  general 
statements.  It  is  by  the  process  of  deduction  that 
the  general  statement  is  applied  to  particular  cases, 
or  in  other  w^ords  that  inference  is  made  from 
the  more  to  the  less  general :  and  syllogism  is  the 
form  of  deduction. 

Mill's  argument  proceeds  on  the  assumption  that 
we  argue  from  particulars  to  particulars  and  do  not 
as  a  rule  pass  through  a  general  proposition  to 
reach  the  conclusion.  He  regards  syllogism  there- 
fore not  as  a  necessary  mode  of  reasoning  but  only 
as  a  permissible  form  into  which  an  argument  may 
be  thrown.  It  serves  as  a  test  of  validity  in  an 
argument,  and  so  far  it  is  a  safe-guard  against 
fallacy.  But  even  if  it  be  no  more  than  this  syllo.- 
gism  is  obviously  valuable. 

The  true  ground  that  Locke,  Descartes,  and  others 
had  for  their  attack,  was  that  for  ages  it  had  come 


THE   VALUE   OF   THE   SYLLOGISM     131 

to  be  thought  that  by  mere  combinations  of  state- 
ments it  was  possible  to  determine  matters  of  fact. 
It  was  in  this  way  that  the  schoohnen  dogmatised 
about  facts  from  statements  borrowed  from  others 
or  hastily  assumed.  Consequently  syllogism  fell 
into  disrepute  because  it  had  come  to  be  falsely  re- 
garded as  determining  truth  in  relation  to  fact.  In 
discussing  therefore  the  question  of  the  value  of 
syllogism  the  key  to  its  defence  lies  in  remembering 
its  proper  function.  It  does  not  pretend  to  be 
anything  more  than  a  mere  process  of  formally 
explicating  what  is  already  implicitly  granted.  It 
is  concerned  only  with  self-consistency.  The  con- 
sistency of  thought  with  fact  is  a  consideration 
entirely   different   and    lies    outside   its    sphere. 

Granting  then  that  syllogism  is  a  mere  process  of 
formal  reasoning,  it  remains  to  be  seen  whether  it 
is  of  any  account  for  purposes  of  real  inference. 
This  is  the  question  proposed  by  Mill,  who  deals 
with  it  in  Book  II.  of  his  Logic. 

Mill's  position  is  that  all  inference  is  ultimately 
deductive.  Hence  syllogism  is  not  a  process  of 
inference  at  all.  It  is  rather  a  process  of  interpret- 
ation. He  writes — "  All  inference  is  from  particu- 
lars to  particulars  :  general  propositions  are  merely 
registers  of  such  inferences  already  made,  and  short 
formulae  for  making  more.  The  major  premiss  of 
a  syllogism  consequently  is  a  formula  of  this  de- 
scription, and  the  conclusion  is  not  an  inference 
drawn  from  the  formula  but  an  inference  drawn 
according  to  the  formula,  the  real,  logical  antecedent 


132  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

or  premiss  being  the  particular  facts  from  which 
the  proposition  was  collected  by  induction." 

Mill  in  his  analysis  of  the  syllogism  takes  the 
moods  Barbara  and  Celarent  as  the  universal  types 
for  affirmative  and  negative  conclusions  respectively. 
Thus  in  the  syllogism  e.  g.  All  mammals  have 
hmgs,  WJiales  are  mammals  ,' .  Whales  have  lungs, 
he  argues  that  between  the  premisses  and  the  con- 
clusion there  is  nothing  that  can  be  called  real 
inference.  By  mere  consistency  the  conclusion 
cannot  be  avoided.  Unless  it  be  known  that  whales 
have  limgs  we  have  no  business  to  start  with  All 
mammals  have  lungs ;  there  is  no  passage  here  from 
known  to  unknown,  and  in  any  case  if  the  conclusion 
of  a  syllogism  is  regarded  as  a  new  truth  derived 
by  a  process  of  inference,  that  inference  does  not  lie 
between  the  conclusion  and  the  premisses,  but 
between  the  conclusion  and  certain  other  data  at 
the  back  of  the  syllogism,  which  other  data  are  the 
actual  foundation  of  the  argument.  The  conclusion 
may  involve  a  process  of  real  inference  but  not 
from  the  premisses,  and  if  from  other  data  through 
the  premisses  it  is  because  in  getting  to  the  major 
premiss  a  material  inference  was  performed  of  such 
scope  as  to  include  the  conclusion.  The  syllogistic 
process  therefore  is  never  more  than  explication 
or   interpretation. 

Taking  this  view  it  follows  further  that  the  fallacy 
o{ petztio priiicipii  {^.'wwfoXvcd.  Syllogism  is  the  form 
of  deduction:  deduction  consists  in  deriving  a  parti- 
cular from  a  general :  but  since  we  cannot  infer  from 


THE   VALUE   OF    THE   SYLLOGISM     133 

a  general  any  particular  not  included,  therefore  the 
conclusion  of  a  syllogism  simply  re-asserts  what 
was  included  in  the  major  premiss.  This  re-asser- 
tion is  according  to  Mill  \h^  petitio  principii. 

Mill's  standpoint  is  open  to  criticism.  Amongst 
other  points  these  may  be  noted  : — 

1.  The  discussion  has  been  complicated  by  a 
confusion  in  the  use  of  the  words  reasoning  and 
inference.  Reasoning  or  inference  in  the  widest 
sense  may  be  defined  as  progression  in  thought. 
But  a  distinction  lies  between  formal  and  real 
reasoning  or  inference.  In  formal  reasoning  the 
thought  to  which  we  pass  is  implicated  in  what 
we  start  with.  In  real  inference  what  we  arrive  at, 
however  it  may  be  connected  with  the  starting- 
point,  is  not  impHcated  therein.  Real  inference, 
says  Mill,  "is  passage  from  the  known  to  the 
unknown."  In  formal  reasoning  the  passage  is 
from  the  implicit  to  the  explicit,  from  what  is 
implied  in  the  premiss  to  what  is  explicitly  stated 
in  the  conclusion.  But  this  passage  of  thought  is 
just  as  much  inference  as  passage  from  known  to 
unknown. 

To  describe  syllogism  therefore  as  a  mere  process 
of  interpretation  does  not  by  any  means  remove  it 
from  the  sphere  of  reasoning,  for  interpretation 
after  all  is  a  short  expression  for  the  process  of 
explicating  what  has  already  been  implicitly  given, 
and  as  we  have  already  seen,  this  is  all  that  syl- 
logism pretends  to  do. 

2.  Mill,  in  his  attack  on  the  syllogism,  leaves  out 


134 


A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


of  account  the  part  played  by  the  minor  premiss. 
If  the  major  premiss  contained  the  conclusion  in 
the  sense  that  he  assumes,  then  the  conclusion 
could  at  once  be  gained  per  saltum,  without  a 
minor  premiss  intervening.  The  minor  premiss, 
however,  has  a  distinct  and  important  part  in  the 
argument.  It  ensures  the  correct  application  of 
the  major  to  the  case  under  consideration,  and, 
unless  the  minor  affirms  it  to  be  included  in  the 
general  statement  of  the  major,  there  can  be  no 
passage  of  thought  leading  to  the  conclusion.  In 
effect  the  minor  is  the  essential  factor  in  the  process 
of  interpretation.  The  conclusion  is  not,  and  cannot 
be,  reached  except  through  the  two  premisses  taken 
jointly,  and  it  is  this  that  constitutes  the  reasoning. 
3.  If  Mill's  view  be  accepted,  it  must  be  on  the 
assumption  that  the  mind  cannot  accept  the 
premisses,  and  not  at  once  deduce  the  conclusion. 
With  omniscience  and  a  perfect  intellect  the  as- 
sumption would  doubtless  hold  good,  but  with 
limited  powers  of  attention,  and  imperfection  of 
knowledge,  and  in  the  face  of  the  complexity  of 
nature,  it  is  quite  possible  that  while  admitting  M 
to  be  under  P,  and  wS  to  be  under  AT  it  is  not 
instantly  seen  that  .9  is  consequently  under  P. 
As  a  matter  of  fact  it  constantly  happens  that 
starting  from  a  given  proposition,  and  using  only 
the  syllogistic  method  we  reach  a  conclusion  which 
to  lis  is  an  entirely  new  judgment,  and  therefore 
the  argument  is  not  at  any  rate  to  us  a  petitio 
principii.     The  truth  is  that  the  petitio  principii  (as 


THE   VALUE   OF   THE   SYLLOGISM 


o; 


seen  and  argued  by  Martlneau)  is  entirely  relative, 
depending  upon  whether  the  data  forming  the 
major  premiss  are  near  or  too  remote  to  be  readily 
recognised,  or  in  other  words  depending  upon  the 
range  of  knowledge  and  observation  of  the  reasoner. 
This  point  is  obscured  by  the  simplicity  of  the 
examples  commonly  given  in  the  Manuals  to  illus- 
trate the  syllogism.  Compare  Mill's  own  favourite 
example — All  men  are  mortal,  Socrates  is  a  man 
.  * .  Socrates  is  mortal^  with  a  deductive  argument 
expressed  in  the  current  language  of  literature,  for 
instance,  the  following  passage  from  Drummond's 
Natural  Law  in  the  Spiritual  World  (Ed.  1888,  p. 
249).  "  The  part  of  the  oj'ganism  zvhich  begins  to 
get  out  of  correspondence  with  the  Organic  Environ- 
ment is  the  only  part  which  is  in  vital  coj^respond- 
ence  luith  it.  Though  a  fatal  disadvantage  to  the 
natural  man  to  be  thrown  out  of  correspondence 
with  this  Environment,  it  is  of  inestimable  import- 
ance to  the  spiritual  man.  For  so  long  as  it  is 
mai7itained  the  ivay  is  barred  for  a  further 
Evohttion.  And  hence  tJie  co7tdition  necessary  for 
the  further  Evolution  is  that  the  spiritual  be  released 
from  the  natural!'  The  syllogistic  forms  in  this 
argument  are  concealed  by  inversion,  qualification, 
enlargement,  and  suppression  of  terms,  so  that  the 
conclusion  by  no  means  appears  merely  on  inspec- 
tion as  it  does  in  the  unencumbered  text-book  ex- 
amples. It  is,  indeed,  very  rarely  that  we  find  in 
ordinary  intercourse  or  composition  that  simplicity 
of  form  which  the  Manuals  might  lead  us  to  expect, 


136  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

yet  practically  it  is  with  these  forms  of  everyday  life 
that  we  must  be  practically  prepared  to  deal,  and 
it  is  in  these  forms  that  we  best  realise  the  actual 
passage  from  thought  to  thought  involved  in  de- 
duction equally  as  in  induction. 

4.  Yet  another  answer  has  been  given  to  Mill's 
objection.  It  was  formulated  by  Whately,  who 
saw  that  an  inductive  argument  itself  involves 
syllogism,  and  therefore  syllogism  cannot  be 
described  as  only  a  special  mode  of  treating  an 
induction.  In  other  words  deduction  is  a  necessary 
factor  in  induction.  The  reply  is  a  just  one,  for  it 
is  impossible  to  formulate  general  truths  until  we 
have  deduced  from  instances  already  observed  those 
qualities  or  attributes  which  warrant  inclusion  under 
the  general  notion  in  its  course  of  development. 

5.  The  truth  is  that  in  all  reasoning  neither  the 
one  process  nor  the  other  stands  alone.  Modern 
thought  assigns  greater  prominence  to  the  methods 
of  induction  since  its  results  have  reference  to  new 
matter,  whilst  deduction  plays  the  humbler  part 
of  combining  notions  previously  formed.  In 
ordinary  argument,  however,  even  in  a  single  proof, 
we  pass  continually  from  one  process  to  the  other. 
Both  have  their  proper  place,  and  the  utmost  that 
can  be  said  is  that  they  are  interdependent.  In- 
duction is  a  factor  in  all  deduction,  for  our 
premisses  are  inductively  derived.  Deduction  is 
a  factor  in  all  induction,  for  the  principles  induc- 
tively obtained  can  only  deductively  be  applied  to 
particular  cases. 


CHAPTER   XVIII 

SUMMARIES   AND   TABULAR   STATEMENTS 

Logic  is  the  science  of  the  valid  laws  of  thought. 


Science  is  systematised  knowledge :  coherent 
system  depends  upon  logical  method.  Logic  is 
therefore  connected  with  all  the  sciences,  but 
notably  with — 

1.  Metaphysics, 

2.  Psychology, 

3.  Rhetoric, 

4.  Grammar. 


Logic  deals  with  language  as  the  instrument  of 
thought. 

Language — 

1.  assists  the  process  of  thought, 

2.  records  the  products  of  thought, 

3.  is  the  natural  vehicle  for  expressing  thought. 


138  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

Language  is  modified  by — 

1.  Generalisation, 

2.  Specialisation. 

Language  is   sometimes   ambiguous,  and  according 
to  the  meaning  suggested  words  are  classified — 


Words  - 


fUnivocal 
Equivocal  or 

Ambiguous 
Analogous 


in  sound  only, 
in  spelling  only, 
both  in  sound  and 
spelling. 


Thought  is  the   subject-matter  of  Logic  in  rela- 
tion to — 

1.  thought, 

2.  things,  or 

3.  language. 


Validity  is — 

1.  Self-consistency,  or 

2.  Consistency  with  objective  reality  ; 

and  according  to  the  validity  dealt  with,  logic  is — 

1.  Pure  or  Formal,  or 

2.  Applied  or  Material. 


SUMMARIES,    TABULAR   STATEMENTS     139 

There  are  three  points  of  view  relating  to  the 
nature  of  the  concept,  known  as — 

1.  Conceptualism, 

2.  Materialism, 

3.  Nominalism. 

These  points  of  view,  though  primarily  relating 
to  the  nature  of  the  concept,  affect  the  entire  view 
taken  of  the  nature  and  scope  of  logic. 

A  concept  is  the  product  of  comparing  two  per- 
cepts in  order  to  discover  their  points  of  agreement. 

Objectively  it  is  an  attribute,  or  a  group  of 
attributes,  possessed  in  common  by  a  number  of 
individual  objects. 

Subjectively  it  is  an  idea  which  corresponds  with 
the  attribute  or  group  of  attributes. 

In  language  it  is  a  name,  i.  e.  a  word  or  combina- 
tion of  words,  by  which  it  is  denoted  and  expressed. 
Any  sign  whatever  may,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  stand 
as  its  symbol:  its  most  natural  expression,  however, 
is  articulate  speech. 


Three  parts  of  Logic 


'Names  or  Words  as 
"counters   of  thought." 

Propositions  or  Names  as 
terms   in   comparison. 

Inferences  or  Propositions 
as  ground  for  argument. 


I40 


A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 


NAMF^  JCategorematic  =  terms. 

\Syncategorematic  =  not-tcrms. 

Terms  or  categorematic  words  are — 

Univocal  one  meaning : 

Equivocal  double  meaning : 

same  meaning  differently  applied  : 
class  name  ;  all  and  each  ;  distribu- 


Analogous 
General  or^ 
Common/ 
Collective 

Singular  or   ^ 
Individual.) 
Proper 
Concrete 
Abstract 
Positive 
Negative 
Privative 

Contradictory 

Contrary 

Relative 

Correlative 

Absolute 


all,  not  each ;  cuncti  as  opposed  to 
oinnes: 

a  single  object ;  significant : 

a  verbal  mark';  insignificant : 
thing ;  adjectives  are  concrete  : 
attributive : 

existence  or  possession  of  a  quality : 
denial  of  a  quality  : 
absence  of  a  quality  usually  pos- 
sessed : 
area  of  thought  divided  : 
most  opposed  in  the  same  class  : 
suggestive  of  some  other  object : 
the  other  object  suggested  : 
non-relative. 


Heads  of 
predicables 


Genus 

Species 

Differentia 

,.         .  fq-eneric. 

rroi)rium    -\^      .r 
^  (specific. 

A      .  ,  fseparable. 

Accidens     -[ .   '■  ,  , 

[m  separable. 


SUMMARIES,  TABULAR   STATEMENTS     141 

Connotation  comprises  the  qualities  that  give 
meaning  to  a  name : 

Denotation,  all  the  individuals  possessing  these 
qualities. 

Connotation   and    Denotation    vary   in 

OPPOSITE    mutation. 


PROPOSITIO] 

^S 

or     Names    as     Terms    in 

Comparison — 

f  Analytic 

Synthetic 

rCopulative 

fA| 

Exponible]  Remotive 

]7 

I.  Categorical^  j    >  - 

[Exceptive 
Exclusive 

oj 

Indefinite 

Infinite 

Tautologous 

Modal 

^ 

^A 

'Conditional     - 

E 
I 

IT.  Contingent  - 

.0 

Hyp 

othetical  - 

IE 

fA 
III.  Disjunctive-^  y 


Immediate  Inferences- 


I.  Opposition. 
II.  Eduction. 


142  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

EDUCTIONS 

T    r-  •       ftransposition  fsimple. 

I.  Conversion  ^  ^  {^^^  ^    {per  accidens. 

II.  Obversion — change  of  quality. 

III.  Contraposition — obversion  +  conversion. 

IV.  Inversion — subject  negatived. 

The  rule — No  term  must  be  distributed  in  the  con- 
verse which  was  not  distributed  in  the  convertend. 
The  less  important  eductions  are — 

1.  Added  Determinants. 

2.  Complex  Conception. 

3.  Converse  Relation. 

4.  Reversion. 

THE  LAWS  OF  THOUGHT  arc— 

I.  Identity— all  A  is  A. 
II.  Contradiction — no  A  is  not-A. 
III.  Excluded  Middle—all  ^  is  y^  or  not-A. 


INFERENCES  or  Propositions  as  Ground  for 
Argument. 

I.    lMMEDIATEJOPl^°f.'"°" 
Eduction 


TDeduction  o\'(Pitrc 

1 1.  Mediate       ^  Syllogism     fnrgul.rr 
\  Traduction      yMixed 
Induction 


SUMMARIES,    TABULAR   STATEMENTS     143 

SYLLOGISM 

^Categorical 
I.  PURE^  Conditional 
[Hypothetical 


II.  Irregu- 
lar 


'Enthymeme 


^Polysyllogism 


f  Fully  { P rosy llogis 111 
I  sidiiQdyEpisyllogisvi 

I  Cur-    (Epickeirenia 
Ki^iltdySo  rites 


/"Contingent-categorical 


III.  MlXED^' Disjunctive 
[Dilemma 


FALLACIES 


I.  Logical 


(illicit  major   *^ 
l*^  Purely  logical-  illicit  minor  ^ 

\undistitrbed  middle 


.Semi-logical 


II.  Non-Logical  or 
Material 


(equivocation 
I  amphibology 
\  composition 
j  division 

accent 
Kfigitre  of  speech 
^Accident 
Converse  accident 
Ignoratio  Elenchi 
Petitio  principii 
Non  sequitur 
False  cause 
^  Many  questions. 


APPENDIX    I 

EXAMINATION    QUESTIONS 
I.     Logic,  Thought,  and  Language 

1.  Distinguish  between  the  psychological  and  the 
logical  treatment  of  thought,  with  special  reference  to  the 
question  whether  all  our  thinking  is  carried  out  by  con- 
cepts as  the  logician  understands  them. 

2.  What  is  the  central  function  of  thought,  and  how 
are  its  activities  regulated  and  classified  ? 

3.  Why  and  in  what  manner  is  logic  concerned  with 
the  use  of  language?  Distinguish  accurately  between 
the  logical  proposition  and  the  grammatical  sentence, 
giving  examples. 

4.  Define  language ;  and  point  out  the  main  functions 
which  it  performs.  How  is  it  that  spoken  language  has 
become  the  only  universal  one  amongst  mankind  ? 

5.  '■^ No  reason  without  language'' 
^''  No  language  ivithoiit  reason ^ 

Comment  critically  on  these  aphorisms. 

6.  Discuss  the  ways  in  which  the  process  of  thought 
may  be  affected  by  language,  and  bring  out  in  your 
answer  the  requisites  of  a  philosophical  language. 

IL     Definition  and  Scope  of  Logic 

7.  Compare  any  definitions  of  logic  tliat  may  be  known 
to  you,  and  estimate  their  merits. 

8.  ^^  Logic    is    entirely    conversant    about     language.''' 


EXAMINATION    QUESTIONS  145 

(Whately.)     Is  this  a  satisfactory  account  of  the  subject 
matter  of  logic  ? 

9.  What  is  meant  by  saying  that  logic  deals  only  with 
the  form  of  thought  ?  Show  how  the  use  of  symbols 
enables  us  to  examine  the  form  of  our  thought. 

10.  Bring  out  the  exact  scope  of  logic,  defining  its 
relation  to  {a)  the  special  sciences ;  {b)  psychology ;  {c) 
philosophy,  or  theory  of  knowledge. 

11.  How  is  logic  related  to  grammar,  psychology,  and 
metaphysics  ? 

12.  In  what  different  ways  has  the  relation  of  logic  to 
psychology  been  conceived?  Give  your  own  view  of 
the  distinction  and  of  the  connexion  between  them. 

III.     The  Three  Parts  of  Logical  Doctrine 

13.  ''  The  doctrine  of  terj?is  is  really  a  composite  and 
for  the  most  part  extra-logical  body  of  doctrine T  Ex- 
amine this  statement,  and  consider  the  differences  that 
ensue  according  as  this  body  of  doctrine  is  regarded  as 
treating  of  (i)  concepts,  (2)  terms,  or  (3)  classes. 

14.  The  origin  of  concepts.  Give  a  brief  account  of 
the  chief  theories  of  modern  philosophers  on  this 
question. 

15.  Explain  the  point  at  issue  between  Realists, 
Nominalists,  and  Conceptualists. 

IV.     Terms 

16.  State  the  different  ways  in  which  terms  may  be 
classified,  giving  an  illustration  of  each.  Have  all  the 
distinctions  equal  logical  importance  ? 

17.  Give  the  principal  division  of  names  needed  for 
logical  purposes.  Why  does  not  logic  recognise  the 
distinction  between  substantives,  adjectives,  and  verbs  ? 

L 


146  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

1 8.  Discuss  the  meaning  and  the  logical  importance 
of  the  distinction  between  concrete  and  abstract  terms. 
Explain  fully  how  it  happens  that  it  is  sometimes  difficult 
to  say  to  which  of  these  classes  a  particular  term  should 
be  referred. 

19.  Explain  the  distinctions  that  have  been  drawn  by 
logicians  between  (a)  general  and  collective  names,  (l?) 
abstract  and  concrete  terms.  How  far  do  you  think  them 
correct  and  important?  Do  the  distinctions  appear  in 
any  form  in  the  treatment  of  judgments? 

20.  Define  and  illustrate  the  distinctions  {a)  of  con- 
tradictory, contrary,  and  indefinite  terms  ;  (Z*)  of  contra- 
dictory, contrary,  and  indefinite  propositions. 

Has  some  a  contradictory?  If  so,  what  is  the  joint 
extent  of  some  and  not-some  ? 

21.  Is  there  any  distinction  to  be  drawn  between 
singular  and  proper  names  ?  What  views  are  or  may  be 
held  as  to  their  being  mere  unmeaning  marks  in  logic  ? 

22.  Describe  the  logical  characters  of  the  following 
terms — Equal,  Equation,  Equality,  Equalness,  Inequality, 
and  Equalisation. 

V.  Connotation  and  Denotation 

23.  State  the  various  ways  in  which  terms  may  be 
divided,  dwelling  more  in  detail  on  the  distinction 
between  denotation  and  connotation.  Which  of  these 
divisions  of  terms  do  you  regard  as  of  fundamental  sig- 
nificance in  logical  theory  ?     Give  your  reasons. 

24.  What  are  connotative  names  ?  What  are  the 
principal  difficulties  by  which  we  are  beset  in  determining 
the  connotation  of  any  given  name  ? 

25.  Analyse  the  following  terms  in  the  counter  quantities 
or  wholes  of  extension  and  intension — Ala/i,  govenimejit^ 
law,  triangle,  vegetable. 


EXAMINATION   QUESTIONS  147 

26.  Argue  at  length  the  question  whether  {a)  Proper 
names,  {b)  Abstract  names  have  a  connotation. 

27.  State,  in  carefully  chosen  language,  the  logical  law 
of  the  relation  between  extension  and  intension  of  con- 
cepts, giving  illustrative  examples.  How  do  you  reconcile 
with  it  the  fact  {a)  that  there  are  as  many  mortal  men 
as  there  are  men,  {b)  that  the  notion  trilateral  triangle 
imports  nothing  more  than  triangle? 

28.  Define  a  term;  and  explain  what  is  meant  by  the 
denotation  and  connotation  of  terms. 

Discuss  the  following — "  T/iei'e  is  7iothi?ig  ifi  the  import 
of  a  proposition  of  which  the  terms  a7'e  abstract,  but  what 
there  is  in  some  proposition  which  can  be  framed  of 
concrete  terms. 

VI.     Propositions 

29.  Exemplify  conditional  propositions.  How  are  such 
propositions  reduced  and  converted  ? 

30.  Discuss  the  relation  of  the  disjunctive  proposition 
to  {a)  the  hypothetical,  {b)  the  categorical. 

31.  Distinguish  between  ampliative  and  explicative 
propositions  and  give  several  examples  of  each  kind. 

32.  What  is  an  essential  proposition?  and  in  what 
cases  is  it  difficult  to  draw  the  line  between  essential  and 
real  propositions  ? 

ZZ'  (^)  Unfold  as  completely  as  possible  the  implica- 
tions of  the  proposition,  "  None  can  be  happy  without 
virtue,^'  naming  in  each  case  the  process  used. 

{b)  Given  the  proposition,  "  Whatever  is  either  B  or  C 
and  at  the  same  time  either  D  or  E,  is  A''  What  can 
be  asserted  respecting  not-A  ? 

VII.     Predicables  and  Predicaments 

34.  Give  an  account  of  the  predicables.  In  what  part 
of  logic  are  they  properly  placed  ? 


148  A   DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 

35.  Distinguish  a  genus  and  a  type. 

36.  Give  some  account  of  the  predicables.  How  may 
they  be  adjusted  to  modern  thought  ? 

37.  Mention  the  various  heads  of  predicables,  and 
explain  their  connexion  with  definition.  Give  in- 
stances of  definitions,  pointing  out  what  are  the  genus 
and  differentia  in  each  case.  In  what  cases  may  it  be 
impossible  to  define  a  term  ? 

38.  Distinguish  between  verbal  and  real  predication, 
and  show  how  the  five  predicables  bring  out  the  distinc- 
tion. 

39.  Explain  what  you  understand  by  a  category,  and 
discuss  some  scheme  of  categories  known  to  you. 

VIII.     Definition  and  Division 

40.  What  is  definition  and  of  how  many  kinds  does  it 
consist?  How  would  you  proceed  in  order  to  define 
such  a  term  as  virtue  ?  How  far  does  definition  in 
all  cases  imply  a  reference  to  the  things  denoted  by  the 
terms  ? 

41.  State  the  currently  accepted  rules  of  logical  defini- 
tion. Examine  their  worth  and  discuss  the  view  that  all 
definitions  are  of  names  only. 

42.  Compare  the  following  notions  with  respect  to  their 
definability — Iro7i,  Steel,  Murder-,  Red,  Grey.  How  would 
you  proceed  to  give  a  definition  of  {a)  Iron,  (/>)  Alurder? 

43.  Discuss  the  requirements  of  definition  as  applied 
to  scientific  terms.  How  far  do  the  rules  of  formal 
definition  carry  us  in  this  case  ? 

44.  Explain  clearly  with  examples  how  definition  and 
division  are  related  to  each  other. 

45.  What  is  meant  by  saying — Divisio  ?wn  faciat 
saltuml  How  are  you  to  know  that  a  saltus  has  not 
been  made? 


EXAMINx\TION   QUESTIONS  149 

Draw  up  a  logical  scheme  of  divisions  so  as  to  indicate 
the  places  of  the  following — AB,  Abe,  ahcD,  aBC^ 
abCD ;  a,  b,  r,  d,  representing  privative  terms. 

IX.     Import  of   Categoricals — Quantification   of 
THE  Predicate 

46.  What  is  predication  ?  Does  it  ever  involve  exist- 
ence, or  must  existence  be  always  specially  predicated  ? 

47.  Assign  precisely  the  meaning  of  the  assertion  that 
it  is  false  to  say  that  sotfie  English  soldiers  did  fiof  behave 
discreditably  in  South  Africa. 

48.  How  does  the  quality  of  a  proposition  affect  its 
quantity  ?     Is  the  relation  a  necessary  one  ? 

49.  Explain  and  discuss  the  following  : — 

{a)  In  a  judgment  the  subject  is  naturally  interpreted 
in  denotation  and  the  predicate  in  connotation. 

{b)  Every  proposition  is  an  assertion  that  two  names 
are  or  are  not  applicable  to  one  and  the  same  object. 

50.  On  what  grounds  has  the  quantification  of  the  pre- 
dicate been  maintained?  Estimate  these  grounds  critically. 

51.  Set  forth  the  doctrine  of  the  quantified  predicate, 
and  estimate  the  claims  made  for  it.  How  far  do  you 
find  that  it  maintains  or  departs  from  the  traditional 
meaning  of  some  in  logic  ? 

52.  Is  logic  bound  by  the  ordinary  usages  of  language? 
Discuss  the  question  in  connexion  with  the  following 
topics — {a)  The  quantification  of  the  predicate,  {b)  the 
proper  logical  interpretation  of  the  form  Some  S  is  P. 

53.  Bring  out  clearly  the  grounds  of  difference  of  view 
between  Hamilton  and  Mill  in  regard  to  quantification 
of  the  predicate. 

X.     Diagrammatic  Representation 

54.  Give   a  concise   account  of  any  schemes  of  dia- 


ISO  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

grammatic   representation    of   propositions   and   discuss 
their  value. 

55.  What  are  the  possible  distinct  forms  of  syllogism 
that  can  be  illustrated  by  Eulerian  diagrams  ?  Discuss 
the  propriety  of  this  mode  of  representing  propositions 
and  syllogisms. 

XL     Immediate  Inferences 

56.  Give  the  contradictory,  the  obverse,  the  converse, 
and  the  contrapositive  of  the  following  : — 

(n)  Private  vices  are  public  benefits. 

(b)  Not  to  kiioiu  me  argues  thyself  unknoicm. 

(c)  Beauty  aiid  use  are  identical, 
{d)  No  mail  is  always  cojisistent. 

57.  ^'' Previsio7i  is  a  test  of  true  theory .^'' 
'•''Prevision  is  the  test  of  t^'ue  tJieory.^' 

Describe  the  forms  of  proposition  to  which  the  above 
belong  and  give  their  converses,  contradictories,  and 
obverses. 

58.  Assuming  that  no  organic  beings  are  devoid  of 
carbon,  what  can  we  thence  infer  respectively  about 
beings  which  are  not  organic  and  things  which  are  not 
devoid  of  carbon  ? 

59.  Prove  the  rules  of  obversion,  conversion,  and  con- 
traposition by  reference  to  the  laws  of  tliought ;  or  show 
what  other  proof  you  would  give  of  them. 

Convert  and  contraposit  the  proposition — For  evefj 
wrong  there  is  a  legal  remedy. 

60.  State  and  illustrate  what  you  understand  by 
obversion.  On  what  laws  or  axioms  docs  the  validity  of 
this  process  depend  ? 

61.  What  is  meant  by  obversion,  formal  and  material  ? 
How  is  obversion  related  to  conversion  by  negation  or 
contraposition  ? 


EXAMINATION   QUESTIONS  151 

Give  the  obverse  and  contrapositive  of  the  following 
propositions  : — 

{a)  All  animals  feed, 
ip)  No  pla7tts  feed, 
(c)  Only  a^iimals  feed. 

62.  What  do  you  consider  to  be  the  real  distinction 
between  a  categorical  and  a  hypothetical  proposition  ? 
Are  the  processes  of  immediate  inference  applicable  to 
hypothetical  propositions  ? 

63.  From  all  Sis  P\y['^dX  can  you  infer  concerning  not-S 
and  7iot-P  ?  Show  how  you  justify  any  inference  you  make. 

Illustrate  by  concrete  examples  what  is  called  im- 
mediate inference  by  added  determinants.  If  A  =  B 
and  Z  =  M,  A  +  Z  =  B  +  M.  Is  such  a  theorem 
logically  valid  either  extensively  or  intensively  ? 

64.  Can  all  kinds  of  propositions  be  exhibited  in  the 
intensive  as  well  as  the  extensive  form  ?  Give  reasons  in 
support  of  your  answer.  In  the  event  of  its  being  in  the 
negative,  draw  up  a  Hst  distinguishing  between  those 
kinds  of  propositions  which  can  and  those  which  cannot 
be  so  exhibited. 

XII.     The  Laws  of  Thought 

65.  Bring  out  the  meaning  and  estimate  the  logical 
value  of  the  three  laws  of  thought. 

66.  Enunciate,  in  the  form  that  seems  to  you  most 
suitable  from  the  point  of  view  of  logical  theory,  the 
primary  laws  or  axioms  of  thought,  and  discuss  their 
relation  to  the  processes  of  reasoning. 

67.  State  and  explain  the  three  formal  laws  of  thought 
and  discuss  their  connexion  (a)  with  immediate  and  -{d) 
with  mediate  inference. 

In  what  sense  are  these  laws  called  necessary  ?  How 
do  you  reconcile  their  necessity  with  the  existence  of 
fallacies  ? 


152  A    DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

68.  What  is  a  law  of  thought  ?  State  the  three  primary 
laws  of  thought.  Have  they  a  real  importance  in  logic  ? 
or  are  they  "  absurdly  obvious  "  ? 

69.  Explain  how  the  universal  laws  of  thought  give 
rise  to  dichotomous  or  bifid  classification. 

70.  Explain  the  relation  between  the  universal  laws  of 
thought,  the  canons  of  syllogism,  the  dictum  de  omni  et 
nullo,  and  any  other  forms  of  the  fundamental  axioms  of 
inference  that  occur  to  you. 

XIII.     The  Syllogism 

71.  Explain  the  syllogistic  rule  respecting  two  negative 
and  two  particular  premisses,  pointing  out  the  grounds 
on  which  they  rest.  Do  the  following  break  either  of 
these  rules  ? 

{a)  This  person  is  very  learned  and  also  very  sociable^ 
consequently  some  very  sociable  persons  are  very  learned. 

(b)  No  man  is  a  proper  object  of  contempt,  at  the  same 
time  no  mail  is  perfectly  admirable,  cofisequently  some 
bei?igs  who  are  7iot  perfectly  admirable  are  not  proper 
objects  of  co7itempt. 

if)  The  majority  of  English  people  have  but  little 
literary  taste,  and  the  majority  of  English  people  read, 
fro?n  which  it  follows  that  some  who  read  have  but  little 
literary  taste. 

72.  Give  a  clear  and  precise  explanation  of  the  rule 
concerning  the  middle  term  of  a  syllogism. 

73.  If  the  major  term  of  a  syllogism  be  the  predicate 
of  the  major  premiss,  what  do  we  know  about  the  minor 
premiss  ? 

74.  ((?)  Deduce  from  the  general  principles  of  tlie 
categorical  syllogism  tJie  special  rules  of  the  second 
figure. 

{I))  What   can   be   determined   respecting  a  syllogism 


EXAMINATION    QUESTIONS  153 

under  each  of  the  following  conditions? — (i)  that  only 
one  term  is  distributed,  and  that  only  once,  (2)  that  only 
one  term  is  distributed,  and  that  twice,  (3)  that  two  terms 
only  are  distributed,  each  only  once,  (4)  that  two  terms 
only  are  distributed,  each  twice. 

75.  Invent  a  syllogism  in  Barbara,  and  state  it  both  in 
the  extensive  and  intensive  form. 


XIV.     Figure  and  Mood  of  the  Syllogism. 
Reduction 

76.  Ascertain  how  many  universal  terms  there  may  be 
in  the  premisses  of  a  syllogism  more  than  in  the  con- 
clusion. 

77.  How  much  can  you  tell  about  a  syllogism  when 
you  know,  (i)  that  only  the  middle  term  is  distributed, 
(2)  that  all  the  terms  are  distributed  ? 

Show  directly^  i.  e.  using  only  the  general  rules  of 
syllogism  and  the  forms  of  immediate  inference,  in  how 
many  ways  an  E  conclusion  may  be  drawn. 

78.  Show  by  deduction  from  the  rules  of  the  syllogism 
that  there  are  five  and  only  five  ways  of  proving  a 
universal  conclusion. 

79.  Write  down  the  dictum  de  omni  et  nuUo.  What 
is  the  connexion  of  this  dictum  with  the  process  of  re- 
duction ?     Is  reduction  of  any  practical  use  ? 

80.  Taking  a  syllogism  of  the  third  figure,  and  assum- 
ing one  of  the  premisses  to  be  false,  show  whether  or 
not,  with  the  knowledge  of  its  falsehood  thus  supposed 
to  be  in  our  possession,  we  can  frame  a  new  syllogism ; 
if  so  point  out  the  figure  and  mood  to  which  it  will  belong. 

81.  Explain  fully  the  limitations  of  the  conclusions 
obtainable  in  the  third  figure  of  the  syllogism.  Are 
these  limitations  got  rid  of  by  ob version  (permutation)  of 
the  premisses  ? 


154  A   DIGEST   OF   LOGIC 

82.  State  briefly  the  various  opinions  that  have  been 
held  by  logicians  regarding  figure,  and  in  particular 
discuss  the  reasons  for  and  against  the  admission  of  the 
fourth  figure. 

83.  What  is  a  subaltern  mood,  and  why  is  it  so  called  ? 
In  what  figures  do  AA  and  AE  yield  subaltern  moods  at 
all  ?  Show  why.  In  what  cases,  if  any,  is  it  impossible 
to  weaken  one  of  the  premisses  in  a  subaltern  mood  with- 
out affecting  the  conclusion  ? 

84.  Using  any  of  the  forms  of  immediate  inference 
(including  obversion),  show  in  how  many  moods  the 
following  argument  can  be  expressed — Every  law  is  not 
bindings  for  some  laws  are  morally  bad,  and  nolJiing  which 
is  so  is  bindifig. 

XV.     Irregular  and  Compound  Syllogism 

85.  Give  instances  of  the  various  forms  of  conditional 
arguments. 

86.  Does  the  mode  of  reasoning  in  a  hypothetical 
syllogism  differ  from  ordinary  deduction  ? 

87.  Show  that  the  reasoning  in  a  sorites  is  strictly 
syllogistic. 

88.  What  is  a  dilemma  ?  Can  it  take  more  than  one 
form? 

89.  Define  the  dilemma.  What  are  its  various  forms  ? 
On  what  does  its  validity  depend  ? 

90.  What  is  dilemma  and  why  is  it  a  treacherous  form 
of  argument  ? 

XVI.     Fallacies 

91.  State  and  compare  the  most  important  methods  of 
classifying  the  fallacies  known  to  you. 

92.  Explain  the  following  fallacies,  giving  an  example 


EXAMINATION   QUESTIONS  155 

of  each — ignoratio  elenchi^  non  causa  pro  causa,  a  dicta 
secundum  quid,  amphibology ,  false  a?ialogy,  malobserv- 
ation. 

93.  On  what  ground  would  you  base  a  classification  of 
fallacies  ?  Compare  critically  various  classifications  that 
have  been  proposed.  Explain  exactly  the  nature  of  the 
fallacies  called — Accident,  Non  causa  pro  causa,  Argu- 
mentum  ad  hoi7iine7n.  How  far  do  the  rules  of  formal 
logic  suffice  for  their  detection  ? 

94.  Mention  any  arrangements  or  classifications  of 
fallacies  commenting  on  the  principle  of  classification 
involved.     Explain  and  exemplify  the  following  : — 

A  dicto  sif?tpliciter  ad  dictum  secundum  quid,  ig?wratio 
elenchi,  non  causa  pro  causa,  and  petitio  principii. 

95.  Point  out  the  exact  nature  of  the  fallacies  called 
severally — Composition  and  division,  A  dicto  secundujn 
quid  ad  dictum  sinpiiciter,  Post  hoc  trgo  propter  hoc. 
False  analogy. 

XVII.     The  Value  of  the  Syllogism 

96.  Define  induction,  and  state  with  reasons  your  view 
of  its  relation  to  syllogism. 

97.  What  is  Mill's  view  of  the  function  and  value  of 
the  syllogism  ?     How  has  it  been  criticised  ? 

98.  Discuss  tlie  value  and  function  of  the  syllogism. 

99.  How  does  it  come  to  pass  that  there  can  be  any 
dispute  as  to  whether  the  syllogism  is  a  petitio  principii  ? 

100.  It  is  maintained,  on  the  one  hand,  that  no  in- 
ference is  valid  in  which  the  conclusion  is  not  contained 
in  the  premisses,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  that  no  move- 
ment of  thought  deserves  to  be  entitled  inference  in 
which  there  is  not  progress  from  the  known  to  the 
unknown.  Examine  the  grounds  for  these  two  state- 
ments, and  discuss  the  possibility  of  holding  them  jointly. 


156 


APPENDIX    II 


Abbott,  T.  K.  ... 
Adamson,  R.    ... 

Aldrich 

Aristotle 


Arnaud  and  Nicole  ... 

Bacon,  Sir  Francis  ... 

Bagot,  Daniel,  Dean 

Bain,  Alex 

Baker,  A 

Balfour,  Rt.  Hon.  A.  J. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

,..     Elements  of  Logic.     Dublin,  1885. 

...     Art.  "  Logic"  in  Ejicyclo.  Brit.^  ed. 

ix.     Published  separately. 

...     See  Mansel. 

...     Logical  woi'ks  comprised  under  the 

title    Organon.      They    are    as 

follows  : — 

Kategoriai  (Predicamenta). 

Peri  Hermeneias  (De  Interpre- 

tatione). 

Analytica  Priora       -^  ,      ,  ,. 

/  .      ^  .         -Analytics. 

Analytica  PosterioraJ 

Topika  (Dialectics). 

Peri  Sophisticon  Elenchthon. 
...     La   Logique,   ou    Fart    de    Penser. 
Paris,    1662.      See   Baynes,    Port 
Royal  Logic. 

...     De   Argumentis    Scientiarum,   libri 

ix.     1623. 
Novum  Organon.    October  1620. 
Explanatory  Notes  on  the  Principal 

Chapters      of      Murray's     Logic. 

Dublin,    1826. 
Deductive  Logic.     Longmans,  1879. 
Inductive  Logic.    Longmans,  1879. 
Outlines  of  Logic,  Psychology,  and 

Ethics.     Lond.,  1891. 
Philosophic  Doubt.     Lond.,  1879. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


157 


Banett,  T.  S 

Baynes,  Thos,  Spencer 

)?  55  ?? 

Bentham,  Geo. 
Boole,  Geo 

J)  55 

Bosanquet,  B 


Bowen,  Francis 

Bradley,  F.  H. 
Calderwood,  Hy. 

Chase,  D.  P.    ... 
Clarke,  R.  F.    .. 

Coleman 
Davis,  N.  K.    ... 


Devey,  Joseph 

Drummond,  P.  C.     ... 

Examination       Ques- 
tions and  Papers  ... 


Logic  and  Metaphysics.    Lond.,  1875. 
Port  Royal  Logic.     Lond.,  1872. 
New    Analytic    of    Logical    Form. 

Edin.,  1850. 
Outline  of  a  new  system  of  Logic. 

Lond.,  1827. 
Pure  Logic.     Lond.,  1864. 
Mathematical    Analysis    of    Logic. 

Lond.,  1847. 
Investigation     of     the     Laws     of 

Thought.     Lond.,  1854. 
Logic,  or  the  Morphology  of  Know- 
ledge, 2  vols.     Oxf,  1888. 
Lotze's     Logic,    Translation.    Clar. 

Press,  Oxf,  1889. 
Essentials  of  Logic.     Lond.,  1895. 
Treatise  on  Logic,  or  the  Laws  of 

Pure  Thought.  Camb.  U.S.A.  and 

Triibner,  1866. 
Principles  of  Logic.     Lond.,  1883. 

Fleming's  Vocabulary  of  Philosophy. 
Griffen,  Lond.,  1887. 

A  First  Book  of  Logic.     Oxf,  1879. 

Logic.  Manuals  of  Catholic  Philo- 
sophy.    Lond.,  1889. 

Notes  on  Logic.     Oxf,  1880. 

Theory     of    Thought,     Deduction. 

New   York,   1880. 
Syllabus  of  a  proposed  System    of 

Logic.     Lond.,  i860. 
Art.  "  Logic,''  Engl.  Cyclo. 
Formal  Logic.     Lond.,  1847. 
A  Bundle  of  Paradoxes. 
Logic,  or  the  Science  of  Inference. 

Bohn's  Library,  Bell,  1852. 
A  First  Logic  Book.     Oxf,  1875. 

Sec  Questions. 


158  A    DIGEST    OF   LOGIC 

Fitzgerald,  P.  F. 
Fowler,  Thos,  ... 


Gilbert,  J.  W 

Gilmore,  J.  H. 

Hamilton,  Sir  W. 

55  55 

Harris,  W.  T 

Hegel      

Hill,  D.J 

Hughlings,  J.  P. 

Jevons,  Wm.  Stanley 


Jones,  Miss  E.  E.  C. 
Kant,  1 


Treatise  on  the  Principle  of  Suffi- 
cient Reason.     Lond.,  1887. 

Deductive  Logic.  Clar.  Press,  Oxf., 
1870.     Last  ed.,  1895. 

Inductive  Logic.  Clar.  Press,  Oxf., 
1870.     Last  ed.,  1895. 

Logic  for  the  Million.     Lond.,  1851. 
Outlines  of  Logic.    New  York,  1879. 

Lectures  on  Logic,  2  vols.     Lond. 

Exam,  of  Sir  W.  Hamilton's  Philos. 
See  Mill. 

Hegel's  Logic.  A  critical  exposi- 
tion.    Chicago,  1890. 

Logic  translated  by  Wallace,  2  \'ols. 
Oxf.,  1892-94. 

Jevons'  Logic  recast.  New  York, 
1883.   _ 

The  Logic  of  Names  :  an  Introd.  to 
Boole.     Lond.,  1869. 


Elementary  Lessons  in  Logic.    Mac- 

millan,  1886. 
Studies  in  Deductive  Logic.     Mac- 

millan,  1880. 
Principles  of  Science.     Macmillan, 

1877. 
Substitution  of  Similars.   I\Lacmillan, 

1869. 
Pure     Logic,    z.  e.    The     Logic    of 

Quality.     1864. 
The  Philos.  of  Induction.    Contemp. 

Rev.,  vol.  xiv.,  p.  457. 
The   use   of  Hypothesis.     //vV/.,   p. 

778. 
Elements  of  Logic.     Edin.,  1890. 

Introd.  to  Logic.  Translated.   Lond., 
1885. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


159 


Keynes,  J.  N Studies   and    Exercises   in    Formal 

Logic.     Macmillan,  1894. 


Ladd,  Miss  Christine 
Lambert,  Joliann  H. 
Latham,  R.  G. 

Liard,  L.  

Lotze       , 


Studies  in  Logic.     Lond,,  1883. 
Neues  Organon.     Leipzig,  1764. 
Logic  in  its  application  to  Language. 

Lond.,  1856. 
Les  logiciens  anglais  contemporains. 

Paris,  1878. 
Logic     translated     by     Bosanquet, 

2  vols.     Clar.  Press,  Oxf.,  1888. 


Mansel,  H.  L. 


Aldrich's  Artis  Logicae  Rudimenta. 


Martineau,  Jas. 
M'Cosh,  Jas.    ... 
Mill,  John  Stuart 


Prolegomena  Logicae.     Oxf.,  i860. 

Theory  of  Reasoning,  Essays  Philos., 
etc.,  vol.  ii.,  1869. 

Laws  of  Discursive  Thought.    Lond., 
1870. 

System  of  Logic,  i  vol.  ed.     Long- 
mans, Lond.,  1884. 

Analysis  of  the  above  by  Killick,  q.v. 
„  „  „         Stebbing,  ^.-6/. 

Exam,  of  Sir  W.  Hamilton's  Philos. 
Longmans,  1865. 

Elementary  Notions  of  Logic.  Lond., 
1884. 
Miiid^  A  Quarterly  Magazine,  Arts,  by  various  authors. 


Minto,  Wm. 


Murray,  Richard 


Mussehenbroek,       P. 


Logic,    Inductive    and    Deductive. 

Murray,  1893. 
Introd.    to    Logic.      Dublin    Univ. 

Press  Series.     Dub.,  1890, 
Compendium  of  Logic.     Lond.  and 

Dub.,  1847. 
Explanatory    Notes    on,   by    Dean 

Bagot,  q.v. 
Commentary  on  by  J.  Walker,  q.v. 

Institutiones  Logicae.     1748. 


;6o 


A    DIGEST   OF    LOGIC 


Newman,  F.  W.        ...     Lectures  on  Logic.     Lond.,  1838. 
Nicole  et  Arnaud      ...     See  Baynes,  Port  Royal  Logic. 

Oxford  Handbook  of  Logic.     Oxf.,  1880. 

Pcirce,  C.  S Proceedings      of      the      American 

Academy  of  Arts  and   Sciences, 
on  Intension  and  Intensive  reading 
of  Propositions,  vol.  iii.,  pp.  4i5— 
432,  1867. 
„         „  Studies  in  Logic.     Boston,  1883. 

Questions,  Examination  Papers,  etc. — 

Palaestra  Oxoniensis:  Questions  and 
Exercises.     Oxf.,  1875. 

Jevons,  W.  S.,  Studies  in  Deductive 
Logic.     Macmillan,  1880. 

Advanced  Logical  Questions.  Simp- 
kin,  Lond.,  1 88 1. 

Holman,  Questions  on  Welton's 
Logic.     Clive,  Lond.,  1893. 

B.A.  Mental  and  Moral  Science 
Papers.     Clive,  Lond.,  1889. 

Weatherly,  F.  E.,  Questions  in 
Logic.     Oxf,  18S3. 


Ray,  P.  K 

Read,  Carvcth 
Robertson,  Croom    ... 
Royce,  J.  

Ryland,  F 

Sheldon 

Siduwick,  A 


Si^jwart,  C. 


Text    Book    of    Deductive    Logic. 

Macmillan,  1886. 
Theory  of  Logic.     Lond.,  1878. 
Articles  in  Mi?id,  various  dates. 
Primer  of   Logical   Analysis.     San 

Francisco,  1881. 
Logic.      An    introductory    manual. 

Bell,  Lond.,  1896. 

Elements  of  Logic.     Lond.,  1864. 
The  Process  of  Argument.     Lond., 

1893- 
Fallacies.      International    scientific 

series,  vol.  xlviii.     Lond.,  1883. 
Logic,    2    vols.,    translated    by    H. 

Dendy.     Lond.,  1895. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


i6i 


Solly        

Spalding 

Stebbing,  W 

Stewart,  D 

Stock,  St.  G 

Thomson  W .,  Archbp . 
Trendelenburg,  F.  A. 


Ueberweg        

Veitch,  J. 

Venn,  John      

Walker,  J 

Wallace 

W^allis     

W^atts,  Isaac    

Weatherly,  F.  E .      ... 

53  51 

Welton,  J 

Whately,  Richd.,  Abp. 

55  55  55 

Whewell 


Syllabus  of  Logic. 

Art.  "  Logic"  in  the  Encyclo.  Brit. 

ed.  viii. 
Analysis  of  J.   S.   Mill's  System  of 

Logic.     Lond.,  1864. 
Handbk.  of  Ded.  Logic.  Edin.,  1885. 
Deductive  Logic.     Lond.,  1888. 

Outline   of  the    Laws   of  Thought. 

Lond.,  1882. 
Elementa  Logices  Aristotele^.  1852. 
Outlines     of    Logic.      The     above 

translated.     Lond.,  1881. 

System  of  Logic  translated  by  Lind- 
say. 

Institutes  of  Logic.     Edin.,  1885. 
Symbolic  Logic.     Lond.,  1881. 
The  Logic  of  Chance.     Lond.,  1881. 

Commentary     on     Murray's    Com- 
pendium.    Lond.  and  Dub.,  1852. 
Hegel's    Logic  translated.      Lond., 

1874. 
Institutio  Logicae.     1684. 
Logic,  or  the  right  use  of  reason. 

Lond.,  1811. 
Rudiments  of  Logic.     Oxf.,  1879. 
Logic  Tables.     Oxf.,  1879. 
Questions  in  Logic.     Oxf.,  1883. 
A  Manual  of  Logic,  2  vols.     Clive, 

Lond.,  1 89 1. 
Lessons  in  Reasoning. 
Elements  of  Logic.     Longmans,  ed. 

ix.,  1865. 
On   the    Philosophy   of  Discovery. 

1841. 
History  of  the  Inductive  Sciences. 

1840. 

M 


Richard  Clay  &  Sons,  Limited, 
London  &  Bungay. 


A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

AND    ANNOUNCEMENTS    OF 

METHUEN    AND    COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS  :  LONDON 

36  ESSEX  STREET 

W.C. 


CONTENTS 

FORTHCOMING  BOOKS, 

PAGI 

2 

POETRY,                  ..... 

lO 

BELLES    LETTRES,             .... 

II 

ILLUSTRATED  BOOKS,    .... 

13 

HISTORY,    ...... 

14 

BIOGRAPHY,          ...... 

16 

TRAVEL,  ADVENTURE  AND  TOPOGRAPHVj 

x8 

GEJ^ERAL  LITERATURE, 

19 

SCIENCE,                 ..... 

21 

PHILOSOPHY,        ..... 

22 

THEOLOGY,            ...... 

22 

LEADERS  OF  RELIGION, 

24 

FICTION,                  .                .           •    . 

25 

BOOKS  FOR  EOYS  AND  GIRLS,      . 

34 

THE  PEACOCK  LIBRARY, 

35 

UNIVERSITY   EXTENSION   SERIES, 

35 

SOCIAL  QUESTIONS  OF  TO-DAY, 

36 

CLASSICAL  TRANSLATIONS, 

37 

EDUCATIONAL  BOOKS,                   .               .^ 

38 

SEPTEMBER    1897 


September  1S97. 

Messrs.     M  et  h  u  e  n  '  s 

ANNOUNCEMENTS 


Poetry 

SHAKESPEARE'S  POEMS.     Edited,  with  an  Introduction  and 

Notes,  by  George  Wyndham,  M. P.     Crown  Zvo.     Buckram.     65-. 
This  is  a  volume  of  the  sonnets  and  lesser  poems  of  Shakespeare,  and  is  prefaced 
with  an  elaborate  Introduction  by  Mr.  Wyndham 

ENGLISH  LYRICS.  Selected  and  Edited  by  W.  E.  Henley. 
Crown  2>vo.     Bnckraui.     ()s. 

Also  15  copies  on  Japanese  paper.     Demy  ^vo.     £2,  2s.  net. 
Few  announcements  will  be  more  welcome  to  lovers  of  Ens;lish  verse  than  the  one 
that  Mr.   Henley  is  bringing  together  into'  one   book   the   finest   lyrics  in    our 
language. 

NURSERY  RHYMES.  With  many  Coloured  Pictures.  By 
F.  D.  Bedford.     Small  ^to.     6s. 

This  book  has  many  beautiful  designs  in  colour  to  illustrate  the  old  rhj'mes. 

THE  ODYSSEY  OF  HOMER.  A  Translation  by  J.  G. 
Cordery.      Crown  %vo.      \os.  6d. 

Travel  and  Adventure 

BRITISH  CENTRAL  AFRICA.  By  Sir  II.  H.  Johnston, 
K.C.B.  "With  nearly  Two  Hundred  Illustrations,  and  Six  Maps. 
Croivn  ^io.    30 j.  net. 

Contents.— (i)  The  History  of  Nyasaland  and  British  Central  Africa  generally. 
(■2)  A  detailed  description  of  the  races  and  Kingu.iges  of  British  Central  Africa. 
(3)  Chapters  on  the  European  settlers  and  missionaries ;  the  Fauna,  the  Flora, 
minerals,  and  scenery.     (4)  A  chapter  on  the  prospects  of  the  country. 

WITH  THE   GREEKS    IN  THESSALY.     By  W.  Kinnaird 

Rose,  Reuter's  Correspondent.      \Vilh   Plans  and  23  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo.     6s. 
A  history  of  the  operations  in  Thessaly  by  one  whose  brilliant  despatches  from  the 
seat  of  war  attracted  universal  attention. 

THE  MASSACRE  IN  BENIN.  By  Captain  Boisragon. 
With  Maps,  etc.  Crown  Zt'o.  y.  6.1. 
This  volume  is  written  by  one  of  the  two  survivors  who  escaped  the  terrible 
massacre  in  Benin  at  the  beginning  of  tin's  year.  The  author  relates  in  detail  his 
adventures  and  his  extraorclinary  escape,  and  adds  a  description  of  the  country 
;uid  of  the  events  which  led  up  to  the  outt>rcak. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements         3 

FROM  TONKIN  TO  INDIA.  By  Prince  Henri  of 
Orleans.  Translated  by  Hamley  Bent,  ]\I.A.  With  80  Illus- 
trations and  6  Maps.      Crown  d^to.     2^s. 

The  travels  of  Prince  Henri  in  1895  from  China  to  the  valley  of  the  Bramaputra 
covered  a  distance  of  2100  miles,  of  whith  1600  was  through  absolutely  unexplored 
country.  No  fewer  than  seventeen  ranges  of  mountains  were  crossed  at  altitudes 
of  from  11,000  to  13,000  feet.  The  journey  was  made  memorable  by  the  discovery 
of  the  sources  of  the  Irrawaddy.  To  the  physical  difficulties  of  the  journey  were 
added  dangers  from  the  attacks  of  savage  tribes.  The  book  deals  with  many  of 
the  burning  political  problems  of  the  East,  and  it  will  be  found  a  most  important 
contribution  to  the  literature  of  adventure  and  discovery. 


THREE  YEARS  IN  SAVAGE  AFRICA.  By  Lionel  Decle, 
\Yith  an  Introduction  by  H.  M.  Stanley,  M.P.  With  100  Illus- 
trations and  5  Maps.     Demy^vo.     2\s. 

Few  Europeans  have  had  the  same  opportunity  of  studying  the  barbarous  parts  of 
Africa  as  Mr.  Decle.  Starting  from  the  Cape,  he  visited  in  succession  Bechuana- 
land,  the  Zambesi,  jMatabeleland  and  Rlashonaland,  the  Portuguese  settlement  on 
the  Zambesi,  Nyasaland,  Ujiji,  the  headquarters  of  the  Arabs,  German  East 
Africa,  Uganda  (where  he  saw  fighting  in  company  with  the  late  Major  '  Roddy' 
Owen),  and  British  East  Africa.  In  his  book  he  relates  his  experiences,  his 
minute  observations  of  native  habits  and  customs,  and  his  views  as  to  the  work 
done  in  Africa  by  the  various  European  Governments,  whose  operations  he  was 
able  to  study.  The  whole  journey  extended  over  7000  miles,  and  occupied 
exactly  three  years. 


WITH  THE  MOUNTED  INFANTRY  IN  MASHONA- 
LAND.  By  Lieut. -Colonel  Alderson.  With  numerous  Illustra- 
tions and  Plans.     Demy  8?v.     12s.  6d. 

This  is  an  account  of  the  militarj?'  operations  in  Rlashonaland  by  the  officer  who 
commanded  the  troops  in  that  district  during  the  late  rebellion.  Besides  its 
Interest  as  a  story  of  vv-arfare.  It  will  have  a  peculiar  value  as  an  account  of  the 
services  of  mounted  infantry  by  one  of  the  chief  authorities  on  the  subject. 


THE  HILL  OF  THE  GRACES :  OR,  THE  GREAT  Stone 
Temples  of  Tripoli.  By  H.  S.  Cowper,  F.S.A.  With  Maps, 
Plans,  and  75  Illustrations.     Demy  Zvo.      10s.  6d, 

A  record  of  two  journeys  through  Tripoli  in  1895  and  1896.  The  book  treats  of  a 
remarkable  series  of  megalithic  temples  which  have  hitherto  been  uninvestigated, 
and  contains  a  large  amount  of  new  geographical  and  archaeological  matter. 


ADVENTURE  AND  EXPLORATION  IN  AFRICA.  By 
Captain  A.  St.  H.  Gibbons,  F.R.G.S.  With  Illustrations  by 
C.  Whymper,  and  Maps.     Demy  8z>o.     21s. 

This  is  an  account  of  travel  and  adventure  among  the  ]\Iarotse  and  contiguous  tribes, 
with  a  description  of  their  customs,  characteristics,  and  history,  together  with  the 
author's  experiences  in  hunting  big  game.  The  Illustrations  are  by  Mr.  Charles 
Whymper,  and  from  photographs.  There  is  a  map  by  the  author  of  the  hitherto 
unexplored  regions  lying  between  the  Zambezi  and  Kafukwi  rivers  and  from  18" 
to  15°  S.  lat. 


4         Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements 
History  and  Biography 

A   HISTORY   OF   EGYPT,  from  the  Earliest  Times  to 
THE  Present  Day.    Edited  by  W.  M.  Flinders  Petrie,  D.C.L., 
LL.D,,  Professor  of  Egyptology  at  University  College.     Fu/Zy  IlluS' 
trated.     In  Six  Vohtnies.     Crotvn  Svo.     6s.  each. 
Vol.   V.    ROMAN   EGYPT.     ByJ.  G.Milne. 

the  decline  and  fall  of  the  ROMAN  E?^PIRE. 
By  Edward  Gibbon.  A  New  Edition,  edited  with  Notes, 
Appendices,  and  Maps  by  J.  B.  Bury,  ALA.,  Fellow  of  Trinity 
College,  Dublin.  In  Seven  Volumes.  Demy  Zvo,  gilt  fop.  8.f.  6d. 
each.     Croro)i  Zvo.     6s.  each.      Jo/.  IV. 

THE  LETTERS  OF  VICTOR  HUGO.  Translated  from  the 
French  by  F.  Clarke,  M.A.  In  Tzvo  Volumes.  Demy  %vo. 
los.  6d.  each.  Vol.  II.  1835-72. 
This  is  the  second  volume  of  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  important  collection  of 
letters  ever  published  in  France.  The  correspondence  dates  from  Victor  Hugo's 
boyhood  to  his  death,  aixl  none  of  the  letters  have  been  published  before. 

A  HISTORY  OF  THE  GREAT  NORTHERN    RAILWAY, 

1845-95.       By  C.    H.   Grinling.       With    ^Nlaps   and    Illustrations. 
Demy  ^vo.      \os.  6d. 
A  record  of  Railway  enterprise  and  development  in  Northern  England,  containing 
much  matter  hitherto  unpublished.     It  appeals  both  to  the  general  reader  and  to 
those  specially  interested  in  railway  construction  and  management. 

A    HISTORY    OF    ENGLISH    COLONIAL    POLICY.       By 

II.  E.  Egerton,  M.A.  Demy  2>vo.  12s.  6d. 
This  book  deals  with  British  Colonial  policy  historically  from  the  beginnings  of 
English  colonisation  down  to  the  present  day.  The  subject  has  been  treated  by 
itself,  and  it  has  thus  been  possible  within  a  reasonable  compass  to  deal  with  a 
mass  of  authority  which  must  otherwise  be  sought  in  the  State  papers.  The 
volume  is  divided  into  five  parts  : — (i)  The  Period  of  Beginnings,  1497-1650  ; 
(2)  Trade  Ascendancy,  1651-1830  ;  (3)  The  Granting  of  Responsible  Government, 
1831-1860;  (4)  Laisscz  Alicr,  1861-1CS5  ;  (5)  Greater  Britain. 

A     HISTORY    OF    ANARCHISM.       By    E.     V.    Zenker. 

Translated  by  H.  de  B.  Gibbins,  M.  A.,  Litt.D.    Demy  Svo.    \os.  6d. 

A  critical  study  and  historj',  as  well  as  a  powerful  and  trenchant  criticism,  of  the 

Anarchist  movement  in  Europe.     The  book  has  aroused  considerable  attention 

on  the  Continent. 

THE  LIFE  OF  ERNEST  RENAN     By  Madame  Darmes- 
i  ETER.     With  Portrait.     Crown  2>vo.     Gs. 
A  biography  of  Renan  by  one  of  his  most  intimate  friends. 

A  LIFE  OF  DONNE.      By  AUGUSTUS  JESSOPP,  D.D.     With 

Portrait.      Croivn  8vo.  3-<-.  6d. 
This  is  a  new  volume  of  the  '  Leaders  of  Religion'  series,  from  the  learned  and  witty 
pen  of  the  Rector  of  Scarning,  who  has  been  able  to  enilx^dy  the  results  of  much 
research. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements         5 

OLD  HARROW  DAYS.     By  C  H.  Minchin.     Cr.Zvo.    3^.  6^^. 

A  volume  of  reminiscences  which  will  be  interesting  to  old  Harrovians  and  to  many 
of  the  general  public. 


Theology 


A  PRIMER  OF  THE  BIBLE.  By  Prof.  VV.  H.  Bennett. 
Crown  %vo.     2s.  6d. 

This  Primer  sketches  the  historj-  of  the  books  which  make  up  the  Bible,  in  the  light 
of  recent  criticism.  It  gives  an  account  of  their  character,  origin,  and  composi- 
tion, as  far  as  possible  in  chronological  order,  with  special  reference  to  their 
relations  to  one  another,  and  to  the  history  of  Israel  and  the  Church.  The 
formation  of  the  Canon  is  illustrated  by  chapters  on  the  Apocrypha  (Old  and 
New  Testament);  and  there  is  a  brief  notice  of  the  history  of  the  Bible  since  the 
close  of  the  Canon. 

LIGHT  AND  LEAVEN  :  Historical  and  Social  Sermons. 
By  the  Rev.  II.  Hensley  Henson,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  All  Souls', 
Incumbent  of  St.  Mary's  Hospital,  Ilford.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

g^botional  genes 

THE  CONFESSIONS  OF  ST.  AUGUSTINE.  Newly  Trans- 
lated, with  an  Introduction,  by  C.  Bigg,  D.D.,  late  Student  of 
Christ  Church.     With  a  Frontispiece.      iS;no.      is.  6d. 

This  little  book  is  the  first  volume  of  a  new  Devotional  Series,  printed  in  clear  type, 

and  published  at  a  very  low  price. 
This  volume   contains  the  nine   books  of  the  '  Confessions '  which  'are  suitable  for 

devotional  purposes.  _   The  name  of  the  Editor  is  a  sufficient  guarantee  of  the 

excellence  of  the  edition. 

THE  HOLY  SACRIFICE.     By  F.  Weston,  M.A.,  Curate  of 
St.  IMatthew's,  Westminster.      iS;no.     is. 
A  small  volume  of  devotions  at  the  Holy  Communion. 


Naval  and  Military 


A  tllSTORY  OF  TFIE  ART  OF  WAR.     By  C.  Vv.   Oman, 
]M.A.,  Fellow  of  All  Souls',  Oxford.     Demj'  8z'<p.     Ilhistratcd.     2\s. 

Vol.  II.  Medl^val  Warfare. 

Ivlr.  Oman  is  engaged  on  a  History  of  the  Art  of  War,  of  which  the  above,  though 
covering  the  middle  period  from  the  fall  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  general  use 
of  gunpowder  in  Western  Europe,  is  the  first  instalment.  The  first  battle  dealt 
with  will  be  Adrianople  (378)  and  the  last  Navarette  (1367).  There  will  appear 
later  a  volume  dealing  with  the  Art  of  War  among  the  Ancients,  and  another 
covering  the  15th,  i6th,  and  17th  centuries. 

The  book  will  deal  mainly  with  tactics  and  strategy,  fortifications  and  siegecraft,  but 
subsidiary  chapters  will  give  some  account  of  the  development  of  arms  and  armour, 
and  of  the  various  forms  of  military  organization  known  to  the  Middle  Ages. 


6         Messrs.  Metiiuen's  Announcements 

A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  THE  ROYAL  NAVY,  FROM 
Early  Times  to  the  Present  Day.  By  David  Hannay. 
Illustrated.  2  Vols.  DcDiy  '^vo.  *]s.  6J.  each.  Vol.  I. 
This  book  aims  at  giving  an  account  not  only  of  the  fighting  we  have  done  at  sea, 
but  of  the  growth  of  the  service;  of  the  part  the  Navy  has  played  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  Empire,  and  of  its  inner  life. 

THE  STORY  OF  THE  BRITISH  ARMY.  By  Lieut.-Colonel 
Cooper  King,  of  the  Staff  College,  Camberley.  Illustrated.  Demy 
2>vo.     ys.  6d. 

This  volume  aims  at  describing  the  nature  of  the  different  armies  that  have  been 
formed  in  Great  Britain,  and  how  from  the  earl}^  and  feudal  levies  the  present 
standing  armj' came  to  be.  The  changes  in  tactics,  uniform,  and  armament  are 
briefly  touched  upon,  and  the  campaigns  in  which  the  army  has  shared  have 
been  so  far  followed  as  to  explain  the  part  played  by  British  regiments  in  them. 


General  Literature 


THE    OLD    ENGLISH     HOME.      By    S.   Baring-Gould. 
With  numerous  Plans  and  Illustration's.     Crown  %vo.     Js.  6d, 
This  book,  like  Mr.  Baring-Gould's  well-known  '  Old  Country  Life,'  describes  the 
life  and  environment  of  an  old  English  family. 

OXFORD    AND    ITS    COLLEGES.      By  J.    Wells,  M.A., 
Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Wadham  College.     Illustrated  by  E.  H.  New. 
Fcap.  2>vo.     2)^.      Leather,     /^s. 
This  is  a  guide — chiefly  historical — to  the  Colleges  of  Oxford.    It  contains  numerous 

illustrations. 

VOCES    ACADEMIC/E.     By  C.  Grant  Robertson,  M.A., 
Fellow  of  All  Souls',  Oxford.      With  a  Frontispiece,      Fcap.  Svo. 
3s.  6d. 
This  is  a  volume  of  light  satirical  dialogues  and  should  be  read  by  all  who  are  inter- 
ested in  the  life  of  Oxford. 

A   PRIMER   OF   WORDSWORTH.     By  Laurie  Magnus. 
Crown  2>vo.     2s.  Gd. 
This  volume  is  uniform  with  the  Primers  of  Tennj-son  and  Burns,  and  contains  a 
concise  biography  of  the  poet,  a  critical  appreciation  of  his  work  in  detail,  and  a 
bibliography. 

NEO-MALTHUSIANISM.    By  R.  Ussher,  M.A.     Cr.2>vo.   6s. 

This  book  deals  with  a  very  delicate  but  most  important  matter,  namely,  the  volun- 
tary limitation  of  the  family,  and  how  such  action  affecis  morality,  the  individual, 
and  the  nation. 

PRIMEVAL  SCENES.  By  H.  N.  Hutchinson,  B.A.,  F.G.S., 
Author  of  'Extinct  Monsters,'  'Creatures  of  Other  Days,'  '  Prc- 
liistoric  Man  and  Beast,'  etc.  With  numerous  Illustrations  drawn 
by  John  IIassall  and  Fred.  V.  Burridge.     /[to.     6s. 

A  set  of  twenty  drawings,  with  short  text  to  each,  to  illustrate  the  humorous  aspects 
of  pre-historic  times.  They  are  carefully  planned  by  the  author  so  as  to  be 
scientifically  and  archaeologicaliy  correct  and  at  the  same  time  amusing. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements         7 

THE    WALLYPUG    IN    LONDON.      By    G.    E.    Farrow, 
Author  of  *The  Wallypug  of  Why.'     With  numerous  Illustrations. 
Crown  8vo.     35'.  6d. 
An  extravaganza  for  children,  written  with  great  charm  and  vivacity, 

RAILWAY  NATIONALIZATION.     By  Clement  Edwards. 
Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d.  {Social  Questions  Series. 


Sport 


SPORTING  AND  ATHLETIC  RECORDS.     By  H.  Morgan 

Browne.     CrowjiZvo.     is.  pap^r ;  is.  6d.  cloth. 

This  book  gives,  in  a  clear  and  complete  form,  accurate  records  of  the  best  perform- 
ances in  all  important  branches  of  Sport.  It  is  an  attempt,  never  yet  made,  to 
present  all-important  sporting  records  in  a  systematic  way. 

THE  GOLFING  PILGRIM.  By  Horace  G  Hutchinson. 
Croivn  Svo.  6s. 
This  book,  by  a  famous  golfer,  contains  the  following  sketches  lightly  and  humorously 
written  : — The  Prologue — The  Pilgrim  at  the  Shrine — Mecca  out  of  Season — The 
Pilgrim  at  Home — The  Pilgrim  Abroad — The  Life  of  the  Links — A  Tragedy  by 
the  Way— Scraps  from  the  Scrip— The  Golfer  in  Art— Early  Pilgrims  in  the  West 
— An  Interesting  Relic. 


Educational 


EVAGRIUS.     Edited  by  Professor  Leon  Parmentier  of 
Liege  and  INI.  BiDEZ  of  Gand.     De/iij/  Svo.     ys.  6(1. 

[Byzaitiine  Texts. 

THE  ODES  AND  EPODES  OF  HORACE.      Translated  by 

A.    D.    GODLEY,    ALA.,    Fellow    of    Magdalen    College,    Oxford. 
Crown  Svo.  biukrain.     2s. 

ORNAMENTAL   DESIGN   FOR  WOVEN   FABRICS.     By 

C.  Stephenson,  of  The  Technical  College,  Bradford,  and 
F.  SUDDARDS,  of  The  Yorkshire  College,  Leeds.  With  65  full-page 
plates,  and  numerous  designs  and  diagrams  in  the  text.  Demy  Svo. 
75.  6d. 
The  aim  of  this  book  is  to  supply,  in  a  systematic  and  practical  form,  information  on 
the  subject  of  Decorative  Design  as  applied  to  Woven  Fabrics,  and  is  primarily 
intended  to  meet  the  requirements  of  students  in  Textile  and  Art  Schools,  or  of 
designers  actively  engaged  in  the  weaving  industry.  Its  wealth  of  illustration  is 
a  marked  feature  of  the  book. 

ESSENTIALS     OF     COMMERCIAL     EDUCATION.       By 
E.  E.  Whitfield,  M.A.     Croivn  Svo.     is.  6d. 
A  guide  to  Commercial  Education  and  Examinations. 


8         Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements 
passages  for  unseen  translation.    by  e.  c. 

Marchant,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Pelerhouse,  Cambridge;  and  A.  M. 
Cook,  INI. A.,  late  Scholar  of  Wadham  College.  Oxford:  Assistant 
Masters  at  St.  Paul's  School.     Crown  2>vo.     3.f.  bd. 

This  book  contains  Two  Hundred  Latin  and  Two  Hundred  Greek  Passages,  and 
has  been  very  carefully  compiled  to  meet  the  wants  of  V.  and  VI.  Form  Boys  at 
Public  Schools.  It  is  also  well  adapted  for  the  use  of  Honour  men  at  the 
Universities. 

EXERCISES    ON    LATIN   ACCIDENCE.      By  S.   E.  Win- 
bolt,  Assistant  Master  at  Christ's  Hospital.     Croivn  Zvo.      \s.  6d. 
An  elementary  book  adapted  for  Lower  Forms  to  accompany  the  shorter  Latin  primer. 

NOTES    ON    GREEK    AND    LATIN    SYNTAX.       By    G. 

BucKLAND  Green,  M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  the  Edinburgh 
Academy,  late  Fellow  of  St.  John's  College,  Oxon.     Cr.  Svo.    2s.  6c/. 

Notes  and  explanations  on  the  chief  difficulties  of  Greek  and  Latin  Syntax,  with 
numerous  passages  for  exercise. 

A    DIGEST    OF    DEDUCTIVE     LOGIC.      By    Johnson 
Barker,  B.A.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 
A  short  introduction  to  logic  for  students  preparing  for  examinations. 

TEST  CARDS   IN   EUCLID  AND  ALGEBRA.       By  D.  S. 

Calderwood,  Headmaster  of  the  Normal  School,  Edinburgh.     In 
a  Packet  of  40,  with  Answers,      is. 
A  set  of  cards  for  advanced  pupils  in  elementary  schools. 

HOW  TO  MAKE  A  DRESS.    By  J.  A.  E.  Wood.    Illustrated. 
Cro7vn  Svo.      is.  6d. 

A  text-book  for  students  preparing  for  the  City  and  Guilds  examination,  based  on 
the  syllabus.     The  diagrams  are  numerous. 


Fiction 

LOCHINVAR.    By  S.  R.  Crockett,  Author  of  'The  Raiders,' 
etc.     Illustrated.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

A  romance  of  love  and  war,  the  plot  of  which  is  laid  partly  in  Holland  .ind  partly  in 
Scotland.  The  hero,  a  young  cavalier,  after  serving  with  the  regiment  of  the 
Prince  of  Orange,  takes  service  under  Dundee  and  fights  at  Killiecrankie. 

THE  MUTABLE   MANY.     By  Ror.ERT  Barr,  Author  of  '  In 
the  Midst  of  Alarms,'  '  A  Woman  Inlervcncs,'  etc.     CrownSvo.     6s. 

THE  LADY'S  WALK.     By  Mrs.  Olh^hant.     Cro7vn  Svo.     6s. 

A  new  book  by  this  lamented  author,  somewhat  in  the  stylo  of  her  '  Bclcagured  City.' 


Messrs.  Methuen's  Announcements         9 

TRAITS  AND  CONFIDENCES.     By  The  Hon.  Emily  Law- 
less, Author  of  '  Huirish,'  '  Maelcho,'  etc.      Crown  ^vo.     6j. 

BLADYS.      By   S.   Baring    Gould,  Author  of  'The   Broom 
Squiie,'  etc.     Illustrated  by  F.   H.   TowNSEND.     Crown  %vo.     6s. 
A  Romance  of  the  last  century. 

THE  POMP  OF  THE  LAVILLETTES.    By  Gilbert  Parker, 
Author  of  '  The  Seats  of  the  Mighty,'  etc.      Crown  Zvo.     31.  dd. 

A  DAUGHTER  OF  STRIFE.     By  Jane  Helen  Findlater, 
Author  of  '  The  Green  Graves  of  Balgowrie. '     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 
A  story  of  17 10. 

OVER  THE  HILLS.    By  Mary  Findlater.    CrowitZvo.    6s. 

A  novel  by  a  sister  of  J.  H.  Findlater,  the  author  of  '  The  Green  Graves  of  Balgowrie.' 

A  CREEL  OF  IRISH  TALES.     By  Jane  Barlow,  Author 

of  '  Irish  Idylls. '     Crown  Bvo.     6s. 

THE    CLASH    OF    ARMS.      By  J.   Bloundelle   Burton, 

Author  of  '  In  the  Day  of  Adversity. '     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

A  PASSIONATE  PILGRIM.     By  Percy  White,  Author  of 
•Mr.  Bailey-Martin.'     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

SECRETARY    TO    BAYNE,    M.P.       By    W.    Pett    Ridge. 

Crown  Svo.     6s. 

TPIE   BUILDERS.      By  J.   S.  FLETCHER,  Author   of  'When 
Charles  i.  was  King.'     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

JOSIAH'S  WIFE.     By  NORMA  LORIMER.     Crozan  Svo.     6s. 

BY  STROKE   OF   SWORD.     By  Andrew  Balfour.     Illus- 
trated by  W.  CuBiTT  Cooke.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

A  romance  of  the  time  of  Elizabeth 

THE  SINGER  OF  MARLY.     By  Ida  Hooper.      Illustrated 
by  W.  CuBiTT  Cooke.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
A  romance  of  adventure. 

KIRKHAM'S    FIND.      By   Mary   Gaunt,   Author    of   'The 
Moving  Finger. '     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

THE  FALL    OF  THE    SPARROW.      By    M.    C.    BALFOUR. 
Crown  Svo.     6s. 

SCOTTISH  BORDER  LIFE.     By  James  C.  DiBDiN.    Crown 

Svo.     ^s.  GJ. 

A  2 


A  LIST  OF 

Messrs.     Methuen's 

PUBLICATIONS 


roetry 

RUDYARD    KIPLING'S    NEW    POEMS 

Rudyard    Kipling.      THE    SEVEN    SEAS.      By    Rudyard 
Kipling.     Third  Edition,     Crown  %vo.     Buckram,  f^ilt  top.     6j. 

'The  new  poems  of  Mr.  Rudj-ard  Kipling  lip.ve  nil  the  spirit  and  swing  of  their  pre- 
decessors. Patriotism  is  the  solid  concrete  foundation  on  which  Mr.  Kipling  has 
built  the  whole  of  his  work.' — Times. 

'  Full  of  passionate  patriotism  and  the  Imperial  spirit.' — Yorkshire  Post. 

'The  Empire  has  found  a  singer  ;  it  is  no  depreciation  of  the  songs  to  say  that  states- 
men may  have,  one  way  or  other,  to  take  account  of  them.' — Manchester 
Guardian. 

'  Animated  through  and  through  with  Indubitable  genius.' — Daily  Telegraph. 

'Packed  with  inspiration,  with  humour,  with  pathos.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  All  the  pride  of  empire,  all  the  intoxication  of  pov.-er,  all  the  ardour,  the  energy, 
the  masterful  strength  and  the  wonderful  endurance  and  death-scorning  pluck 
which  arc  the  very  bone  and  fibre  and  marrow  of  the  British  character  are  here." 
—Daily  Mail. 

Rudyard    Kipling.       BARRACK-ROOM     BALLADS;     And 

Other  Verses.     By  Rudyard  Kipling.    Elevenlh  Edition.     Crown 
Svo.     6s. 

'  Mr.  Kipling's  verse  is  strong,  vivid,  full  of  character.  •  .  .  Unmistakable  genius 
rings  in  every  line.' — Times. 

The  ballads  teem  with  imagination,  they  palpitate  witli  emotion.  We  read  them 
with  laughter  and  tears ;  the  metres  throb  in  our  pulses,  the  cunningly  ordered 
words  tingle  with  life  ;  and  if  this  be  not  poetry,  what  is?' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

*Q."     POEMS  AND  BALLADS.     By  '^Q.,"  Author  of  '  Green 
Bays,'  elc.      Crown  Svo.     Bnckram.      "^s.  6d. 
*  This  work  has  just  the  faint,  ineffable  touch  and  glow  that  make  poetry      '  Q."  has 
the  true  romantic  spirit.' — Speaker. 

"Q."    GREEN  BAYS  :  Verses  and  Parodies.     By  "  Q.,"  Author 
of 'Dead  Man's  Rock,' etc.     Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     -^s.Sd. 
'The  verses  display  a  rare  and  versatile  gift  of  parody,  great  command  of  metre,  and 
a  very  pretty  turn  of  humour.' — Times. 

E.  Mackay.  A  SONG  OF  THE  SEA.  By  Eric  ]\L\ckay, 
Author  of  'The  Love  Letters  of  a  Viohnist.'  Second  Edition. 
Fcap.  "^vo.  <jS. 
'  Everywhere  Mr.  Mackay  displays  himself  the  master  of  a  .«itylc  marked  by  all  the 
characteristics  of  the  best  rhetoric.  lie  has  a  keen  sense  of  rhythm  and  of  general 
balance  ;  his  vc:sc   i^  excellently  sonoruus." — Globe. 


Messrs   Methuen's  List  ii 

Ibsen.    BRAND.    A  Drama  by  Henrik  Ibsen.    Translated  by 
William  Wilson.     Second  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.     is.  6d. 

'The  greatest  world-poem  of  the  nineteenth  century  next  to  "Faust."  It  is  ia 
the  same  set  with  "Agamemnon,"  with  "Lear,"  with  the  literature  that  we  now 
instinctively  regard  as  high  and  holy.' — Daily  CJironkle, 

"A.G."    VERSES  TO  ORDER.    By  "A.  G."     Cr,%vo.    2s.6d. 
net. 

A  small  volume  of  verse  by  a  writer  whose  initials  are  well  known  to  OxTord  men. 
'  A  capital  specimen  of  light  academic  poetry.     These  verses  are  very  bright  and 
engaging,  easy  and  sufficiently  -witty.'— St.  James's  Gazette. 

Belles  Lettres,  AnthologieSj  etc. 

E.  L.  Stevenson.    VAILIMA  LETTERS.     By  Robert  Louis 

Stevenson.     With  an  Etched  Portrait  by  William  Strang,  and 

other  Illustrations.    Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.    Buckram.    *]s.  6d. 

*  Few  publications  have  in  our  time  been  more  eagerly  awaited  than  these  "  Vailima 
Letters,"  giving  the  first  fruits  of  the  correspondence  of  Robert  Louis  Stevenson. 
But,  high  as  the  tide  of  expectation  has  run,  no  reader  can  possibly  be  disappointed 
in  the  result.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

Henley  and  Whibley.      A  BOOK  OF  ENGLISH   PROSE. 
Collected  by  W.  E.  Henley  and  Charles  Whibley.   CrownZvo.  6s. 

'A  unique  volume  of  extracts— an  art  gallery  of  early  pro?,Q.'— Birmingham  Post. 
'An  admirable  companion  to  I\Ir.  Henley's  "  Lyra  Heroica.'" — Saturday  Reviezv. 
'  Quite  delightful.    A  greater  treat  for  those  not  well  acquainted  with  pre-Restoration 
prose  could  not  be  imagined. ' — A  thencezim. 

H.  C.  Beeclling.    LYRA  SACRA  :  An  Anthology  of  Sacred  Verse. 
Edited  by  H.   C.  Beeching,  M.A.      Crown  %vo.     Buckram.     6s. 
'  A  charming  selection,  which  maintains  a  lofty  standard  of  excellence.' — Tijues. 

"Q."    THE  GOLDEN  POMP  :  A  Procession  of  English  Lyrics 
from  Surrey  to  Shirley,  arranged  by  A.  T.  QuiLLER  CoucH.    Crown 
?)V0.     Buckram.     6s, 
'  A  delightful  volume  :  a  really  golden  "Pomp." ' — Spectator. 

W.   B.    Yeats.      AN    ANTHOLOGY    OF    IRISH    VERSE. 
Edited  by  W.  B.  Yeats.     Crown  ^-oo.     ^s.  6d. 
'  An  attractive  and  catholic  selection.'— r?>«^j. 

G.  W.  Steevens.     MONOLOGUES   OF    THE    DEAD.     By 

G.  W.  Steevens.     Foolscap  Zvo.     ^s.  6d. 

A  series  of  Soliloquies  in  which  famous  men  of  antiquity — Julius  Csesar,   Nero, 
Alcibiades,  etc.,  attempt  to  express  themselves  in  the  modes  of  thought  and 
language  of  to-day. 
The  edcct  is  sometimes  splendid,  sometimes  bizarre,  but  always  aaia^In^ly  clever. 
— rull  Mall  Cu^c  i^c. 


12  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

Victor  Hugo.  THE  LETTERS  OF  VICTOR  HUGO. 
Translated  from  the  French  by  F.  Clarke,  M.A.  In  Two  Volumes. 
Demy  2>vo.  IQS.  6d.  each.  Vol.1.  1815-35. 
This  is  the  first  volume  of  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  important  collection  of 
letters  ever  published  in  France.  The  correspondence  dates  from  Victor  Hugo's 
boyhood  to  his  death,  and  none  of  the  letters  have  been  published  before.  The 
arrangement  is  chiefly  chronological,  but  where  there  is  an  interesting  set  of 
letters  to  one  person  these  are  arranged  together.  The  first  volume  contains, 
among  others,  (i)  Letters  to  his  father ;  (2)  to  his  young  wife  ;  (2)^  to  his  confessor, 
Lamennais  ;  a  very  important  set  of  about  fifty  letters  to  Sainte-Beauve ;  (5) 
letters  about  his  early  books  and  plays. 
'A  charming  and  vivid  picture  of  a  man  whose  egotism  never  marred  his  natural 
kindness,  and  whose  vanity  did  not  impair  his  greatness.' — Standard. 

C.  H.  Pearson.    ESSAYS  AND  CRITICAL  REVIEWS.     By 

C.  H,  Pearson,  M.A.,  Author  of  'National  Life  and  Character.' 
Edited,  with  a  Biographical  Sketch,  by  H.  A.  Strong,  M.A., 
LL.D.     With  a  Portrait.     Demy  Svo.     10s.  6d. 

'  Remarkable  for  careful  handling,  breadth  of  view,  and  knowledge." — Scotsman. 

*  Charming  essays. ' — Spectator, 

W.  M.  Dixon.     A   PRIMER  OF   TENNYSON.     By  W.  M. 

Dixon,  M.A.,  Professor  of  EngHsh  Literature  at  Mason  College. 
Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 
'  Much  sound  and  well-expressed  criticism  and  acute  literary  judgments.     The  biblio- 
graphy is  a  boon.' — Speaker. 

W.  A.  Craigie.     A  PRIMER  OF  BURNS.    By  W.  A.  Craigie. 

Crown  Svo.     2s.  6d. 
This  book  is  planned  on  a  method  similar  to  the  '  Primer  of  Tennyson.'     It  has  also 

a  glossary. 
'A  valuable  addition  to  the  literature  of  the  poet.' — Times. 
'  An  excellent  short  account.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 
'An  admirable  introduction.'— G/tf3^. 

Sterne.      THE    LIFE    AND    OPINIONS    OF   TRISTRAM 

SHANDY.  By  Lawrence  Sterne.  With  an  Introduction  by 
Charles  Whibley,  and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.     ^s. 

'Very  dainty  volumes  are  these;  the  paper,  type,  and  light-green  binding  are  all 
very  agreeable  to  the  eye.  Simplex  munditiis  is  the  phrase  that  might  be  applied 
to  them.' — Globe. 

Congreve.    THE  COMEDIES  OF  WILLIAM  CONGREVE. 

With  an  Introduction  by  G.  S.  Street,  and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.    ^s. 
'  The  volumes  are  strongly  bound  in  green  buckram,  are  of  a  convenient  size,  and 
pleasant  to  look  upon,  so  that  whether  on  the  shelf,  or  on  the  table,  or  in  the  hand 
the  possessor  is  thoroughly  content  with  ih^m.' —Guardian. 

Morier.  THE  ADVENTURES  OF  HAJJI  BABA  OF 
ISPAHAN.  By  James  Morier.  With  an  Introduction  by  E.  G. 
Browne,  M.A.,  and  a  Portrait.     2  vols.     ys. 

Walton.  THE  LIVES  OF  DONNE,  WOTTON,  HOOKER, 
HERBERT,  AND  SANDERSON.  By  Izaak  Walton.  With 
an  Inlroduclion  by  \'lrnon  Blacklurn,  and  a  Portrait.      31.  6d. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  13 

Johnson.  THE  LIVES  OF  THE  ENGLISH  POETS.  By 
Samuel  Johnson,  LL.D.  With  an  Introduction  by  J.  H.  Millar, 
and  a  Portrait.     3  vols.     \os.  6d. 

Bums.  THE  POEMS  OF  ROBERT  BURNS.  Edited  by 
Andrew  Lang  and  W.  A.  Craigie.  With  Portrait.  Demy  Svo, 
gilt  top.     6j-. 

This  edition  contains  a  carefully  collated  Text,  numerous  Notes,  critical  and  textual, 

a  critical  and  biographical  Introduction,  and  a  Glossary. 
'  Among  the  editions  in  one  volume,  Mr.   Andrew  Lang's  will  take  the  place  of 

authority. ' —  Times. 

F.  Langbridge.      BALLADS    OF   THE    BRAVE:    Poems   of 

Chivalry,  Enterprise,  Courage,  and  Constancy.  Edited,  with  Notes, 
by  Rev.  F.  Langbridge.  Croivn  Zvo.  Bttckram.  35.  6d.  School 
Edition,  is.  6d. 
'A  very  happy  conception  happily  carried  out.  These  "Ballads  of  the  Brave"  are 
intended  to  suit  the  real  tastes  of  boys,  and  will  suit  the  taste  of  the  great  majority.' 
— Spectator.  '  The  book  is  full  of  splendid  things.' — World, 


Illustrated  Books 


Jane  Barlow.  THE  BATTLE  OF  THE  FROGS  AND  MICE, 
translated  by  Jane  Barlow,  Author  of  '  Irish  Idylls,'  and  pictured 
by  F.  D.  Bedford.     S7nall  \to.     ds.  vet. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  A  BOOK  OF  FAIRY  TALES  retold  by  S. 
Baring  Gould.  With  numerous  illustrations  and  initial  letters  by 
Arthur  J.  Gaskin.  Second  Edition.  Crown  Svo.  Buch-avi.  6s. 
'Mr.  Baring  Gould  is  deserving  of  gratitude,  in  re-writing  in  honest,  simple  style  the 
old  stories  that  delighted  the  childhood  of  "  our  fathers  and  grandfathers."  As  to 
the  form  of  the  book,  and  the  printing,  which  is  by  Messrs.  Constable,  it  were 
difficult  to  commend  overmuch.  — Saturday  Revie^v, 

S.  Baring  Gould.  OLD  ENGLISH  FAIRY  TALES.  Col- 
lected and  edited  by  S.  Baring  Gould.  With  Numerous  Illustra- 
tions by  F.  D,  Bedford.  Second  Edition.  CrozvjtSvo.  Buch'am.  6s. 
'A  charming  volume,  which  children  will  be  sure  to  appreciate.  The  stories  have 
been  selected  with  great  ingenuity  from  various  old  ballads  and  folk-tales,  and, 
having  been  somewhat  altered  and  readjusted,  now  stand  forth,  clothed  in  Mr. 
Baring  Gould's  delightful  English,  to  enchant  youthful  readers.' — Guardian. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  A  BOOK  OF  NURSERY  SONGS  AND 
RHYMES.  Edited  by  S.  Baring  Gould,  and  Illustrated  by  the 
Birmingham  Art  School.  Buckram^  gilt  top.  Croivn  Svo.  6s. 
'  The  volume  is  verj'  complete  in  its  way,  as  it  contains  nursery  songs  to  the  number 
of  77,  game-rhymes,  and  jingles.  To  the  student  we  commend  the  sensible  intro- 
duction, and  the  explanatory  notes.  The  volume  is  superbly  printed  on  soft, 
thick  paper,  which  it  is  a  pleasure  to  touch  ;  and  the  borders  and  pictures  are 
among  the  very  best  specimens  we  have  seen  of  the  Gaskin  school.' — Bir7ninz- 
ham  Gazette. 


14  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

H.  C.  Beeching.  A  BOOK  OF  CHRISTMAS  VERSE.  Edited 
by  H.  C.  Beeciiixg,  INI.A.,  and  Illustrated  by  Walter  Crane. 
Crown  8vo,  gilt  top.     ^s. 

A  collection  of  the  best  ver<;e  inspired  by  the  birth  of  Christ  from  the  Middle  Ages 
to  the  present  day,  A  distinction  of  the  book  is  the  large  number  of  poems  it 
contains  by  modern  authors,  a  few  of  which  are  here  printed  for  the  first  time. 

'An  anthology  which,  from  its  unity  of  aim  and  liigh  poetic  excellence,  has  a  better 
right  to  exist  than  most  of  its  fellows.' — Guardiatt. 


History 


Gibbon.  THE  DECLINE  AND  FALL  OF  THE  ROMAN 
EMPIRE.  By  Edward  Gibbon.  A  New  Edition,  Edited  with 
Notes,  Appendices,  and  Maps,  by  J.  E.  Bury,  M.A.,  Fellow  of 
Trinity  College,  Dublin.  In  Seven  Volumes.  Demy  %vo.  Gilt  top. 
%s.  6d.  each.     Also  crown  2>vo.     6s.  each.      Vols.  /.,  //.,  and  III. 

'  The  time  has  certainly  arrived  for  a  new  edition  of  Gibbon's  great  work.  .  .  .  Pro- 
fessor Bury  is  the  right  man  to  undertake  this  task.  His  learning  is  amazing, 
both  in  extent  and  accuracy.  The  book  is  issued  in  a  handy  form,  and  at  a 
moderate  price,  and  it  is  admirably  printed.' — Thiics. 

'  The  edition  is  edited  as  a  classic  should  be  edited,  removing  nothing,  j'et  indicating 
the  value  of  the  text,  and  bringing  it  up  to  date.  It  promises  to  be  of  the  utmost 
value,  and  will  be  a  welcome  addition  to  many  libraries.' — Scots»ian. 

'This  edition,  so  far  as  one  may  judge  from  the  first  instalment,  is  a  marvel  of 
erudition  and  critical  skill,  and  it  is  the  very  minimum  of  praise  to  predict  that  the 
seven  volumes  of  it  will  supersede  Dean  Milman's  as  the  standard  edition  of  our 
great  historical  classic' — Glasgow  Herald. 

*  The  beau-ideal  Gibbon  has  arrived  at  last.* — Skeich, 

'At  last  there  is  an  adequate  modern  edition  of  Gibbon.  .  .  .  The  best  edition  the 
nineteenth  century  could  produce." — Manchester  Guardian. 

Flinders Petrie.  A  HISTORY  OF  EGYPT,fromthe  Earliest 
Times  to  the  Present  Day.  Edited  by  W.  M.  Flinders 
Petrie,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.,  Professor  of  Egyptology  at  University 
College.     Fnlly  Illustrated.    In  Six  Volumes.     Crown  8vo.     6s.  each. 

Vol.  I.  Prehistoric  Times  to  XVI.    Dynasty.      W.   M.    F. 
Petrie.      Third  Editioji. 

Vol.  IT.   The  XVIIth  and  XVIIIth   Dynasties.     W.  ^\.  F. 
Petrie.      Second  Edition. 

'  A  history  written  in  the  spirit  of  scientific  precision  so  worthily  represented  by  Dr. 
Petrie  and  his  school  cannot  liut  promote  sound  and  accurate  study,  and 
supply  a  v.acant  place  in  the  English  literature  of  Egyptology.' — Times. 

Flinders  Petrie.  EGYPTIAN  TALES.  Edited  by  W.  M. 
I'^linders  Petrie.  Illustrated  by  Tristram  Ellis.  In  Two 
Volumes.     Cj-owii  Zvo.     ^s.  6d.  each. 

'A  valuable  addition  to  the  literature  of  comparative  folk-lore.    The  drawings  arc 

really  illustrations  in  the  literal  sense  of  the  \\ox<\.'— Globe. 
'  It  has  a  scientific  value  to  the  student  of  history  and  ?i.\c\\2^cAo%y .' —Scotsman. 
'Invaluable  as  a  picture  of  life  in   Palestine  and   Egypt." — Daily  Neivs. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  15 

Flinders  Petrie.  EGYPTIAN  DECORATIVE  ART.  By 
W.  M.  Flinders  Petrie,  D.C.L.     With  120  Illustrations.     Crown 

'-  Professor  Flinders  Petrie  is  not  only  a  profound  Egyptologist,  but  an  accomplished 
student  of  comparative  archseology.  In  these  lectures,  delivered  at  the  Royal 
Institution,  he  displays  both  qualifications  Vflth.  rare  skill  in  elucidating  the 
development  of  decorative  art  in  Egypt,  and  in  tracing  its  influence  on  the 
art  of  other  countries.' — Titnes. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  THE  TRAGEDY  OF  THE  C^SARS. 
The  Emperors  of  the  Julian  and  Claudian  Lines.  With  numerous 
Illustrations  from  Busts,  Gems,  Cameos,  etc.  By  S.  Baring  Gould, 
Author  of 'Mehalah,' etc.     Fourth  Edition.     Royal  %vo.      i^s. 

'  A  most  splendid  and  fascinating  book  on  a  subject  of  undying  interest.  The  great 
feature  of  the  book  is  the  use  the  author  has  made  of  the  existing  portraits  of  the 
Caesars,  and  the  admirable  critical  subtlety  he  has  exhibited  in  dealing  with  this 
line  of  research.  It  is  brilliantly  written,  and  the  illustrations  are  supplied  on  a 
scale  of  profuse  magnificence.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  The  volumes  will  in  no  sense  disappoint  the  general  reader.  Indeed,_  in  their  way, 
there  is  nothing  in  any  sense  so  good  in  English.  .  .  .  Mr.  Earing  Gould  has 
presented  his  narrative  in  such  a  way  as  not  to  make  one  dull  page.' — Athenceunt. 

H.  de  B.  GibMns.  INDUSTRY  IN  ENGLAND  :  HISTORI- 
CAL OUTLINES.  By  H.  de  B.  Gibbins,  INI.A.,  D.Litt.  With 
5  Maps.     Second  Edition.     Demy  Svo.      los.  6d. 

This  book  is  written  with  the  view  of  affording  a  clear  view  of  the  main  facts  of 
English  Social  and  Industrial  History  placed  in  due  perspective.  Beginning 
with  prehistoric  times,  it  passes  in  re\aew  the  growth  and  advance  of  industry 
up  to  the  nineteenth  century,  showing  its  gradual  development  and  progress. 
The  book  is  illustrated  by  Maps,  Diagrams,  and  Tables. 

A.  Clark.     THE  COLLEGES  OF  OXFORD  :  Their  History 

and  their  Traditions.     By  Members  of  the  University.     Edited  by  A. 

Clark,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Lincoln  College.    Svo.    I2s.  6d. 

'  A  work  which  will  certainly  be  appealed  to  for  many  years  as  the  standard  book  on 

the  Colleges  of  Oxford.' — Atlienceum. 

Perrens.  THE  HISTORY  OF  FLORENCE  FROM  1434 
TO  1492.  By  F.  T.  Perrens.  Translated  by  Hannah  Lynch. 
Zvo.     \2s.  6d. 

A  history  of  Florence   under    the   domination   of  Cosimo,   Piero,   and  Lorenzo  de 

Medicis. 
'  This  is  a  standard  book  by  an  honest  and  intelligent  historian,  who  has  deserved 

well  of  all  who  are  interested  in  Italian  history.' — Manchester  Guardian. 

J.Weils.    A   SHORT  HISTORY  OF  ROME.     By  J.  Wells, 
M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Wadham  Coll.,  Oxford.      With  4  Maps. 
Crown  2>vo.     y.  6d. 
This  book  is  intended  for  the   INIiddle  and  Upper  Forms  of  Public  Schools  and  for 

Pass  Students  at  the  Universities.    It  contains  copious  Tables,  etc. 
'An  original  work  written  on  an  original  plan,  and  with  uncommon  freshness  and 
vigour. ' — Speaker, 


i6  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

E.  L.  S.  Horsburgh.  THE  CAMPAIGN  OF  WATERLOO. 
By  E.  L.  S.  Horsburgh,  B.A.     JVi'fh  Plans.     Crown  8vo.     ^s. 

*  A  brilliant  essay — simple,  sound,  and  thorough.' — Dally  Chronicle. 

'  A  study,  the  most  concise,  the  most  lucid,  the  most  critical  that  has  been  produced. 
— Birmingham  Mercury, 

H.B.  George.   BATTLES  OF  ENGLISH  HISTORY.   ByH.B. 

George,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  New  College,  Oxford.      With  numerous 
Plans.      Third  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

*  Mr.  George  has  undertaken  a  very  useful  task — that  of  making  military'  affairs  in- 

telligible and  instructive  to  non-military  readers — and  has  executed  it  with  laud- 
able intelligence  and  industry,  and  with  a  large  measure  of  success.' — Times. 

0.  Browning.  A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  MEDIEVAL  ITALY, 
A.D.  1 250- 1 530.  By  Oscar  Browning,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  King's 
College,  Cambridge.  Second  Edition.  In  Two  Volumes.  Crown 
Svo.     5^.  each. 

Vol.  I.  1250-1409. — Guelphs  and  Ghibellines. 

Vol.  n.  1409- 1530. — The  Age  of  the  Condottieri. 

'A  vivid  picture  of  mediaeval  Italy.' — Standard. 

'  Mr.  Browning  is  to  be  congratulated  on  the  production  of  a  work  of  immense 
labour  and  \&z.xv\x\g.''— Westminster  Gazette. 

O'Grady.       THE    STORY    OF    IRELAND.      By    Standish 

O'Grady,  Author  of  '  Finn  and  his  Companions.'     Cr.  %vo.     2s.  6d. 

'Most  delightful,  most   stimulating.     Its   racy   humour,    its   original   imaginings, 
make  it  one  of  the  freshest,  breeziest  volumes.' — Methodist  Times. 


Biography 


Baring  Gould.  THE  LIFE  OF  NAPOLEON  BONA- 
PARTE. By  S.  Baring  Gould.  With  over  450  Illustrations  in 
the  Text  and  12  Photogravure  Plates.     Large  quarto.    Gilt  top.     36J. 

■  The  best  biography  of  Napoleon  in  our  tongue,  nor  have  the  French  as  good  a 
biographer  of  their  hero.  A  book  very  nearly  as  good  as  Southey's  "  hife  of 
Nelson."  '—Manchester  Guardian. 

'The  main  feature  of  this  gorgeous  volume  is  its  great  wealth  of  beautiful  photo- 
gravures and  finely-executed  wood  engravings,  constituting  a  complete  pictorial 
chronicle  of  Napoleon  I.'s  personal  history  from  the  days  of  his  early  childhood 
at  Ajaccio  to  the  date  of  his  second  interment  under  the  dome  of  the  Invalides  in 
Vaxis.'— Daily  Telegraph. 

'  The  most  elalwrate  account  of  Napoleon  ever  produced  l)y  an  English  writer.'— 
Daily  Chronicle. 

'  A  brilliant  and  attractive  volume.  Never  before  have  so  many  pictures  relating 
to  Napoleon  been  brought  within  the  limits  of  an  English  book.' — Globe. 

'  Particular  notice  is  due  to  the  vast  collection  of  contemporary  illustrations.' — 
Guardian. 

'Nearly  all  the  illustrations  are  real  contributions  to  historj'.' — IJ'esf  minster  Gazette. 

'The  illustrations  arc  of  supreme  inteTv<.t.' Standard. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  17 

Morris  Fuller.  THE  LIFE  AND  WRITINGS  OF  JOHN 
DAVENANT,  D.D.  (1571-1641),  President  of  Queen's  College, 
Lady  Margaret  Professor  of  Divinity,  Bishop  of  Salisbury.  By 
Morris  Fuller,  B.D.     Crown  %vo.     'js.  6d. 

'  A  valuable  contribution  to  ecclesiastical  history.' — Birniinghain  Gazette. 

J.  M.  Rigg.  ST.  ANSELM  OF  CANTERBURY:  A  Chapter 
IN  THE  History  of  Religion.    By  J.  M.  Rigg.   DeviyZvo.   ^s.  6d. 

'  Mr.  Rigg  has  told  the  story  of  the  great  Primate's  life  with  scholarly  ability,  and 
has  thereby  contributed  an  interestingchapter  to  the  history  of  the  Norman  period.' 
— Daily  Chronicle. 

F.  W.  Joyce.  THE  LIFE  OF  SIR  FREDERICK  GORE 
OUSELEY.  By  F.  W.  Joyce,  M.A.  With  Portraits  and  Illustra- 
tions.    Crown  Zvo.     *]s.  6d. 

'  This  book  has  been  undertaken  in  quite  the  right  spirit,  and  written  with  sympathy 
insight,  and  considerable  literary  skill.' — Times. 

W.  G.  Collingwood.  THE  LIFE  OF  JOHN  RUSKIN.  By 
W.  G.  Collingwood,  M.A.,  Editor  of  Mr.  Ruskin's  Poems.  With 
numerous  Portraits,  and  13  Drawings  by  Mr.  Rusk  in.  Second 
Edition.     2  vols.     S-vo.     32^. 

'  No  more  magnificent  volumes  have  been  published  for  a  long  time,'— Tidies. 
*  It  is  long  since  we  had  a  biography  with  such  delights  of  substance  and  of  form. 
Such  a  book  is  a  pleasure  for  the  day,  and  a  joy  for  ever.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

0.  Waldstein.  JOHN  RUSKIN  :  a  Study.  By  Charles 
Waldstein,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  King's  College,  Cambridge.  With  a 
Photogravur    Portrait  after  Professor  Herkomer.     Post  Svo.     ^s. 

'A  thoughtful,  impartial,  well-written  criticism  of  Ruskin's  teaching,  intended  to 
separate  what  the  author  regards  as  valuable  and  permanent  from  what  is  transient 
and  erroneous  in  the  great  master's  writing.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

W.  H.  Hutton.  THE  LIFE  OF  SIR  THOMAS  MORE.  By 
W.  H.  Hutton,  M.A.,  Author  of  '  William  Laud.'  With  Portraits, 
Crown  Svo.    ^s. 

'  The  book  lays  good  claim  to  high  rank  among  our  biographies.  It  is  excellently, 
even  lovingly,  written." — Scotsman.  '  An  excellent  monograph.' — Times. 

Clark  RusselL  THE  LIFE  OF  AD]\IIRAL  LORD  COL- 
LINGWOOD. By  W.  Clark  Russell,  Author  of  '  The  Wreck 
of  the  Grosvenor.'  With  Illustrations  by  F.  Brangwyn.  Third 
Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

•A  book  which  we  should  like  to  see  in  the  hands  of  every  boy  in  the  country.' — 
.S"^.  James's  Gazette.  '  A  really  good  book.' — .Saturday  Review. 

A3 


1 8  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

Southey.  ENGLISH  SEAMEN  (Howard,  Clifford,  Hawkins, 
Drake,  Cavendish).  By  Robert  Southey.  Edited,  with  an 
Introduction,  by  David  Hannay.    Second  Edition.     CrownSvo.    6s. 

'Admirable  and  well-told  stories  of  our  naval  history.' — Artny  and  Navy  Gazette. 

'A  brave,  inspiriting  book.' — Black  and  White. 


Travel5  Adventure  and  Topography 

R.  S.  S.  Baden-Powell.     THE  DOWNFALL  OF  PREMPEH. 

A  Diary  of  Life  with  the  Native  Levy  in  Ashanti,  1895.  By  Colonel 
Baden-Powell.  With  21  Ilkistrations  and  a  Map.  Demy  Zvo. 
\os.  6d. 

'•  A  compact,  faithful,  most  readable  record  of  the  campaign.' — Daily  News. 
'  A  bluff  and  vigorous  narrative.' — Glasgoxv  Herald. 

R.  S.  S.  Baden-Powell     TPIE  MATKBELE  CAMPAIGN  1896. 

By  Colonel  R.  S.  S.  Baden- Powell.    With  nearly  100  Illustrations. 

Second  Edition.     Deniy^vo.     155. 

'Written  in  an  unaffectedly  light  and  humorous  style.' — The  World. 
'A  very  racy  and  eminently  readable  book.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

*  As  a  straightforward  account  of  a  great  deal  of  plucky  work  unpretentiously  done, 

this  book  is  well  worth  reading.  The  simplicity  of  the  narrative  is  all  in  its 
favour,  and  accords  in  a  peculiarly  English  fashion  with  the  nature  of  the  subject.' 
Times. 

Captain  Hinde.     THE   FALL   OF   THE   CONGO    ARABS. 

By  Sidney  L.  Hinde.  With  Portraits  and  Plcns.  Defuy  Svo. 
i2s.  6d. 

*  The  book  is  full  of  good  things,  and  of  sustained  interest.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

A  graphic  sketch  of  one  of  the  most  exciting  and  important  episodes  in  the  struggle 
for  supremacy  in  Central  Africa  between  the  Arabs  and  their_  Europeon  rivals. 
Apart  from  the  story  of  the  campaign.  Captain  Hinde's  book  is  mainly  remark- 
able for  the  fulness  with  which  he  discusses  the  question  of  cannibalism.  It  is, 
indeed,  the  only  connected  narrative— in  English,  at  any  rate — which  has  been 
published  of  this  particular  episode  in  African  history.' — Tima. 

*  Captain  Hinde's  book  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  valuable  contributions  yet 

made  to  the  literature  of  modern  Africa.' — Daily  Nczvs. 

W.  Crooke.    THE  NORTH-WEST  PROVINCES  OF  INDIA  : 

TiiEiR  Ethnology  and    Administration.     By  W.   Crooke. 

With  Maps  and  Illustrations.     Demy  Svo.     10s.  6d. 

'  A  carefully  and  well-written  account  of  one  of  the  most  important  provinces  of  the 
Empire.  In  seven  chapters  Mr.  Croote  deals  successively  with  the  land  in  its 
physical  aspect,  the  province  under  Hindoo  and  Mussulman  rule,  the  province 
under  British  rule,  the  ethnology  and  sociology  of  the  province,  the  religious  and 
social  life  of  the  people,  the  land  and  its  settlement,  and  the  native  peasant  in  his 
relation  to  the  land.  The  illustrations  are  good  and  well  selected,  and  the  map  is 
excellent. ' — Manchester  Guardian. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  19 

W.  B.  Worsfold.    SOUTH  AFRICA  :  Its  History  and  its  Future. 

By  W.    Basil  Worsfold,  INI.  A.      IVich  a  Map.     Second  Edition. 
Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'An  intensely  interesting  book.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

'  A  monumental  work  compressed  into  a  very  moderate  compass.' — World. 


General  Literature 

S.  Baring  Gould.  OLD  COUNTRY  LIFE.  By  S.  Baring 
Gould,  Author  of  '  Mehalah,'  etc.  With  Sixty- seven  Illustrations 
by  W.  Parkinson,  F.  D.  Bedford,  and  F.  Masey.  Large 
Crown  Svo.     los.  6d.     Fifth  and  Cheaper  Edition.     (>s. 

'"Old  Countrj'  Life,"  as  healthy  wholesome  reading,  full  of  breezy  life  and  move- 
ment, full  of  quaint  stories  vigorously  told,  will  not  be  excelled  by  any  book  to  be 
published  throughout  the  year.    Sound,  hearty,  and  English  to  the  core.' — World. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  HISTORIC  ODDITIES  AND  STRANGE 
EVENTS.    By  S.  Baring  Gould.     Third  Edition.    Crown  ^vo.    6s. 

'  A  collection  of  exciting  and  entertaining  chapters.  The  whole  volume  is  delightful 
leading.'— Times. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  FREAKS  OF  FANATICISM.  By  S.  Baring 
Gould.      Third  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'Mr.  Baring  Gould  has  a  keen  eye  for  colour  and  effect,  and  the  subjects  he  has 
chosen  give  ample  scope  to  his  descriptive  and  analytic  faculties.  A  perfectly 
fascinating  book. ' — Scottish  Leader. 

S.    Baring  Gould.     A  GARLAND    OF   COUNTRY   SONG  : 

English  Folk  Songs  with  their  Traditional  Melodies.  Collected  and 
arranged  by  S.  Baring  Gould  and  H.  Fleetwood  Sheppard. 
Demy  ^to,      6s. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  SONGS  OF  THE  WEST:  Traditional 
Ballads  and  Songs  of  the  West  of  England,  with  their  Traditional 
Melodies.  Collected  by  S.  Baring  Gould,  M.A.,  and  H.  Fleet- 
wood Sheppard,  M.  A.  Arranged  for  Voice  and  Piano.  In  4  Parts 
(containing  25  Songs  each),  Parts  I.,  //.,  ///.,  3j\  each.  Part 
IV.,  ^s.  In  one  Vol.,  French  morocco,  \^s. 
'  A  rich  collection  of  humour,  pathos,  grace,  and  poetic  fancy.' — Saturday  Review, 


20  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

S.  Baring  Gould.   YORKSHIRE  ODDITIES  AND  STRANGE 

EVENTS.     Fourth  Edition.     Crown  %vo.     6s. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  STRANGE  SURVIVALS  AND  SUPER- 
STITIONS. With  Illustrations.  By  S.  Baring  Gould.  Crown 
^vo.     Second  Edition.     6s. 

'  We  have  read  Mr.  Baring  Gould's  book  from  beginning  to  end.  It  is  full  of  quaint 
and  various  information,  and  there  is  not  a  dull  page  in  it. ' — Notes  and  Queries. 

S.  Baring  Gould.  THE  DESERTS  OF  SOUTHERN 
FRANCE.  By  S.  Baring. Gould.  With  numerous  Illustrations 
by  F.  D.  Bedford,  S.  Hutton,  etc.     2  vols.     Demy  Zvo.     325. 

'  His  two  richly-illustrated  volumes  are  full  of  matter  of  interest  to  the  geologist, 
the  archaeologist,  and  the  student  of  history  and  manners.' — Scotsvian. 

G.  W.  Steevens.  NAVAL  POLICY:  With  a  Descrip- 
tion OF  English  and  Foreign  Navvies.  By  G.  W.  Steevens. 
Demy  8vo.     6s. 

This  book  is  a  description  of  the  British  and  other  more  important  navies  of  the  world, 
with  a  sketch  of  the  lines  on  which  our  naval  policy  might  possibly  be  developed. 
It  describes  our  recent  naval  policj',  and  shows  what  our  naval  force  really  is.  A 
detailed  but  non-technical  account  is  given  of  the  instruments  of  modern  warfare — 
guns,  armour,  engines,  and  the  like — with  a  view  to  determine  how  far  we  are 
abreast  of  modern  invention  and  modern  requirements.  An  ideal  policy  is  then 
sketched  for  the  building  and  manning  of  oUr  fleet ;  and  the  last  chapter  is 
devoted  to  docks,  coaling-stations,  and  especially  colonial  defence. 

'  An  extremely  able  and  interesting  work.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

W.  E.  Gladstone.  THE  SPEECHES  AND  PUBLIC  AD- 
DRESSES OF  THE  RT.  HON.  W.  E.  GLADSTONE,  M.P. 
Edited  by  A.  W.  Hutton,  M.A.,  and  H.  J.  Cohen,  M.A.  With 
Portraits,     '^vo.      Vols.  IX.  and X.      \2s,  6d.  each. 

J.  Wells.     OXFORD  AND  OXFORD  LIFE.    By  Members  of 

the  University.     Edited  by  J.  Wells,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of 
Wadham  College.     Croivn  8vo.     3^.  6d. 

'  We  congratulate  Mr.  Wells  on  the  production  of  a  readable  and  intelligent  account 
of  Oxford  as  it  is  at  the  present  time,  written  by  persons  who  are  possessed  of  a 
close  acquaintance  with  the  system  and  life  of  the  JJniytrsity.'—Ai/iencrum. 

L.  Whibley.  GREEK  OLIGARCHIES  :  THEIR  ORGANISA- 
TION AND  CHARACTER.  By  L.  Wiiiblev,  M.A.,  Fellow 
of  Pembroke  College,  Cambridge.      Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

'  An  exceedingly  useful  handbook  :  a  careful  and  well-arranged  study  of  aii  obscure 

subject.' — Tiiucs. 
'  Mr.  Whibley  is  never  tedious  ur  pedantic' — Fall  Mall  Gazette. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  21 

L.  L.  Price.  ECONOMIC  SCIENCE  AND  PRACTICE, 
By  L.  L.  Price,  M.A.,  Fellow  of  Oriel  College,  Oxford.  Crown 
Svo.     6s. 

'  The  book  is  well  written,  giving  evidence  of  considerable  literary  ability,  and  clear 
mental  grasp  of  the  subject  under  consideration. '  —  ^Fi^j-^'grw  Morning  News. 

C.   F.   Andrews.      CHRISTIANITY   AND    THE    LABOUR 
QUESTION.     By  C.  F.  Andrews,  B.A.     Crown  ^vo.     2s.  6J. 
'  A  bold  and  scholarly  survey.' — Speaker. 

J.  S.  Shedlock.  THE  PIANOFORTE  SONATA:  Its  Origin 
and  Development.     By  J.  S.  Shedlock.     Crown  Svo.     5^. 

'This  work  should  be  in  the  possession  of  every  musician  and  amateur,  for  it  not 
only  embodies  a  concise  and  lucid  history  ot  the  origin  ofoneof  the  most  im- 
portant forms  of  musical  composition,  but,  by  reason  of  the  painstaking  research 
and  accuracy  of  the  author's  statements,  it  is  a  very  valuable  work  for  reference.' 
— A  theHCB7i}n. 

E.M.  Bowden.  THE  EXAMPLE  OF  BUDDHA:  Being  Quota- 
tions from  Buddhist  Literature  for  each  Day  in  the  Year.  Compiled 
by  E.  M.  Bowden.    With  Preface  by  Sir  Edwin  Arnold.     Third 

Editiofi.     iGf/io.     2s.  6d. 


Science 

Freudenreich.  DAIRY  BACTERIOLOGY.  A  Short  Manual 
for  the  Use  of  Students.  By  Dr.  Ed.  von  Freudenreich. 
Translated  from  the  German  by  J.  R.  Ainsworth  Davis,  B.A., 
F.C.P.     Crown  Svo.     2s.6d. 

Chalmers    Mitchell.      OUTLINES    OF  BIOLOGY.      By   P. 

Chalmers  I\Iitchell,    M.A.,  F.Z.S.     Fully  Illustrated.     Crown 
%vo.     6s. 

A  text-book  designed  to  cover  the  new   Schedule   issued   by  the  Roj-al  College  of 
Physicians  and  Surgeons. 

G.Massee.  A  MONOGRAPH  OF  THE  MYXOGASTRES.  By 
George  Massee.     With  12  Coloured  Plates.     Royal  Svo.     iSs.net. 

'A  work  much  in  advance  of  any  book  in  the  language  treating  of  this  group  of 
organisms.  It  is  indispensable  to  every  student  of  the  Myxogastres.  The 
coloured  plates  deserve  high  praise  for  their  accuracy  and  execution.'— iV«^Kr<r. 


22  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 


Philosophy 


L.  T.  Hobhouse.     THE  THEORY  OF  KNOWLEDGE.     By 

L.  T.  Hobhouse,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Corpus  College,  Oxford. 
Demy  Svo.     21  s. 

'  The  most  Important  contribution  to  English  philosophy  since  the  publication  of  Mr. 
Bradley's  "  Appearance  and  Reality."  Full  of  brilliant  criticism  and  of  positive 
theories  which  are  models  of  lucid  statement.' — Glasgow  Herald. 

'  An  elaborate  and  often  brilliantly  written  volume.  The  treatment  is  one  of  great 
freshness,  and  the  illustrations  are  particularly  numerous  and  apt.' — Times. 

\V.  H.  Fairbrotlier.  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  T.  H.  GREEN. 
By  W.  H.  Fairbrother,  ]\I.A.,  Lecturer  at  Lincoln  College, 
Oxford.     Crown  Svo.     ^s.  6d. 

This  volume  is  expository,  not  critical,  and  Is  Intended  for  senior  students  at  the 

Universities  and  others,  as  a  statement  of  Green's  teaching,  and  an  introduction  to 

the  study  of  Idealist  Philosophy. 
'  In  every  way  an  admirable  book.    As  an  introduction  to  the  writings  of  perhaps  the 

most  remarkable  speculative  thinker  whom  England  has  produced  in  the  present 

century,  nothing  could  be  better.' — Glasgozu  lUfald. 

F.  W.  BusselL  THE  SCHOOL  OF  PLATO  :  its  Origin  and 
its  Revival  under  the  Roman  Empire.  By  F.  W.  Bussell,  M.A., 
Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Brasenose  College,  Oxford.    De?ny  Svo.     los.  6d. 

'  A  highly  valuable  contribution  to  the  history  of  ancient  thought.' — Glasgmu  Herald. 
'  A  clever  and  stimulating  book,  provocative  of  thought  and  deserving  careful  reading." 
— Alancliester  Guardian, 

F.  S.  Granger.     THE  WORSHIP  OF   THE  ROMANS.     By 

F.  S.  Granger,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy  at  Univer- 
sity College,  Nottingham.      Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'  A  scholarly  analysis  of  the  religious  ceremonies, beliefs,  and  superstitions  of  ancient 
Rome,  conducted  in  the  new  instructive  light  of  comparative  anthropology.' — 
Times. 


Theology 


E.  C.  S.  Gibson.  THE  XXXIX.  ARTICLES  OF  THE 
CHURCH  OF  ENGLAND.  Edited  with  an  Introduction  by  E. 
C.  S.  Gibson,  D.D. ,  Vicar  of  Leeds,  late  Principal  of  Wells 
Theological  College.     In  Two  Volumes.     Demy  Svo.      \^s, 

'The  tone  maintained  throughout  is  not  that  of  the  partial  advocate,  but  the  faithful 

exponent. ' — Scotsman. 
'There  are  .ample  proofs  of  clearness  of  expression,  sobriety  of  judgment,  and  breadth 

of  view.  .  .  .  The  book  will  be  welcome  to  all  students  of  the  subject,  and  its  sound, 

definite,  and  loyal  theology  ought  to  be  of  great  service.' — Nationa.1  Observer. 
'So  far  from  repelling  the  general  reader,  its  orderly  arrangement,  lucid  treatment, 

and  felicltj'  of  diction  Invite  and  encourage  his  attention.' — Yorkshire  Post. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  23 

R.  L.  Ottley.     THE  DOCTRINE  OF  THE  INCARNATION. 

By  R.  L.  Ottley,  M.A.,  late  fellow  of  Magdalen  College,  Oxon., 
Principal  of  Pusey  House.    In  Two  Volumes.    Demy  2>vo.     I'^s. 

*  Learned  and  reverent :  lucid  and  well  arranged.' — Record. 
'Accurate,  well  ordered,  and  judicious.' — National  Observer. 

'  A  clear  and  remarkably  full  account  of  the  main  currents  of  speculation.  Scholarly 
precision  .  •  .  genuine  tolerance  .  .  ,  intense  interest  in  his  subject — are  Mr. 
Ottley's  merits, ' — Guardiati. 

F.  B.  Jevons.  AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  HISTORY 
OF  RELIGION.  By  F.  B.  Jevons,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  Principal  of 
Bishop  Flatfield's  Hall.     Demy  Svo.      los.  6d. 

Mr.  F.  B.  Jevons'  'Introduction  to  the  History  of  Religion'  treats  of  early  religion, 
from  the  point  of  vaew  of  Anthropology  and  Folk-lore  ;  and  is  the  first  attempt 
that  has  been  made  in  any  language  to  weave  together  the  results  of  recent 
investigations  into  such  topics  as  S^'mpathetic  Magic,  Taboo,  Totemism, 
Fetishism,  etc.,  so  as  to  present  a  systematic  account  of  the  growth  of  primitive 
religion  and  the  development  of  early  religious  institutions, 
'  Dr.  Jevons  has  written  a  notable  work,  and  we  can  strongly  recommend  it  to  the 
serious  attention  of  theologians,  anthropologists,  and  classical  scholars.' — 3fan- 
Chester  Gtiardian. 
'  The  merit  of  this  book  lies  in  the  penetration,  the  singular  acuteness  and  force  of  the 
author's  judgment.  He  isat  once  critical  and  luminous,  at  once  just  and  suggestive. 
It  is  but  rarely  that  one  meets  with  a  book  so  comprehensive  and  so  thorough  as 
this,  and  it  is  more  than  an  ordinary  pleasure  for  the  reviewer  to  welcome  and 
recommend  it.  Dr.  Jevons  is  something  more  than  an  historian  of  primitive 
belief— he  is  a  philosophic  thinker,  who  sees  his  subject  clearly  and  sees  it  whole, 
whose  mastery  of  detail  is  no  less  complete  than  his  view  of  the  broader  aspects 
and  issues  of  his  subject  is  convincing.' — BirmingJiam  Post. 

S.  R.  Driver.  SERMONS  ON  SUBJECTS  CONNECTED 
WITH  THE  OLD  TESTAMENT.  By  S.  R.  Driver,  D.D., 
Canon  of  Christ  Church,  Regius  Professor  of  Hebrew  in  the  Uni- 
versity of  Oxford.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

*  A  welcome  companion  to  the  author's  famous  '  Introduction.'  No  man  can  read  these 

discourses  without  feeling  that  Dr.  Driver  is  fully  alive  to  the  deeper  teaching  of 
the  Old  Testament.' — Guardian. 

T.  K.  Cheyne.    FOUNDERS  OF  OLD  TESTAMENT  CRITI- 
CISM :  Biographical,  Descriptive,  and  Critical  Studies.     By  T.  K. 
Cheyne,  D.D.,  Oriel  Professor  of  the  Interpretation  of  Holy  Scrip- 
ture at  Oxford.     Large  crown  Svo.     'js.  6d. 
This  book  is  a  historical  sketch  of  O.  T.  Criticism  in  the  form  of  biographical  studies 

from  the  days  of  Eichhorn  to  those  of  Driver  and  Robertson  Smith. 
'  A  very  learned  and  instructive  work.' — Times. 

C.H.Prior.  CAMBRIDGE  SERMONS.  Edited  by  C.H.  Prior, 
M.A.,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Pembroke  College.      Crown  Svo.     ds. 
A  volume  of  sermons    preached  before  the   University   of  Cambridge  by  various 
preachers,  including  the  Archbishop  of  Canterbury  and  Bishop  Westcott. 
A  representative  collection.     Bishop  Westcott's  is  a  noble  sermon.' — Guardian. 

E.  B.  Layard.  RELIGION  IN  BOYHOOD.  Notes  on  the 
Religious  Training  of  Boys.  With  a  Preface  by  J.  R.  Illing- 
WORTH.     By  E.  B.  Layard,  M.A.     \Smo.     \s. 


24  Messrs.  Metiiuen's  List 

W.     Yorke      Faussett.       THE     DE     CATECHIZANDIS 

RUDIBUS  OF  ST.  AUGUSTINE.     Edited,    with  Introduction, 

Notes,  etc.,  by  W.  Yorke  Faussett,  M.A.,  late  Scholar  of  Balliol 

Coll.     Crown  8vo.     ^s.  6d. 

An  edition  of  a  Treatise  on  the  Essentials  of  Christian  Doctrine,   and  the  best 

methods  of  impressing  them  on  candidates  for  baptism. 
'Ablj'  and  judiciously  edited  on  the  same  principle   as   the  ordinary  Greek   and 
Latin  texts.' — Glasgow  Herald. 

2Det3Dtional  ©oofe^. 

With   Full-page   Illustrations.      Fcap.    8vo.      Buckra?n.       3^.    6d. 
Padded  morocco^  55. 
THE    IMITATION    OF   CHRIST.     By  Thomas  A  Kempis. 
With  an    Introduction  by   Dean   Farrar.     Illustrated   by  C.  M. 
Gere,  and  printed  in  black  and  red.     Second  Edition. 
'Amongst  all  the  innumerable  English  editions  of  the  "Imitation,"  there  can  have 
been  few  which  were  prettier  than  this  one,  printed  n  strong  and  handsome  type, 
with  all  the  glory  of  red  initials.' — Glasgow  Herald, 

THE  CHRISTIAN  YEAR.  By  John  Keble.  With  an  Intro- 
duction and  Notes  by  W.  Lock,  D.D.,  Warden  of  Keble  College, 
Ireland,  Professor  at  Oxford.     Illustrated  by  R.  Anning  Bell. 

'  The  present  edition  is  annotated  with  all  the  care  and  insight  to  be  expected  from 
Mr.  Lock.  The  progress  and  circumstances  of  its  composition  are  detailed  in  the 
Introduction.  There  is  an  interesting  Appendix  on  the  MSS.  of  the  "Christian 
Year,"  and  another  giving  the  order  in  which  the  poems  were  written.  A  "Short 
Analysis  of  the  Thought"  is  prefixed  to  each,  and  any  difficulty  in  the  text  is  ex- 
plained in  a  note.' — Guardian. 

'  The  most  acceptable  edition  of  this  ever-popular  work.' — Globe. 


3/6 


Leaders  of  Religion 

Edited  by  H.  C.  BEECHING,  M.  A.      With  Portraits,  crown  8zv. 

A  series  of  short  biographies  of  the  most  prominent  leaders 
of  religious  life  and  thought  of  all  ages  and  countries. 

The  following  are  ready — 
CARDINAL  NEWMAN.     By  R.  H.  HUTTON. 
JOHN  WESLEY.    By  J.  H.  Overton,  M.A. 
BISHOP  WILBERFORCE.     By  G.  W.  Daniel,  M.A. 
CARDINAL  MANNING.     By  A.  W.  HuTTON,  M.A. 
CHARLES  SIMEON.     By  H.  C.  G.  MOULE,  M.A. 
JOHN  KEBLE.    By  Walter  Lock,  D.D. 
THOMAS  CHALMERS.     By  Mrs.  Oliphant. 
LANCELOT  ANDREWES.     By  R.  L.  Ottley,  M.A. 
AUGUSTINE   OF  CANTERBURY.     By  E.  L.  CUTTS,  D.D. 
WILLIAM  LAUD.     By  W.  H.  HuTTON,  B.D. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  25 

JOHN  KNOX.     By  F.  M'CUNN. 
JOHN  HOWE.     By  R.  F.  HORTON,  D.D. 
BISHOP  KEN.     By  F.  A.  Clarke,  M.A. 
GEORGE  FOX,  THE  QUAKER.     By  T.  Hodgkin,  D.C.L. 
Other  volumes  will  be  announced  in  due  course. 

Fiction 

SIX     SHILLING     NOVELS 

Marie  Corelli's  Novels 

Crown  Svo.     6s.  each. 
A  ROMANCE  OF  TWO  W^ORLDS.     Sixteenth  Ediiio?i. 
VENDETTA.     Thirteenth  Edition. 
T  H  E L M A.     Seventeenth  Edition. 
ARDATH.     Tenth  Editimi. 
THE  SOUL  OF  LILITH      Nijith  Edition. 
WORMWOOD.     Eighth  Edition. 
BARABBAS  :  A  DREAM  OF  THE  WORLD'S  TRAGEDY. 

Thi)-ty-first  Edition. 
'  The  tender  reverence  of  the  treatment  and  the  imaginative  beauty  of  the  writing 
have  reconciled  us  to  the  daring  of  the  conception,  and  the  conviction  is  forced  on 
us  that  even  so  exalted  a  subject  cannot  be  made  too  familiar  to  us,  provided  it  be 
presented  in  the  true  spirit  of  Christian  faith.  The  amplifications  of  the  Scripture 
narrative  are  often  conceived  with  high  poetic  insight,  and  this  "Dream  of  the 
World's  Tragedy  "  is,  despite  some  trifling  incongruities,  a  lofty  and  not  inade- 
quate paraphrase  of  the  supreme  climax  of  the  inspired  narrative.' — Dublin 
Review. 

THE  SORROW^S  OF  SATAN.     Thirty-sixth  Edition. 

'  A  very  powerful  piece  of  work.  .  .  .  The  conception  is  magnificent,  and  is  likely 
to  win  an  abiding  place  within  the  memory'  of  man.  .  .  .  The  author  has  immense 
command  of  language,  and  a  limitless  audacity.  .  .  .  This  interesting  and  re- 
markable romance  will  live  long  after  much  of  the  ephemeral  literature  of  the  day 
is  forgotten.  ...  A  literary  phenomenon  .  .  .  novel,  and  even  sublime.' — W.  T. 
Stead  in  the  Review  of  Reviews. 

Anthony  Hope's  Novels 

Crown  ?)Vo.     6s.  each. 
THE  GOD  IN  THE  CAR.     Sevmih  Edition.  .        _ 

'  A  very  remarkable  book,  deserving  of  critical  analysis  impossible  within  our  limit ; 
brilliant,  but  not  superficial ;  well  considered,  but  not  elaborated  ;  constructed 
with  the  proverbial  art  that  conceals,  but  yet  allows  itself  to  be  enjoyed  by  readers 
to  whom  fine  literarj'  method  is  a  keen  pleasure.'—  The  World. 

A  CHANGE  OF  AIR.     Fourth  Edition. 

'A  graceful,  vivacious  comedy,  true  to  human  nature.  The  characters  are  traced 
with  a  masterly  hand.' — Times. 

A  MAN  OF  MARK.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  Of  all  Mr.  Hope's  books,  "A  Man  of  Mark  "  is  the  one  which  best  compares  with 
' '  The  Prisoner  of  Zenda."  ' — National  Observer. 


26  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

THE  CHRONICLES  OF  COUNT  ANTONIO.    Third Editum. 

'It  is  a  perfectly  enchanting  story  of  love  and  chivalry,  and  pure  romance.  The 
outlawed  Count  is  the  most  constant,  desperate,  and  withal  modest  and  tender  of 
lovers,  a  peerless  gentleman,  an  intrepid  fighter,  a  very  faithful  friend,  and  a  most 
magnanimous  foe. ' — Guardian. 

PHROSO.     Illustrated  by  H.  R.  MiLLAR._    Third  Edition. 

'  The  tale  is  thoroughly  fresh,  quick  with  vitality,  stirring  the  blood,  and  humorously, 

(l2ish.\x\g\yto\A.'— St.  James  s  Gazette. 
'  A  story  of  adventure,  every  page  of  which  is  palpitating  with  action  and  excitement.' 

—Speaker. 
'  From  cover  to  cover  "  Phroso  "  not  only  engages  the  attention,  but  carries  the  reader 

in  little  whirls  of  delight  from  adventure  to  adventure." — Academy. 

S.  Baring  Gould's  Novels 

Crozvn  2>vo.     6s.  each. 
'To  say  that  a  book  is  by  the  author  of  "  ISIehalah"  is  to  imx)ly  that  it  contains  a 
story  cast  on  strong  lines,  containing  dramatic  possibilities,  vivid  and  sympathetic 
descriptions  of  Nature,  and  a  wealth  of  ingenious  imagery.' — Speaker. 
'  That  whatever  Mr.  Baring  Gould  writes  is  well  worth  reading,  is  a  conclusion  that 
may  be  very  generally  accepted.     His  views  of  life  are  fresh  and  vigorous,  his 
language  pointed  and  characteristic,  the  incidents  of  which  he  makes  use  are 
striking  and  original,  his  characters  are  life-like,  and  though  somewhat  excep- 
tional people,  are  drawn  and  coloured  with  artistic  force.     Add  to  this  that  his 
descriptions  of  scenes  and  scenery  are  painted  with  the  loving  eyes  and  skilled 
hands  of  a  master  of  his  art,  that  he  is  alwaj'S  fresh  and  never  dull,  and  under 
such  conditions  it  is  no  wonder  that  readers  have  gained  confidence  both  in  his 
power  of  amusing  nnd  satisfying  them,  and  that  year   by  j'ear  his  popularity 
widens. ' — Court  Circular. 

ARM  I  NELL  :  A  Social  Romance.     Fourth  Edii:o7i. 
URITH  :  A  Story  of  Dartmoor.     Fifth  Edition, 

'  The  author  is  at  his  best.'— T/w^j. 

IN  THE  ROAR  OF  THE  SEA,     Sixth  Edition. 

'One  of  the  best  imagined  and  most  enthralling  stories  the  author  has  produced. 
— Saturday  Review. 

MRS.  CURGENVEN  OF  CURGENVEN.     Fourth  Editio7i. 

'  The  swing  of  the  narrative  is  splendid.' — Sussex  Daily  Neivs. 

CHEAP  JACK  ZITA.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  A  powerful  drama  of  human  passion.' — IVesttninster  Gazette. 
'A  story  worthy  the  author.' — National  Observer. 

THE  QUEEN  OF  LOVE.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  You  cannot  put  it  down  until  you  have  finished  it.' — Punch. 

'  Can  be  heartily  recommended  to  all  who  care  for  cleanly,  energetic,  and  interesting 
fiction.' — Sussex  Daily  News. 

KITTY  ALONE.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  A  strong  and  original  story,  teeming  with  graphic  description,  stirring  incident, 
and,  above  all,  with  vivid  and  enthralling  human  interest.'— Daily  Telegraph. 

NOEMI  :   A   Romance   of  the   Cave-Dvvellers.      Illustrated  by 

R.  CaTON  WOODVILLE.       Third  Edi(io7l. 
'  "  Nocmi  "  is  as  excellent  a  tale  of  fighting  and  adventure  as  one  may  wish  to  meet. 

The  narrative  also  runs  clear  and  sharp  as  the  Loire  itself.' — Fail  Mall  Gazette. 
'Mr.  Baring  Gould's  powerful  story  is  full  of  the  strong  lights  and  shadows  and 

vivid  colouring  to  which  he  has  accustomed  us.' — Standard. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  27 

THE     BROOM- SQUIRE.       Illustrated    by    Frank    Dadd. 

Fourth  Edition. 
'  A  strain  of  tenderness  is  woven  through  the  web  of  his  tragic  tale,  and  its  atmosphere 

is  sweetened  by  the  nobility  and  sweetness  of  the  heroine's  character.' — Daily  Neivs. 
*  A  story  of  exceptional  interest  that  seems  to  us  to  be  better  than  anything  he  has 

written  of  late.' — Speaker. 

THE  PENNYCOMEQUICKS.     Third  Edition, 
DARTMOOR  IDYLLS. 

'A  book  to  read,  and  keep  and  read  again  ;  for  the  genuine  fun  and  pathos  of  it  will 
not  early  lose  their  effect. ' — Vanity  Fair. 

GUAVAS  THE  TINNER.    Illustrated  by  Frank  Dadd.    Scco?id 

Edition. 
'  Mr.  Baring  Gould  Is  a  wizard  who  transports  us  into  a  region  of  visions,  often  lurid 

and  disquieting,  but  always  full  of  interest  and  enchantment.' — Spectator, 
'  In  the  v/eirdness  of  the  story,  in  the  faithfulness  with  which  the  characters  are 

depicted,  and  in  force  of  style,  it  closely  resembles  "  Alehalah. '" — Daily  TelegrapJi. 
'  There  is  a  kind  of  flavour  about  this  book  which  alone  elevates  it  above  the  ordinary 

novel.     The  story  itself  has  a  grandeur  in  harmony  with   the  wild  and  rugged 

scenery  which  is  its  setting/ — A  thenceiini. 

Gilbert  Parker's  Novels 

Crown  %vo.     6s.  each. 
PIERRE  AND  HIS  PEOPLE.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  Stories  happily  conceived  and  finely  executed.  There  is  strength  and  genius  in  Mr. 
Parker's  style.' — Daily  Telegraph. 

MRS.  FALCHION.     Fourth  Edition. 

'  A  splendid  studj'  of  character.' — Athencsutn. 

'  But  little  behind  anything  that  has  been  done  by  any  writer  of  our  time. ' — Pall 
Mall  Gazette.  'A  verj'  striking  and  admirable  novel.' — St.  James's  Gazette. 

THE  TRANSLATION  OF  A  SAVAGE. 

'  The  plot  is  original  and  one  difficult  to  work  out ;  but  Mr.  Parker  has  done  it  with 
great  skill  and  delicacy.  The  reader  who  is  not  interested  in  this  original,  fresh, 
and  well-told  tale  must  be  a  dull  person  indeed.' — Daily  Chronicle. 

THE  TRAIL  OF  THE  SWORD.     Fifth  Edition. 

'Everybody  with  a  soul  for  romance  will  thoroughly  enjoy  "The  Trail  of  the 
Sword."  ' — St.  Ja7itess  Gazette. 

'  A  rousing  and  dramatic  tale.  A  book  like  this,  In  which  swords  flash,  great  sur- 
prises are  undertaken,  and  daring  deeds  done,  in  which  men  and  women  live  and 
love  in  the  old  straightforward  passionate  way,  is  a  joy  inexpressible  to  the  re- 
viewer.'— Daily  Chronicle. 

WHEN  VALMOND  CAME  TO  PONTIAC  :  The  Story  of 
a  Lost  Napoleon.  Fourth  Edition. 
'  Here  we  find  romance — real,  breathing,  living  romance,  but  it  runs  flush  with  our 
own  times,  level  with  our  own  feelings.  The  character  of  Valmond  is  drawn  un- 
erringly ;  his  career,  brief  as  it  is,  is  placed  before  us  as  convincingly  as  history 
itself.  "The  book  must  be  read,  we  may  say  re-read,  for  any  one  thoroughly  to 
appreciate  Mr.  Parker's  delicate  touch  and  innate  sympathy  with  humanity.' — 
Pall  Mall  Gazette. 
'The  one  work  of  genius  which  1895  has  as  yet  produced.' — A^eiv  Age. 

AN  ADVENTURER   OF   THE  NORTH:   The  Last  Adven- 
tures of  '  Pretty  Pierre.'     Second  Edition. 
'The  present  book  is  full  of  fine  and  moving  stories  of  the  great  North,  and  it  will 
add  to  Mr.  Parker's  already  high  reputation.'— G/rti-^^w  Herald. 


28  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

THE  SEATS  OF  THE  MIGHTY.  Illustrated.   Eighth  Edition. 

'  The  best  thing  he  has  done  ;  one  of  the  best  things  that  any  one  has  done  lately.' — 

St.  Javiea's  Gazette. 
'  Mr.  Parker  seems  to  become  stronger  and  easier  with  every  serious  novel  that  he 

attempts.  .  .  ,  In  "  The  Seats  of  the  Mighty  "  he  shows  the  matured  power  which 

his  former  novels  have  led  us  to  expect,  and  has  produced  a  really  fine  historical 

novel.   .    .   .   Most  sincerely  is   Mr.  Parker  to  be  congratulated  on  the  finest 

novel  he  has  yet  written.' — Athentpum. 
'Mr.  Parker's  latest  book  places  him  in  the  front  rank  of  living  novelists.     "The 

Seats  of  the  Mighty"  is  a  great  book.' — Black  and  White. 
'One  of  the  strongest  stories  of  historical  interest  and  adventure  that  we  have  read 

for  many  a  daj'.  .  .   .  A  notable  and  successful  book.' — Speaker. 


Conan  Doyle.  ROUND  THE  RED  LAMP,  By  A.  Conan 
Doyle,  Author  of  '  The  White  Company,'  '  The  Adventures  of 
Sherlock  Hohnes,'  etc.  Fifth  Edition.  Crotvn  2>vo.  6s. 
'  The  book  is,  indeed,  composed  of  leaves  from  life,  and  is  far  and  away  the  best  view 
that  has  been  vouchsafed  us  behind  the  scenes  of  the  consulting-room.  It  is  very 
superior  to  "  The  Diary  of  a  late  Physician."  ' — Illustrated  London  JVews. 

Stanley  Weyman.    UNDER  THE  RED  ROBE.    By  Stanley 

Weym AN,  Author  of  '  A  Gentleman  of  France. '  With  Twelve  Illus- 
trations by  R.  Caton  Woodville.     TiveJfth  Edition.    Crown  %vo.  6s. 

'A  book  of  which  we  have  read  every  word  for  the  sheer  pleasure  of  reading,  and 
which  we  put  down  with  a  pang  that  we  cannot  forget  it  all  and  start  again.' — 
Westtninstcr  Gazette. 

'  Every  one  who  reads  books  nt  all  must  read  this  thrilling  romance,  from  the  first 
page  of  which  to  the  last  the  breathless  reader  is  haled  along.  An  inspiration  of 
"  manliness  and  courage."  ' — Daily  Chronicle. 

Lucas    Malet.       THE    WAGES     OF     SIN.       By    Lucas 

Malet.      Thirteejith  Edition.     Crown  '^vo.     6$. 

Lucas     Malet.      THE    CARISSIMA.      By    Lucas    Malet, 

Author  of 'The  Wages  of  Sin,' etc.     Third  Edition.     Crown  Svo.    6s. 

Arthur  Morrison.  TALES  OF  MEAN  STREETS.  By  Arthur 

Morrison.     Eojtrth  Edition.      Croiim  8vo.     6s. 
'  Told  with  consummate  art  and  extraordinary  detail.     He  tells  a  plain,  unvarnished 

tale,  and  the  very  truth  of  it  makes  for  l)eauty.     In  tlie  true  humanity  of  the  book 

lies  its  justification,  the  permanence  of  its  interest,  and  its  indubitable  triumph.' — 

A  thentpunt. 
'  A  great  book.   The  author's  method  is  amazingly  effective,  and  produces  a  thrilling 

sense  of  reality.     I'he  writer  lays  upon  us  a  master  hand.     The  book  is  simply 

appalling  and  irresistil)le  in  its  interest.      It  is  humorous  also  ;  without  humour 

it  would  not  make  the  mark  it  is  certain  to  make.'  —  World. 

Arthur  Morrison.    A  CHILD  OF  THE  JAGO.     By  Arthur 

]MoRRiSON.      Third  Edition.     Croivn  %vo.     6s. 
This,  the  first  long  story  which  Mr.   ^Morrison  has  written,  is  like  his  remarkable 

'  Tales  of  Mean  Streets,'  a  realistic  study  of  East  End  life. 
'  The  book  is  a  masterpiece.' — Pall  I\fall  Gazette. 
'Told  with  great  vigour  and  powerful  simplicity.' — AtJtettaum. 

Mrs.  Clifford.    A  FLASH  OF  SUMMER.    By  Mrs.  W.  K.  Cr.ir- 
FORD,  Author  of '  Aunt  Anne,'  etc.    Second  Edition.    Crown  Zvo.    6s. 

'  The  story  is  a  very  sad  and  a  very  lif  autiful  one,  exquisitely  told,  and  enriched  with 
many  subtle  touches  of  wise  and  tender  insight.  It  will,  undoubtedly,  add  to  its 
author's  reputation— already  high — in  the  ranks  of  novelists.' — Speaker, 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  29 

Emily  Lawless.     HURRISH.     By  the  Honble.  Emily  Law- 
less, Author  of  '  Maelcho,'  etc.     Fifth  Edition.     Crown  ^vo.     ds. 
A  reissue  of  Miss  Lawless'  most  popular  novel,  uniform  with  '  Maelcho.' 

Emily  Lawless.     MAELCHO  :  a  Sixteenth  Century  Romance. 

By  the  Honble.  Emily  Lawless.    Second  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.    (iS. 

'  A  really  great  book.' — Spectator. 

'There  is  no  keener  pleasure  in  life  than  the  recognition  of  genius.  Good  work  is 
commoner  than  it  used  to  be,  but  the  best  is  as  rare  as  ever.  All  the  more 
gladly,  therefore,  do  we  v.-elcome  in  "  Maelcho  "  a  piece  of  work  of  the  first  order, 
which  we  do  not  hesitate  to  describe  as  one  of  the  most  remarkable  literary 
achievements  of  this  generation.  Miss  Lawless  is  possessed  of  the  very  essence 
of  historical  genius.' — I\Ianchcsicr  Guardian. 

J.  H.  Findlater.    THE  GREEN  GRAVES  OF  BALGOWRIE. 
By  Jane  H.  FiNDLATER.     Third  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

'A  powerful  and  vivid  s\.oxy.' —Standard. 

'  A  beautiful  story,  sad  and  strange  as  truth  itself.' — Vanity  Fair. 

'  A  work  of  remarkable  interest  and  originality.' — National  Observer. 

'  A  very  charming  and  pathetic  tale.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

'  A  singularly  original,  clever,  and  beautiful  story.' — Guardian. 

'  "  The  Green  Graves  of  Balgowrie"  reveals  to  us  a  new  Scotch  writer  of  undoubted 

faculty  and  reserve  force.' — Spectator. 
'An  exquisite  idyll,  delicate,  affecting,  and  beautiful.' — Black  and  White. 

H.  G.  Wells.     THE  STOLEN  BACILLUS,  and  other  Stories. 
By  H.  G.  Wells,  Author  of  'The  Time  Machine.'   Crown  Svo.    6s. 

'  The  ordinary  reader  of  fiction  may  be  glad  to  know  that  these  stories  are  eminently 
readable  from  one  coverto  the  other,  but  they  are  more  than  that  ;  they  are  the 
impressions  of  a  very  striking  imagination,  which,  it  would  seem,  has  a  great  deal 
within  its  reach.' — Saturday  Review. 

H.  G.Wells.  THE  PLATTNER  STORY  AND  Others.   By  H. 

G.  Wells.     Second  Edition.     Croivn  Svo.     6s. 
'Weird  and  mysterious,  they  seem  to  hold  the  reader  as  by  a  magic  spell.' — Scotstnan. 
'Such  is  the  fascination  of  this  writer's  skill  that  you  unhesitatingly  prophesy  that 

none  of  the  many  readers,  however  his  flesh  do  creep,  will  relinquish  the  volume 

ere  he  has  read  from  first  word  to  last.' — Black  and  iPhite. 
'  No  volume  has  appeared  for  a  long  time  so  likely  to  give  equal  pleasure  to  the 

simplest  reader  and  to  the  most  fastidious  critic' — Academy. 
'  Mr.  Wells  is  a  magician  skilled  in  wielding  that  most  potent  of  all  spells — the  fear 

of  the  unknown.' — Daily  Telegraph. 

E.  F.  Benson.     DODO  :  A  DETAIL  OF  THE  DAY.   By  E.  F. 

Benson.     Sixteenth  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 
'  A  delightfully  witty  sketch  of  society.' — Spectator. 
'  A  perpetual  feast  of  epigram  and  paradox.' — Speaker. 

E.  F.  Benson.    THE  RUBICON.    By  E.  F.  Benson,  Author  of 
'Dodo.'     Fifth  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
'  An  exceptional  achievement ;  a  notable  advance  on  his  previous  v/orV.'— National 
Observer. 

Mrs.    Oliphant.      SIR    ROBERT'S    FORTUNE.      By    Mrs. 

Oliphant.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
'  Full  of  her  own  peculiar  charm  of  style  and  simple,  subtle  chaxacter-painting  comes 
her  new  gift,  the  delightful  story  before  us.     The  scene  mostly  lies  in  the  moors, 
and  at  the  touch  of  the  authoress  a  Scotch  moor  becomes  a  living  thing,  strong, 
tender,  beaulii'ui,  and  changeful.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 


30  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

Mrs.  Olipliant.     THE  TWO   MARYS.    13y  Mrs.  Oliphant. 
Second  Ediiio7i.     Croivn  Zvo.     6j-. 

V/.E.Norris.  MATTHEW  AUSTIN.  By  W.  E.  Norris,  Author 

of  '  iMademoiselle  de  Mcrsac,'  etc.    FoiD'th  Edition.    CrownZvo.    6s. 

"Matthew  Austin"  may  safely  be  pronounced  one  of  the  most  intellectually  satis- 
factory and  morally  bracing  novels  of  the  current  year.' — Daily  Tclerraf'h. 

W.   E.   Norris.     HIS   GRACE.     By  W.  E.   Norris.      Third 

Edition.     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

'  Mr.  Norris  has  drawn  a  really  fine  character  in  the  Duke  of  Hurstbourne,  at  once 
unconventional  and  very  true  to  the  conventionalities  of  life.' — Atheticeum. 

W.  E.  Norris.    THE   DESPOTIC    LADY    AND    OTHERS. 
By  W.  E.  Norris.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'  A  budget  of  good  fiction  of  which  no  one  will  tire.' — Scotsman. 

W.  E.  Norris.     CLARISSA    FURIOSA.    By  W.  E.  Norris, 

Author  of  'The  Rogue,'  etc.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'  One  of  Mr.  Norris's  very  best  novels.  As  a  story  it  is  admirable,  as  a.  jt'u  cE esprit 
it  is  capital,  as  a  lay  sermon  studded  with  gems  of  wit  and  wisdom  it  is  a  model 
which  will  not,  we  imagine,  find  an  efficient  imitator.' — The  World. 

'The  best  novel  he  has  written  for  some  time:  a  story  which  is  full  of  admirable 
character-drawing. ' — Tlie  Standard. 

Robert  Barr.     IN  THE  MIDST  OF  ALARMS.     By  Robert 

Barr.      Third  Edition.     Crozun  ^vo.     6s. 

'  A  book  which  has  abundantly  satisfied  us  by  its  capital  humour,' — Daily  Chronicle. 
'ISIr.  Barr  has  achieved  a  triumph  whereof  he  has  every  reason  to  be  proud.'— /"a// 

Mall  Gazette. 

J.    Maclaren   Cobban.      THE    KING    OF    ANDAMAN  :    A 
Saviour  of  Society.     By  J.  Maclaren  Cobban.     Crozvn  Svo.     6s. 

'  An  unquestionably  interesting  book.  It  would  not  surprise  us  if  it  turns  out  to  be 
the  most  interesting  novel  of  the  season,  for  it  contains  one  character,  at  least, 
who  has  in  him  the  root  of  immortality,  and  the  book  itself  is  ever  exhaling  the 
sweet  savour  of  the  unexpected.  .  .  .  Plot  is  forgotten  and  incident  fades,  and 
only  the  really  human  endures,  and  throughout  this  book  there  stands  out  in  bold 
and  beautiful  relief  its  high-souled  and  chivalric  protagonist,  James  the  Master 
of  Hutcheon,  the  King  of  Andaman  himself.' — Pall  Mall  Gazette. 

J.  Maclaren  Cobban.     WILT  THOU  HAVE  THIS  WOMAN  ? 

By  J.  M.  Cobban,  Author  of '  The  King  of  Andaman.'   Crown  Svo.  6s. 

'  Mr.  Cobban  has  the  true  story-teller's  art.  He  arrests  attention  at  the  outset,  and 
he  retains  it  to  the  and.'— Birmingham  Post. 

H.  Morrah.    A  SERIOUS  COMEDY.    By  Herbert  Morrah. 

Crown  Svo.     6s. 

'This  volume  is  well  worthy  of  its  title.  The  theme  has  seldom  beeu  picocatcd  with 
m'..re  freshncas  or  more  foico.' — .Scol^f/iuu. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  31 

K.  Morrali.  THE  FAITHFUL  CITY.  By  Herbert  Morrah, 
Author  of  'A  Serious  Comedy.'  Crown  8vo.  6s. 
'  Conveys  a  suggestion  of  welrdncss  and  horror,  until  finally  he  convinces  and 
enthrals  the  reader  with  his  mysterious  savages,  his  gigantic  tower,  and  his 
uncompromising  men  and  v>-omen.  This  is  a  haunting,  mysterious  book,  not 
without  an  element  of  stupendous  grandeur.' — Athcnccnin, 

L.  B.  Walford.     SUCCESSORS  TO  THE  TITLE.     By  Mrs. 

Walford,  Author  of  '  Mr.  Smith,'  etc.  Second  Edition.  CrownSvo.  6s. 

'  The  story  is  fresh  and  healthy  from  beginning  to  finish  ;  and  our  liking  for  the  two 

simple  people  who  are  the  successors  to  the  title  mounts  steadily,  and  ends  almost 

in  respect.' — Scoisfuan. 

T.  L.  Paton.     A  HOME  IN  INVERESK.     By  T.  L.  Paton. 

Crown  8z^<?.     6s. 
'A  pleasant  and  well-written  story.' — Daily  Ch?-onicle. 

Jolin  Davidson.    MISS  ARMSTRONG'S  AND  OTHER  CIR- 
CUMSTANCES.    By  John  Davidson.     Crown  8vo.    6s. 

'  Throughout  the  volume  there  is  a  strong  vein  of  originality,  and  a  knowledge  of 
human  nature  that  are  worthy  of  the  highest  praise.' — Scotsman. 

M.  M.  Dowie.  GALLIA.  By  Menie  Muriel  Dowie,  Author 
of  'A  Girl  in  the  Carpathians.'  Third  Edition.  Crown  Svo.  6s. 
'The  style  is  generally  admirable,  the  dialogue  not  seldom  brilliant,  the  situations 
surprising  in  their  freshness  and  originality,  while  the  subsidiary  as  well  as  the 
principal  characters  live  and  move,  and  the  story  itself  is  readable  from  title-page 
to  colophon.' — Saturday  Review. 

J.  A.  Barry.     IN  THE  GREAT  DEEP  :   Tales  of  the  Sea. 
By  J.  A.  Barry.    Author  of  '  Steve  Brown's  Bunyip.'    Crown  8vo.  6s. 
'A  collection  of  really  admirable  short  stories  of  the  sea,  very  simply  told,  and  placed 
before  the  reader  in  pithy  and  telling  English.' — IVestftiinster  Gazette. 

J.  B.  Burton.    IN  THE  DAY  OF  ADVERSITY.    By  J.  Bloun- 

DELLE  Burton.'     Second  Edition.     CfvwnSvo.    6s. 

'  Unusually  interesting  and  full  of  highly  dramatic  situations.' — Cuardiar.. 

J.  B.  Burton.   DENOUNCED.    By  J.  Bloundelle  Burton. 
Second  Edition,     Crown  8vo.    6s. 
The  plot  is  an   original  one,  and  the  local  colouring  is  laid  on  with  a  delicacy 
and  an  accuracy  of  detail  which  denote  the  true  artist.' — Broad  Armv. 

W.    C.    Scully.      THE    WHITE    HECATOMB.      By  W.    C. 

Scully,  Author  of  '  Kafir  Stories.'     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

'  The  author  is  so  steeped  in  Kaffir  lore  and  legend,  and  so  thoroughly  well  acquainted 
with  native  sagas  and  traditional  ceremonial  that  he  is  able  to  attract  the  reader 
by  the  easy  familiarity  with  which  he  handles  his  characters.' — South  Africa. 

'  It  reveals  a  marvellously  intimate  understanding  of  the  Kaf&r  mind,  allied  with 
literary  gifts  of  no  mean  order.' — African  Critic. 

H.  Jolmston.     DR.   CONGALTON'S   LEGACY.    By  Henry 
ToHNSTON.      Croivn  8vo.     6s. 
'  A  worthy  and  permanent  contribution  to  Scoltl^h  liler^tuie.' — Ciuijow  tierald. 


32  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

J.  F.  Brewer.     THE  SPECULATORS.    By  J.   F.   Brewer. 

Crown  Sz'o.     6s, 
'  A  pretty  bit  of  comedy.  ...     It  is  undeniably  a  clever  hooK.'— Academy. 
'  A  clever  and  amusing  story.     It  makes  capital  out  of  the  comic  aspects  of  culture, 

and  will  be  read  wuh  amusement  by  every  intellectual  xczidQi.'— Scotsman. 
'A  remarkably  clever  study.' — Vanity  Feiir. 

Julian  Corbett.    A  BUSINESS  IN  GREAT  WATERS.    By 

Julian  Corbett.     Crozun  ?>io.     6s. 

'  Mr.  Corbett  writes  with  immense  spirit,  and  the  book  is  a  thoroughly  enjoyable 
one  in  all  respects.  The  salt  of  the  ocean  is  in  it,  and  the  right  heroic  ring  re- 
sounds through  its  gallant  adventures.' — Speaker. 

L.  Cope  Cornford.     CAPTAIN  JACOBUS  :  A  ROMANCE  OF 
THE  ROAD.    By  L.  Cope  Cornford.    Illustrated.    Crown^vo.   6s. 
'  An  exceptionally  good  story  of  adventure  and  character.' — World. 

C.   p.  WoUey.      THE   OUEENSBERRY   CUP.      A  Tale  of 

Adventure.     By   Clive^'Phillips   Wolley.     Illustrated.     Crown 
^vo.     6s. 
'  A  book  which  will  delight  boys :  a  book  which  upholds  the  healthy  schoolboy  code 
of  morality.' — Scots niaji. 

L.  Daintrey.  THE  KING  OF  ALBERIA.  A  Romance  of 
the  Balkans.     By  Laura  Daintrey.      Crown  ^vo.     6s. 

'  Miss  Daintrey  seems  to  have  an  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  people  and  politics 
of  the  Balkan  countries  in  which  the  scene  of  her  lively  and  picturesque  romance 
is  laid.' — Glasgow  He-raid. 

M.  A.  Owen.  THE  DAUGHTER  OF  ALOUETTE.  By 
Mary  A.  Owen.     Croivn  %vo.     6s. 

A  story  of  life  among  the  American  Indians. 
'A  fascinating  story.' — Litcraty  Jl'orld. 

Mrs.  Pinsent.     CHILDREN  OF  THIS  WORLD.     By  Ellen 
F.  Pinsent,  Author  of  'Jenny's  Case.'     Crozvn  8fi?.     6s.  ^ 
'  INIrs.  Pinsent's  new  novel  has  plenty  of  vigour,  variety,  and  good  writing.     There 
are  certainty  of  purpose,  strength  of  touch,  and  clearness  of  vision.' — Aihcnteum. 

Clark  Russell.  MY  DANISH  SWEETHEART.  By  W. 
Clark  Russell,  Author  of  'The  Wreck  of  the  Grosvenor,'  etc. 
Illustrated.     Fourth  Edition.      Crozvn  Svo.     6s. 

G.  Manville  Fenn.  AN  ELECTRIC  SPARK.  By  G.  Manville 
Fenn,  Author  of  '  The  Vicar's  Wife,'  'A  Double  Knot,'  etc.  Second 
Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s, 

L.  S.  McChesney.     UNDER  SHADOW  OF  TPIE  MISSION. 
By  L.  S.  McChesney.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 
'  Those  whose  minds  are  open  to  the  liner  issues  of  life,  who  can  appreciate  graceful 
thought  and  refined  expression  of  it,  from  them  this  volume  will  receive  a  welcome 
as  enthusiastic  as  it  will  be  based  on  critical  knowledge.' — Church  Times. 

Konald   Ross.     THE   SPIRIT   OF   STORM.     By   Ronald 

Ross,  Author  of 'The  Child  of  Ocean.'     Crown  %vo.     6s. 

A  romaucc  of  the  Sea.  '  Weird,  powerful,  and  impressive.'— i'/ac/t  and  White. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  33 

R.  Pryce.    TIME  AND  THE  WOMAN.    By  Richard  Pryce. 

Second  Edition.     Crown  Svo.     6s. 

Mrs.  Watson.     THIS  MAN^S  DOMINION.     By  the  Author 
of  '  A  High  Little  World. '     Second  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.     6s. 

Marriott     Watson.       DIOGENES      OF     LONDON.       By 

H.  B.  Marriott  Watson.     Crown  8w.     Btickram.    6s. 

M.   Gilchrist.    THE  STONE  DRAGON.     By  Murray   Gil- 
christ.    Crown  Zvo.    Buckram.    6s. 

'  The  author's  faults  are  atoned  for  by  certain  positive  and  admirable  merits.  The 
romances  have  not  their  counterpart  in  modern  literature,  and  to  read  them  is  a 
unique  experience.' — National  Obscft'er. 

E.  Dickinson.    A  VICAR'S  WIFE.    By  Evelyn  Dickinson. 

Crown  Svo.     6s. 
E.  M.  Gray.     ELS  A.     By  E.  M 'Queen  Gray.    Crozau  Svo.    6s. 


3/6 


THREE-AND-SIXPENNY    NOVELS 

Crown  Svo. 
DERRICK  VAUGHAN,  NOVELIST.     By  Edna  Lyall. 
MARGERY  OF  QUETHER.     By  S.  Baring  Gould. 
JACQUETTA.    By  S.  Baring  Gould. 
SUBJECT  TO  VANITY.    By  Margaret  Benson. 
THE    SIGN   OF   THE    SPIDER.     By  Bertram    Mitford. 
THE  MOVING  FINGER.     By  Mary  Gaunt. 
JACO  TRELOAR.     By  J.  H.  Pearce. 
THE  DANCE  OF  THE  HOURS.     By 'Vera.' 
A  WOMAN  OF  FORTY.     By  Esme  Stuart. 
A     CUMBERER    OF    THE    GROUND.      By    Constance 

Smith. 
THE  SIN  OF  ANGELS.   By  Evelyn  Dickinson. 
AUT   DIABOLUS   AUT  NIHIL.     By  X.  L. 
THE  COMING  OF  CUCULAIN.     By  Standish  O'Grady. 
THE    GODS   GIVE   MY    DONKEY    WINGS.      By  Angus 

Evan  Abbott. 
THE  STAR  GAZERS.     By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 
THE  POISON  OF  ASPS.     By  R.  Orton  Prowse. 
THE  QUIET  MRS.  FLEMING.     By  R.  Pryce. 
DISENCHANTMENT.    By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 
THE  SQUIRE  OF  W'ANDALES.    By  A.  Shield. 
A  REVEREND  GENTLEMAN.     By  J.  M.  Cobban. 


34  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

A  DEPLORABLE  AFFAIR.     By  W.  E.  Norris.  : 

A  CAVALIER'S  LADYE.     By  Mrs.  Dicker. 

THE  PRODIGALS.     By  Mrs.  Oliphant. 

THE  SUPPLANTER.     By  P.  Neumann. 

A  MAN  WITH  BLACK  EYELASHES.      By  H.  A.  KENNEDY. 

A  HANDFUL  OF  EXOTICS.     By  S.  Gordon. 

AN  ODD  EXPERIMENT.    By  Hannah  Lynch. 


2/6 


HALF-CROWN      NOVELS 

A  Series  of  Novels  by  popular  AtUhors. 

1.  HOVENDEN,  V.C.     By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 

2.  ELI'S  CHILDREN.    By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 

3.  A  DOUBLE  KNOT.    By  G.  Manville  Fenn. 

4.  DISARMED.    By  M.  Betham  Edwards. 

5.  A  MARRIAGE  AT  SEA.    By  W.  Clark  Russell. 

6.  IN  TENT  AND  BUNGALOW.    By  the  Author  of  '  Indian 

Idylls.' 

7.  MY  STEWARDSHIP.     By  E.  M'Queen  Gray. 

8.  JACK'S  FATHER.     By  W.  E.  NoRRis. 

9.  JIM  B. 

lo.  THE  PLAN  OF  CAMPAIGN.     By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 
ir.  MR.  BUTLER'S  WARD.     By  F.  Mabel  Robinson. 
12.  A  LOST  ILLUSION.     By  Leslie  Keith. 


Lynn  Linton.  THE  TRUE  HISTORY  OF  JOSHUA  DAVID- 
SON, Christian  and  Communist.  By  E,  Lynn  Linton.  Eleventh 
Edition.     Post  Svo.     is. 


Books  for  Boys  and  Girls      olA 

A  Series  of  Books  by  well-kno'iun  Authors^  well  illustrated.        ^\ 

1.  THE  ICELANDER'S  SWORD.     By  S.  Baring  Gould. 

2.  TWO   LITTLE   CHILDREN   AND    CHING.     By   Edith 

E.  CUTIIELL. 

3.  TODDLEBEN'S  HERO.    By  M.  M.  Blake. 

4.  ONLY  A  GUARD-ROOM  DOG.    By    Edith  E.  Cuthell. 

5.  THE  DOCTOR  OF  THE  JULIET.    By  Harry  Colling- 

WOOD. 

6.  MASTER  ROCKAFELLAR'S  VOYAGE.     By  W.   Clark 

RUSSKLL. 

7.  SYD  BELTON  :    Or,  The  Boy  who  would  not  go  to  Sea. 

Cy  G.  Manville  Fenn. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  35 


3/6 


The  Peacock  Library 

A   Series   of  Books  for   Girls   by   well-known    Authors, 
handsomely  bound  in  bine  and  silver,  and  zvell  illustrated. 

1.  A  PINCH  OF  EXPERIENCE.     By  L.  B.  Walford. 

2.  THE  RED  GRANGE.     By  Mrs.  Molesworth. 

3.  THE  SECRET  OF  MADAME  DE  MONLUC.      By  the 

Author  of  '  Mdle  Mori.' 

4.  DUMPS.     By  Mrs.  Parr,  Author  of  'Adam  and  Eve.' 

5.  OUT  OF  THE  FASHION.    By  L.  T.  Meade. 

6.  A  GIRL  OF  THE  PEOPLE.    By  L.  T.  Meade. 

7.  HEPSY  GIPSY.     By  L.  T.  Meade,     is.  6d. 

8.  THE  HONOURABLE  MISS.    By  L.  T.  Meade. 

9.  MY  LAND  OF  BEULAH.     By  Mrs.  Leitii  Adams. 


University    Extension   Series 

A  series  of  books  on  historical,  Hterary,  and  scienlific  subjects,  suitable 
for  extension  students  and  home-reading  circles.  Each  volume  is  com- 
plete in  itself,  and  the  subjects  are  treated  by  competent  writers  in  a 
broad  and  philosophic  spirit. 

Edited  by  J.  E.  SYMES,  M.A., 

Principal  of  University  College,  Nottingham. 

Crown  Svo.     Price  {with  some  exceptions)  2s.  6d. 

The  following  volumes  are  ready : — 

THE  INDUSTRIAL  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND.     By  H.  de  B.  Gibbins, 
D.Litt.,  M.A,,  late  Scholar  of  Wadham  College,  Oxen.,  Cobden  Prizeman. 
Fifth  Editio7i,  Revised.      With  Maps  and  Plans,     y. 
'A  compact  and  clear  story  of  our  industrial  development.     A  study  of  this  concise 
but  luminous  book  cannot  fail  to  give  the  reader  a  clear  insight  into  the  principal 
phenomena  of  our  industrial  history.    The  editor  and  publishers  are  to  be  congrat- 
ulated on  this  first  volume  of  their  venture,  and  we  shall  look  with  expectant 
interest  for  the  succeeding  volumes  of  the  series.' —  University  Extension  Journal, 

A  HISTORY  OF  ENGLISH  POLITICAL  ECONOMY.     By  L.  L.  PmCE, 
M.A.,  Fellow  of  Oriel  College,  Oxon.     Second  Edition. 

PROBLEMS  OF  POVERTY :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Industrial  Conditions  of 
the  Poor.     By  J.  A.  HOBSON,  M.A.     Third  Edition. 

VICTORIAN  POETS.     By  A.  Sharp. 

THE  FRENCH  REVOLUTION.     By  J.  E.  Sy^IES.  M.A. 

PSYCHOLOGY,     By  F.  S.  Granger,  M.A. 


36  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

THE  EVOLUTION  OF  PLANT  LIFE :  Lower  Forms.     By  G.  TvLvssee. 

IVi^/i  Illustratiotis. 
AIR  AND  WATER.     Professor  V.  B.  Lewes,  M.A.     Ilhistrated. 
THE  CHEMISTRY  OF   LIFE  AND   HEALTH.     By  C.  W.   KiMMixs, 

M.A.     Illustrated, 

THE  MECHANICS  OF  DAILY  LIFE.    By  V.  P.  Sells,  M.A.   Illustraied. 

ENGLISH  SOCIAL  REFORMERS.     H.  DE  B.  Gibbins,  D.Litt..  M.A. 

ENGLISH    TRADE    AND    FINANCE    IN    THE    SEVENTEENTH 
CENTURY.     By  W.  A.  S.  Hewins,  B.A. 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OF  FIRE.     The  Elementary  Principles  of  Chemistry. 
By  M.  M.  Pattison  Muir,  M.A.     Ilhistrated. 

A  TEXT-BOOK  OF  AGRICULTURAL   BOTANY.     By  M.  C.  Potter, 
M.A..  F.L.S.     Illustrated,     y.  6d. 

THE  VAULT  OF   HEAVEN.     A   Popular   Introduction   to   Astronomy. 
By  R.  A.  Gregory.     With  numerous  Illustratlotis. 

METEOROLOGY.     The  Elements  of  Weather  and  Climate.     By  H.    N. 
Dickson,  F.R.S.E.,  F.R.  Met.  Soc.     Illustrated. 

A  MANUAL  OF  ELECTRICAL  SCIENCE.     By  George  J.   Burch, 
M.A.      With  numerous  I llustratio?is.     3?. 

THE  EARTH.     An  Introduction  to  Physiography.    By  Evan  Small,  IvI  A. 
Illustrated. 

INSECT  LIFE.     By  F.  W.  Theobald,  M.A.    Illustrated. 

ENGLISH    POETRY   FROM    BLAKE   TO   BROWNING.     By   W.    M. 

Dixon,  M.A. 
ENGLISH  LOCAL  GOVERNMENT.     By  E.  Jenks,  M.A.,  Professor  of 

Law  at  University  College,  Liverpool. 
THE  GREEK  VIEW  OF  LIFE.     By  G.  L.  Dickinson,  Fellow  of  King's 

College,  Cambridge. 

Social  Questions   of  To-day 

Edited  by  H.  de  B.  GIBBINS,  D.Litt.,  M.A. 

Crozvn  2>vo.     2s.  6d.  \  /" 

A  series  of  volumes  upon  those  topics  of  social,  economic,  ^  j  yj 

and  industrial  interest  that  are  at  the  present  moment  fore-  1 

most  in  the  public  mind.  Each  volume  of  the  series  is  written  by  an 
author  who  is  an  acknowledged  authority  upon  the  subject  with  which 
he  deals. 

The  following  Volumes  of  the  Series  are  ready  : — 
TRADE    UNIONISM -NEW    AND    OLD.     By  G.  Howell,  Author  of 
'  The  Conflicts  of  Capital  and  Labour.'     Second  Edition. 

THE   CO-OPERATIVE  MOVEMENT   TO-DAY.      By  G.  J.  Holyoake, 
Author  of  '  The  History  of  Co-Operation.'     Second  Edition. 

MUTUAL  THRIFT.     By  Rev.   J.   Frome  Wilkinson,   M.A..  Author  of 
'  The  Friendly  Society  Movement.' 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  37 

PROBLEMS  OF  POVERTY  :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Industrial  Conditions  of 
the  Poor.     By  J.  A.  Hobson,  M.A.     Third  Edition. 

THE  COMMERCE  OF  NATIONS.     By  C.  F.  Bastaple,  M.A.,  Professor 
of  Economics  at  Trinity  College,  Dublin. 

THE  ALIEN  INVASION.     By  W.   H.   Wilkins,   B.A.,  Secretary  to  the 
Society  for  Preventing  the  Immigration  of  Destitute  Aliens. 

THE  RURAL  EXODUS.     By  P.  Anderson  Graham. 

LAND  NATIONALIZATION.     By  Harold  Cox,  B.A. 

A   SHORTER   WORKING   DAY.     By  H.  de  B.  Gibbins,  D.Litt.,  M.A., 
and  R.  A.  Hadfield,  of  the  Hecla  Works,  Sheffield. 

BACK  TO  THE  LAND  :  An  Inquiry  into  the  Cure  for  Rural  Depopulation. 
By  H.  E.  Moore. 

TRUSTS,  POOLS  AND  CORNERS:  As  affecting  Commerce  and  Industry. 
By  J.  Stephen  Jeans,  M.R.I. ,  F.S.S. 

THE  FACTORY  SYSTEM.     By  R.  Cooke  Taylor. 

THE  STATE  AND  ITS  CHILDREN.    By  Gertrude  Tuckwell. 

WOMEN'S  WORK.     By  Lady  Dilke,  Miss  Bulley,  and  Miss  Whitley. 

MUNICIPALITIES    AT   WORK.     The   Municipal   Policy  of  Six  Great 
Towns,  and  its  Influence  on  their  Social  Welfare.  By  Frederick  Dolman. 

SOCIALISM  AND  MODERN  THOUGHT.     By  M.  Kaufmann. 

THE  HOUSING  OF  THE  W^ORKING  CLASSES.     By  R.  F.  Bowmaker. 

MODERN  CIVILIZATION  IN  SOME  OF  ITS  ECONOMIC  ASPECTS. 
By  W,  Cunningham,  D.D.,  Fellow  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge. 

THE  PROBLEM   OF  THE  UNEMPLOYED.       By  J.  A.  Hobson,  B.A., 
Author  of  '  The  Problems  of  Poverty. ' 

LIFE  IN  WEST  LONDON.   By  Arthur  Sherwell,  M.A.    Secoiid Edition, 


Classical  Translations 

Editedby  H.  F.  FOX,  M.  A. ,  Fellow  and  Tutor  of  Brasenose  College,  Oxford. 

Messrs.  Methuen  are  issuing  a  New  Series  of  Translations  from  the 
Greek  and  Latin  Classics.  They  have  enlisted  the  services  of  some 
of  the  best  Oxford  and  Cambridge  Scholars,  and  it  is  their  intention  that 
the  Series  shall  be  distinguished  by  literary  excellence  as  well  as  by 
scholarly  accuracy. 

/FSCHYLUS— Agamemnon,  Choephoroe,  Eumenides.  Translated  by  Lewis 
Campbell,  LL.D.  ,  late  Professor  of  Greek  at  St.  Andrews,     5^-. 

CICERO— De  Oratore  I.     Translated  by  E.  N.  P.  Moor,  M.A.     3^.  dd. 

CICERO  — Select  Orations  (Pro  Milone,  Pro  Murena,  Philippic  11.,  In 
Catilinam).  Translated  by  H.  E.  D.  Blakiston,  M.A.,  Fellow  and 
Tutor  of  Trinity  College,  Oxford.     5^. 


38  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

CICERO— De  Natura  Deorum.  Translated  by  F.  Brooks,  M.A.,  late 
Scholar  of  Balliol  College,  Oxford,     ^s.  6d. 

LUCIAN — Six  Dialogues  (Nigrinus,  Icaro-Menippus,  The  Cock,  The  Ship,  The 
Parasite,  The  Lover  of  Falsehood).  Translated  by  S.  T.  Ir  win,  M.  A. ,  Assis- 
tant Master  at  Clifton  ;  late  Scholar  of  Exeter  College,  Oxford,     y.  6d. 

SOPHOCLES— Electra  and  Ajax.     Translated  by  E.   D.   A.   Morshead, 

M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Winchester.     2s.  6d. 

TACITUS— Agricola  and  Germania.  Translated  by  R.  B.  Townshexd, 
late  Scholar  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge.     2s.  6d. 


Educational  Books 


CLASSICAL 

PLAUTI    BACCHIDES.      Edited  with   Introduction,    Commentary,    and 
Critical  Notes  by  J.  M'COSH,  M.A.     Fca/>.  a^to.     \q.s.  6d. 
'The  notes  are  copious,  and  contain  a  great  deal  of  information  that  is  good  and 
useful.' — Ciassical  Review. 

TACITI  AGRICOLL  With  Introductionr  Notes,  Map,  etc.  By  R.  F. 
Davis,  M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Weymouth  College.     Ci-owji  ^vo.     2s. 

TACITI  GERMANIA,     By  the  same  Editor.     C7-07vn  8vo.    2s, 

HERODOTUS :  EASY  SELECTIONS.  With  Vocabulary.  By  A.  C. 
LiDDELi.,  M. A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Nottingham  High  School.  Fc(7./>. 
Svo.     IS.  6d. 

SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  ODYSSEY.  By  E.  D.  Stone,  M. A.,  late 
Assistant  Master  at  Eton.     FcaJ>.  Svo.     is.  6d. 

PLAUTUS  :  THE  CAPTIVI.  Adapted  for  Lower  Forms  by  J.  H.  Fresse, 
M.A. ,  late  Fellow  of  St.  John's,  Cambridge,     is.  6d. 

DEMOSTHENES  AGAINST  CONON  AND  CALLICLES.  Edited  with 
Notes  and  Vocabulary,  by  F.  Darwin  Swift,  M.A.,  formerly  Scholar 
of  Queen's  College,  Oxford ;  Assistant  Master  at  Dcnstone  College. 
Fcap.  Svo.     2s. 

GERMAN 

A  COMPANION  GERMAN  GRAMMAR.  By  H.  de  B.  Ginr.ixs,  D.Litt.. 
M.A.,  Assistant  Master  at  Nottingham  High  School.    Cro'w/i  8:v.    is.  6d. 

GERMAN  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLATION.  By  E. 
M 'Queen  Gray.     C?v7c>fi  Svo.    2s.  6d. 

SCIENCE 

THE  WORLD  OF  SCIENCE.  Including  Clicmistry,  Heat,  Light,  Sotmd. 
Alagnctism,  Electricity,  Botany,  Zoology,  Physiology,  Astronomy,  and 
Geology,  By  R.  Elliott  Steel,  M.A.,  F.C.S.  147  Illustrations. 
Seco7?d  Edition.  Croivn  Svo.  2s.  6d. 
'  If  ]\Ir.  Steel  is  to  be  placed  second  to  any  for  this  quality  of  lucidity,  it  is  only  to 
Huxley  hlinscir;  and  to  be  named  in  the  same  breath  with  this  master  of  the 
craft  of  teacliing  is  to  be  accredited  with  the  clearness  of  style  antl  simplicity  of 
arrangement  that  belong  to  thorough  mastery  of  a  subject.' — Parents'  Kevieiv. 

ELEMENTARY  LIGHT.     By  R.  E.  Steel.    With  numerous  Illustrations. 

Croicji  Zvo.     .\s.  6d. 


Messrs.  Methuen's  List  39 

ENGLISH 

ENGLISH    RECORDS.     A  Companion  to  the  History  of  England.     By 
H.  E.  Malden,  M.A.     Crowji  Svo.     y.  6d. 
A  book  which  aims  at  concentrating  information  upon  dates,  genealogy,  officials,  con- 
stitutional documents,  etc.,  which  is  usually  found  scattered  in  different  volumes. 

THE  ENGLISH  CITIZEN  :  HIS  RIGHTS  AND  DUTIES.  By  H.  E. 
Malden,  M.A.  is.  6d. 
'  The  book  goes  over  the  same  ground  as  is  traversed  in  the  school  books  on  this 
subject  written  to  satisfy  the  requirements  of  the_  Education  Code_.  It  would 
serve  admirably  the  purposes  of  a  text-book,  as  it  is  well  based  in  historical 
facts,  and  keeps  quite  clear  of  party  m^.tt&rs.'—Scots7!Ta7t. 

METHUEN'S    COMMERCIAL    SERIES 

Edited  Ly  II.  de  B.  GIBBINS,  D.Litt.,  M.A. 
BRITISH   COAIMERCE  AND   COLONIES   FROM    ELIZABETH  TO 

VICTORIA.     By  li.  de  B.  Gibbixs,  D.Litt.,  M.A.,  Author  of  'The 

Industrial  History  of  England,'  etc.,  etc.,     2S. 
COMMERCIAL    EXAMINATION    PAPERS.       By   H.   DE  B.  Gibbins, 

D.Litt.,  M.A. ,  IS.  6d. 
THE  ECONOMICS  OF   COM?\IERCE.     By  H.  DE  B.  Gibbins,  D.Litt., 

M.A.     i^.  6d. 
A    MANUAL    OF    FRENCH    COMMERCIAL    CORRESPONDENCE. 

By  S.  E.  Bally,  Modern  Language  Master  at  the  Manchester  Grammar 

School.     2s. 
GERMAN    COMMERCIAL    CORRESPONDENCE.     By  S.   E.   Bally, 

Assistant  Master  at  the  Manchester  Grammar  School.    Crown  8vo.  2s.  6d. 
A  FRENCH  COMMERCIAL  READER.     By  S.  E.  Bally.     2s. 
COMMERCIAL  GEOGRAPHY,  with  special  reference  to  Trade  Routes, 

New  Markets,  and  Manufacturing  Districts.     By  L.  W.  Lyde,  M.A.,  of 

the  Academy,  Glasgow.     2s. 
A  PRIMER  OF  BUSINESS.    By  S.  Jackson,  M.A.     xs.  6d. 
COMMERCIAL  ARITHMETIC.     By  F.  G.  Taylor,  M.A.     is.  6d. 
PRECIS  WRITING  AND  OFFICE  CORRESPONDENCE.      By  E.  E. 

Whitfield,  M.A. 

WORKS  BY  A.  M.  M.  STEDMAN,  M.A. 

INITIA  LATINA:  Easy  Lessons  on  Elementary  Accidence.    Secorid  Edition, 

Fcap.  8zv.     Ts, 
FIRST  LATIN  LESSONS.     Fourth  Edition.     Croum  %vo.     2S. 
FIRST    LATIN    READER.     With   Notes  adapted  to  the  Shorter   Latin 

Primer  and  Vocabulary.      T/iird  Edition.     i8fno.     is.  6d. 
EASY  SELECTIONS   FROM   CAESAR.     Part   i.     The   Helvetian   War. 

i8mo.     IS. 
EASY  SELECTIONS  FROM  LIVY.     Part  i.    The  Kings  of  Rome.    i8?no. 

IS.  6d. 
EASY  LATIN    PASSAGES   FOR    UNSEEN   TRANSLATION.       Fi/t/i 

Edition.     Fcap.  8vo.     \s.  6d. 
EXEMPLA  LATINA.    Firit  Lessons  in  Latin  Accidence.  With  Vocabulary. 

Croion  8vo.     \s. 
EASY  LATIN  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SYNTAX  OF  THE  SHORTER 

AND     REVISED     LATIN     PRIMER.       With    Vocabulary.       Sixth 

Edition.     Crown  8vo.     2s.  6d.     Issued  with  the  consent  of  Dr.  Kennedy. 


40  Messrs.  Methuen's  List 

THE  LATIN  COMPOUND  SENTENCE  :  Rules  and  Exercises.     Crown 

8vo.     IS.  6d.     With  Vocabulary.     2s. 
NOTANDA  QUAEDAM  :  Miscellaneous  Latin  Exercises  on  Common  Rules 

and  Idioms.     Third  Edition.    Fcap.  ?>vo.    \s.  6d.    With  Vocabulary.    2j. 
LATIN  VOCABULARIES  FOR  REPETITION:   Arranged  according  to 

Subjects.     Sixth  Edition.     Fcap.  Zvo.     \s.  6d. 
A  VOCABULARY  OF  LATIN  IDIOMS  AND  PHRASES.     iBmo.     is. 
STEPS  TO  GREEK.     i8mo.     is. 
EASY  GREEK  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLATION.     Second 

Edition.     Fcap.  8vo.     is.  6d. 
GREEK  VOCABULARIES  FOR  REPETITION.     Arranged  according  to 

Subjects,     Second  Edition.     Fcap.  8vo.     \s.  6d. 
GREEK  TESTAMENT  SELECTIONS.     For  the  use  of  Schools.     Third 

Edition.    With  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Vocabulary.    Fcap.  8vo.    is.  td, 
STEPS  TO  FRENCH.     Second  Edition.     i8mo.     M. 
FIRST  FRENCH  LESSONS.     Second  Edition.     Crown  8vo.    is. 
EASY  FRENCH  PASSAGES  FOR  UNSEEN  TRANSLATION.    Second 

Edition.     Fcap.  2>vo.     is.  6d. 
EASY  FRENCH   EXERCISES   ON    ELEMENTARY  SYNTAX.     With. 

Vocabulary.     Crown  2>vo.     2S.  6d. 
FRENCH  VOCABULARIES  FOR  REPETITION:  Arranged  according  to 

Subjects.     Fifth  Edition.     Fcap,  8vo.     is. 

SCHOOL  EXAMINATION  SERIES 

Edited  by  A.  M.  M.  STEDMAN,  M.A.     Crown  Svo.     2s.  6J. 

FRENCH  EXAMINATION    PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS  GRAM-^ 
MAR  AND  IDIOMS.     By  A.  M.  M.  Stedman,  M.A.    Eighth  Edition. 
A  Key,  issued  to  Tutors  and  Private  Students  only,  to  be  had  on 
application  to  tl.e  Publishers.     Second  Edition.     Crown  Zvo.  6s.net. 

LATIN  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS  GRAM- 
MAR AND  IDIOMS.  By  A.  M.  ^\.  Stedman,  M.A.  Seventh  Edition. 
Key  issued  as  above.     6s.  net. 

GREEK  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS  GRAM- 
MAR AND  IDIOMS.  By  A.  M.  M.  Stedman,  M.A.  Fifth  Edition. 
Key  issued  as  above.    6s.  net. 

GERMAN  EXAMINATION  PAPERS  IN  MISCELLANEOUS  GRAM- 
MAR AND  IDIOMS.  By  R.  J.  MORicii,  Manchester.  Fourth  Edition. 
Key  issued  as  above.     6s.  vet. 

HISTORY  AND  Gl'lOGRAPHY  EXAMINATION  PAPERS.  By  C.  H. 
Spence,  M.A.,  Clifton  College. 

SCIENCE  EXAMINATION  PAPERS.  By  R.  E.  Steel,  M.A. ,  F.C.S., 
Chief  Natural  Science  Master,  Br^ulford  Grammar  School.  In  tzvo  vols. 
Part  I.  Chemistry  ;  Part  ii.  Physics. 

GENERAL  KNOWLEDGE  EXAMINATION  PAPERS.  By  A.  M.  M. 
Stedman,  M.A.     Third  Edition.   Key  issr.cd  as  above,     js.  net. 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  Constable,  Printers  to  Her  Majesty 
at  the  Edinburgh  University  Press 


UNTVr    STTY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBR 


•T  t:\7 


mmm_ 


RETURN  TO  nis?*^'*^   "SE 
^  TURN  TO  DBSK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

iOAN  DEPT. 


LD  62A-50W-2  '64 
(E3494sl0)94i2A 


.  GeneraJ  Library